巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Upasobhita: {'def': '[pp. of upasobheti] embellished, beautified, adorned PvA.153, 187; Sdhp.593. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Upasobhati的【过分】), 已修饰，已美化，已装饰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upasoseti: {'def': '(upa近+sus+e),乾燥，凋谢。upasosesi,【过】。upasosita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upa + sus + e), 干燥，凋谢。 upasosesi, 【过】。 upasosita, 【过分】。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upassagga: {'def': 'see upasagga. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upassaya: {'def': '[fr. upa + śri, cp. assaya & missaya] abode, resting home, dwelling, asylum S.I,32, 33; Vv 68⁴; Miln.160. Esp. freq. as bhikkhuni° or bhikkhun° a nunnery Vin.II,259; IV,265, 292; S.II,215; J.I,147, 428; Miln.124. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】住所，家。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】住所，家。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upassaṭṭha: {'def': '【过分】压迫，折磨。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】压迫，折磨。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. upasṛṣṭa, pp. of upa + sṛj] “thrown upon”, overcome, visited, afflicted, ruined, oppressed S.IV,29; A.III,226 (udak°); J.I,61; II,239. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upassuti: {'def': '【阴】偷听他人的私人交谈。 ~ka, 【阳】偷听者。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹upa+su(梵wru, wrus)听到),【阴】近闻(listening to, attention)。upassutika,【阳】近闻者、窃听者(one who listens, an eavesdropper)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. upa + śru] listening to, attention S.II, 75; IV,91; J.V,100; Miln.92. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upassutika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upassuti] one who listens, an eavesdropper J.V,81. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upassāsa: {'def': '[upa + assāsa; upa + ā + śvas] breathing J.I,160. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upasussana: {'def': '【中】变干。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】变乾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upasussati: {'def': '(upa + sus + ya), 变干。 upasussi, 【过】。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+sus(梵wus)弄乾+ya), 变乾。upasussi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[upa + sussati] to dry up M.I,481; Sn.433; J.I,71. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatappati: {'def': '(upa + tap + a), 焦急，苦恼。 upatappi, 【过】。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+tap(梵tap)热+a), 焦急，苦恼。upatappi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[upa + tappati¹)] to be vexed or tormented J.V,90; DhsA.42. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatheyya: {'def': '[for upadheyya, see Trenckner, Notes 62¹⁶] a cushion J.VI,490, 513. (Page 142)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatiṭṭhati: {'def': '[upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, °ṭṭhāti etc.] lit. “to stand by”, to look after, to worship Pv III,1¹⁸; J.II,73 (ādiccaṁ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.); Miln.231 (ger. °tiṭṭhitvā); J.V,173 (°tiṭṭhate). pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa + ṭhā + a), 站在，目送。 upaṭṭhāsi, 【过】。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+ṭhā +a), 站在，目送。upaṭṭhāsi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upatta: {'def': '[upa + akta, pp. of añj] smeared, spread over M.I,343; J.I,399. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatthaddha: {'def': '【形】僵硬，支援。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】僵硬，支援。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[upa + thaddha, pp. of upatthambhati] ‹-› 1. stiff Vin.III,37 (aṅgāni). -- 2. supported or held up by, resting on, founded on, relying on Th.1, 1058, 1194; 2, 72 (yobbanena); J.I,47 (V. 267: mettābalena); V, 121, 301; Kvu 251 (cakkhu dhamm° “when it is the medium of an idea”); Nett 117; Miln.110 (kāruñña-bal°). (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatthambakakamma: {'def': '﹐【中】支助业，它没有机会产生结生的业，但它延长令生业(janakakamma)所生的善恶报，或者是支助令生业所生的五蕴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upatthambha: {'def': '[fr. upa + stambh] -- 1. a support, prop, stay Miln.355, 415, 417; Sdhp.565. -- 2. relief, ease Vin.III,112. -- 3. encouragement J.V,270; DhA.I,279. (Page 142)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】upatthambhana,【中】支援，鼓励，支持者。upatthambhaka,【形】支援，维持。upatthambhakamma, 支助业。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 ~na, 【中】支援，鼓励，支持者。 ~ka, 【形】支援，维持。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upatthambhaka: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining DhsA.153. (Page 142)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatthambhana: {'def': '(nt.) = upatthambha Miln.36; J.I,447; DA.I,124; ThA.258; Vism.279. (Page 142)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatthambheti: {'def': '[upa + thambheti, Caus. of thambhati] to make firm, shore up, support, prop up J.I,127 [ppr. °ayamāna), 447; DA.I,113; DhA.III,73 (°ayamāna ppr.). ‹-› pp. upatthambhita. (Page 142)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa + thamb + e), 使坚定，支援，支持，维持。 ~esi, 【过】。~bhita, 【过分】。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+thamb+e), 使坚定，支援，支援，维持。upatthambhesi,【过】。upatthambhita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upatthambhita: {'def': '[pp. of upatthambheti] propped up, supported, sustained J.I,107; Miln.36; DA.I,234; PvA.117 (puñña-phal°), 148 (utu-āhārehi u.). (Page 142)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatthara: {'def': '【阳】地毯，毯子，遮盖物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. upa + stṛ] a (floor) covering, carpet, rug D.I,103 (rath°); J.II,126 (pabbat°); II,534. (Page 142)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】地毯，毯子，遮盖物。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upatāpa: {'def': '【阳】upatāpana,【中】恼怒，麻烦，懊悔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. upa + tap] vexation, trouble Vism.166. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 upatāpana, 【中】恼怒，麻烦，懊悔。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upatāpaka: {'def': '【形】引起痛苦的，引起懊悔的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】引起痛苦的，引起懊悔的。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upatāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [upa + tāpana] vexation, tormenting, torture J.IV,13; ThA.243. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upatāpeti: {'def': '[upa + tāpeti] to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass J.II,178, 224; IV,11; DhsA.42 (vibādhati +). (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa + tap + e), 使痛苦，使苦恼，骚扰。 upatāpesi,【过】。 upatāpita,【过分】。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+tap(梵tap)热+e), 使痛苦，使苦恼，骚扰。upatāpesi,【过】。upatāpita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upatāpika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upatāpa] causing pain, molesting J.II,224. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavadati: {'def': '(upa + vad + a), 责怪，侮辱。 upavadi, 【过】。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+vad说+a), 责怪，侮辱。upavadi,【过】。, upavadeyyuṁ【3p.祈】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[upa + vad] to tell (secretly) against, to tell tales; to insult, blame D.I,90; S.III,125 (attā sīlato na upav.); A.II,121 (id.); V,88; J.II,196; PvA.13. (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavajja: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of upavadati] blameworthy S.IV,59, 60; A.II,242. an° blameless, without fault S.IV,57 sq; A.IV,82; Miln.391. (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】该受责备的。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】该受责备的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upavajjatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. upavajja] blameworthiness S.IV,59 (an°). (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavana: {'def': '(nt.) [upa + vana, see upa 5] a kind of wood, miniature wood, park J.IV,431; V,249; Miln.1; VvA.170 (= vana), 344; ThA.201; PvA.102 (ārām°), 177 (mahā°). (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】在附近的森林。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】在附近的森林。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upavasati: {'def': '[upa + vasiti]. -- 1. to dwell in or at J.III,113; DA.I,139. -- 2. to live (trs.); to observe, keep (a holy day); only in phrase uposathaṁ upavasati to observe the fast day S.I,208; A.I,142, 144, 205; Sn.402 (ger. upavassa); J.III,444; SnA 199; PvA.209. -- pp. upavuttha (q. v.). See also uposatha. (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa近+vas住+a),住在，观察。upavasi,【过】。upavuttha,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upa + vas + a), 住在，观察。 upavasi, 【过】。 upavuttha, 【过分】。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upavattana: {'def': '【形】有在近旁的。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有在近旁的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upavattati: {'def': '[upa + vṛt] to come to pass, to take place J.VI,58. (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavaṇṇeti: {'def': '[upa + vaṇṇeti] to describe fully Sdhp.487. (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavhyati: {'def': '[upa + ā + hū, cp. avhayati for *āhvayati] to invoke, call upon D.II,259; S.I,168. (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavicarati: {'def': '用心、近伺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upavicāra: {'def': '[upa + vicāra; cp. BSk. upavicāra Divy 19, trsl^d on p. 704 in Notes by “perplexed by doubts” (?)] applying (one’s mind) to, discrimination D.III,245 (domanass°); M.III,239; S.IV,232 (somanass° etc.); A.III,363 sq.; V,134; Ps.I,17; Dh.8, 85, 284; Vbh.381. (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa + vicāra; cp. BSk. upavicāra),【阳】用心、近伺(applying (one’s mind) to, discrimination)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upavijaññā: {'def': '(f.) (adj.) [grd. formation of upa + vi + jan, cp. Sk. vijanya] about to bring forth a child, nearing childbirth M.I,384; Th.2, 218; Ud.13; Dāvs III,38; ThA.197. (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavisati: {'def': '(upa近+vis进入+a),来接近，坐下，留下。upavisi,【过】。upaviṭṭha,【过分】。upāvisuṁ', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upa + vis + a), 来接近，坐下。 upavisi, 【过】。 upaviṭṭha, 【过分】。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[upa + visati] to come near, to approach a person J.IV,408; V,377; aor. upāvisi Sn.415, 418 (āsajja upāvisi = samīpaṁ gantvā nisīdi SnA 384). (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavutta: {'def': '(upavadati 的【过分】), 被谴责过。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upavadati 的【过分】), 被谴责过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upavuttha: {'def': '(upavasati 的【过分】), 已居住，已保持绝食。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of upavasati] celebrated, kept (of a fastday) A.I,211 (uposatha); Sn.403 (uposatha). Cp. uposatha. (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upavasati 的【过分】), 已居住，已保持绝食。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upavāda: {'def': '【阳】责怪，侮辱。 ~ka, 【形】挑剔，责备。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. upa + vad] insulting, railing; blaming, finding fault Nd¹ 386; PvA.269; an° (adj.) not grumbling or abusing Dh.185 (anûpa° metri causa). (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】责怪，侮辱。upavādaka,【形】挑剔，责备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upavādaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upavāda] blaming, finding fault, speaking evil of (Gen.), generally in phrase ariyānaṁ u. insulting the gentle Vin.III,5; A.I,256; III,19; IV,178; V,68; It.58, 99. -- an° Ps.I,115; Pug.60. (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavādin: {'def': '(adj. [fr. upavāda] = upavādaka; in ariy° S.I, 225; II,124; V,266; Pv IV.3³⁹. an° M.I,360. (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavādī: {'def': '【形】责怪者，挑剔者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】责怪者，挑剔者。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upavāhana: {'def': '(nt.) [upa + vāhana] carrying away, washing away Sn.391 (saṅghāṭi-raj-ûpa° = paṁsu-malādino saṅghāṭirajassa dhovanaṁ SnA 375). (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavāsa: {'def': '【阳】绝食，斋戒，戒除享乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. upa + vas, see upavasati] keeping a prescribed day, fasting, self-denial, abstaining from enjoyments [Same as uposatha; used extensively in BSk. in meaning of uposatha, e. g. at Av. Ś I.338, 339; Divy 398 in phrase aṣṭânga-samanvāgataṁ upavāsaṁ upavasati] A.V,40 (? uncertain; vv. ll. upāsaka, ovāpavāssa, yopavāsa); J.VI,508; SnA 199 (in expl^n. of uposatha). (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavāsana: {'def': '【中】芳香。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】芳香。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upavāseti: {'def': '(upa近+vas住+e), 洒香水。upavāsesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upa + vas + e), 洒香水。 upavāsesi, 【过】。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upavāsita: {'def': '(adj.) (upa + vāsita) perfumed PvA.164 (for gandha-samerita). (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavāyati: {'def': '[upa + vāyati] to blow on or towards somebody M.I,424; A.IV,46; Th.1, 544; Pv III,6⁶; Miln.97. (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa + vā + a), 吹向。 upavāyi, 【过】。 Upavāsa, 【阳】绝食，斋戒，戒除享乐。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+vā吹+a), 吹向。upavāyi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upavīna: {'def': '[upa + vīṇā] the neck of a lute S.IV,197; Miln.53. (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavīta: {'def': '[?] covered (?) at VvA.8 in phrase “vettalatâdīhi upavītaṁ āsanaṁ” should prob. be read upanīta (vv. ll. uparivīta & upajita); or could it be pp. of upavīyati (woven with)? (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Upavīyati的【过分】) 被针织。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upavīyati: {'def': '(upa + vā + ī + ya), 被针织。 upavīyi, 【过】。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+vā+ī+ya), 被针织。upavīyi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of upa + vā² to weave] te be woven J.VI,26. (Page 147)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upavīṇa: {'def': '【阳】琵琶的脖子。(p75)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】琵琶的颈部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upaya: {'def': '[fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] approach, undertaking, taking up; clinging to, attachment, only as adj. (-°) in an° (anûpaya metri causā) not going near, aloof, unattached S.I,141, 181; II,284; Sn.786, 787, 897 (cp. SnA 558); and in rūpûpaya (vv. ll. rūpupaya & rūpupāya) “clinging to form” (etc.) S.III,53 = Nd¹ 25 = Nd² 570 (+ rup’ārammaṇa). (Page 145)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】执着。(p74)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹upa+i, cp.upāya),【阳】接近(approach)，从事(undertaking)，执著(clinging to, attachment)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upayoga: {'def': '(‹upa+yuj),【阳】连接(connection)，结合(combination)，雇用(employment)，应用(application)。upayogattavacana﹐连接记号或省略词记号(ellipsis)。upayogavacanaṁ, 业格、受格、对格、宾格(accusative)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】连接，雇用，应用。(p74)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. upa + yuj] connection, combination; employment, application J.VI,432 (nagare upayogaṁ netvā for use in the town? v. l. upabhogaṁ). Usually in cpd. °vacana as tt. g. meaning either combined or condensed expression, ellipsis SnA 386; KhA 236; PvA.73, 135; or the Acc. case, which is frequently substituted for the foll. cases: sāmi-vacana SnA 127; PvA.102; bhumma° SnA 140; KhA 116; karaṇa° SnA 148; sampadāna° J.V,214; SnA 317; itthambhūta° SnA 441; nissakka° J.V,498. (Page 145)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upayuñjati: {'def': '(upa近+yuj连接+ṁ-a) 接连(connect with)，应用(to use, to apply)。upayuñji,【过】。upayutta,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upa + yuj + ŋ-a) 接连，练习。 upayuñji, 【过】。 upayutta, 【过分】。(p74)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[upa + yuj] to combine, connect with; to use, apply; ppr. med. upayujjamāna VvA.245 (preferably be read as °bhuñjamāna, with reference to enjoying drink & food). (Page 145)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upayācati: {'def': '(upa + yāc + a), 请求，乞求，恳求。 upayāci, 【过】。 Upayāti (upa + yā + a), 走进。(p74)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[upa + yācati] to beg, entreat, pray to J.VI,150 (divyaṁ). (Page 145)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa近+yāc+a), 请求，乞求，恳求。upayāci,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upayācitaka: {'def': '(nt.) [of adj. upa + yācita + ka; pp. of yācati] begging, asking, praying, propitiation J.VI,150 (= devatānaṁ āyācana). (Page 145)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upayāna: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. upa + yā, cp. BSk. upayāna Jtm 31⁶³] nearing, approach, arrival D.I,10; DA.I,94. (Page 145)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upayānaka: {'def': '[fr. upayāna] a crab J.VI,530. (Page 145)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upayāti: {'def': '[upa + yāti of yā] to go to, to approach S.I,76; II,118 (also Caus. °yāpeti); Dpvs VI,69; Sdhp.579. (Page 145)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa近+yā去+a), 走进。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upaññāta: {'def': '(upajānāti 的【过分】), 已发现，已学，已知。(p71)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of upajānāti] found out, learnt, known Vin.I,40; J.V,325, 368; A.I,61. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upajānāti 的【过分】), 已发现，已学，已知。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upaḍayhati: {'def': '(upa + dah + ya), 被燃烧。 upaḍayhi, 【过】。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa近+dah放置+ya), 被燃烧。upaḍayhi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[upa + ḍayhati] to be burnt up Miln.277. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upaḍḍha: {'def': '【形】一半。【中】一半。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】一半。【中】一半。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [upa + aḍḍha, used abs. whereas aḍḍha only in comp^n., cp. also BSk. upārdha Divy 86, 144, 514; AvS.I,211, 240] half Vin.I,281 (°kāsina); II,200 (°āsana); J.III,11 (°rajja); Vism.320 (°gāma); DhA.I,15, 205 (°uposathakamma); II,85; KhA 239 (°gāthā); SnA 298; VvA.38, 61, 120; PvA.209, 276. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upaḷāseti: {'def': '[upa + Caus. of las] to sound forth, to (make) sound (a bugle) D.II,337 (for uppaḷāseti? q. v.). (Page 146)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upaṭṭhahati: {'def': '& °ṭṭhāti [upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati] 1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with Acc.), to wait on, attend on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin.I,50, 302; IV,326; M.III,25; S.I,167; A.III,94; V,72; Sn.82 = 481 (imper. °ṭṭhahassu); J.I,67 (ppr. °ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. °ṭṭhahanto); IV,131; V,396; Dpvs II.16; PvA.19, 20. -- aor. upaṭṭhahi PvA.14, 42, 82. -- inf. upaṭṭhātuṁ A.V,72; PvA.20. -- ger. upaṭṭhahitvā PvA.76. -- grd. upaṭṭhātabba Vin.I,302; PvA.20. -- pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). -- 2. (intrs.) to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present M.I,104 sq.; A.IV,32; J.IV,203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); V,207; Miln.64; ThA.258. ‹-› aor. upaṭṭhāsi J.I,61; IV,3; PvA.42. -- Caus. I. upaṭṭheti; Caus. II. upaṭṭhapeti & °ṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). -- Pass. upaṭṭhīyati J.IV,131 (ppr. °ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati A.III,94 (ppr. °ṭṭhahiyamāna). (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'upaṭṭhāti (upa + ṭhā + a), 等候，侍候，照顾，看护，服侍，明白。 upaṭṭhahi, upaṭṭhāsi, 【过】。(p71)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Upaṭṭhāti (upa近+ṭhā +a), 等候，侍候，看护，站立在近处，近住，全部存续。upaṭṭhahi, upaṭṭhāsi,【过】。upaṭṭhita,【过分】。ratti upaṭṭhitā, 夜晚降临。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upaṭṭhahitvā: {'def': 'upaṭṭhitvā, upaṭṭhiya, (Upaṭṭhahati的【独】), 侍候了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upaṭṭhapeti: {'def': '(upa + ṭhā + e), 提供，获得，颁布，使出席，使等候。 upaṭṭhapesi, 【过】。(p71)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upaṭṭhahati的【使】), 令伺候，使提供，使获得，使颁布，使出席。upaṭṭhapesi,【过】。【不】upaṭṭhāpetuṁ,【独】upaṭṭhāpetvā。upaṭṭhāpessanti, 【3.复.未】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& °ṭṭhāpeti [Caus. II. of upaṭṭhahati] 1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin.II,210; D.II,19; M.I,429; J.I,266; IV,2; V,218; Pug.59, 68; Miln.15, 257, 366 (pānīyaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ), 397; DA.I,270; Sdhp.356. -- 2. to cause to be present Vin.I,45; S.I,170; Pv IV.1⁷⁰. -- 3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed A.V,72 (gilānaṁ upaṭṭhātuṁ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṁ vā). -- 4. to keep (a servant) for hire Vin.II,267. ‹-› 5. to ordain Vin.I,62, 83. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upaṭṭheti: {'def': '[Caus. of upaṭṭhahati] to make serve or attend; sakkaccaṁ u. (with Acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin.IV,275. fut. °essati Vin.IV,291. to place, fix (parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upaṭṭhita: {'def': '(upaṭṭhāti 的【过分】), 已准备好，已到达，已出席，已服侍。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upaṭṭhāti 的【过分】), 已准备好，已到达，已出席，已服侍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. BSk. upasthita Divy 281, 342] -- 1. furnished provided, served, got ready, honoured with Sn.295 (°asmiṁ yaññasmiṁ); J.V,173 (annena pānena); Pv.I,5² (= sajjita paṭiyatta PvA.25); II,98 (= payirupāsita PvA.116); PvA.132. ‹-› 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Sn.130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come), 898; Dh.235; Miln.274; PvA.124 (dānakāle °e). ‹-› 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness M.I,77; A.II,206; Sn.708 (= ṭhito C.); Pv.II,9⁵³ (ready for service, serving, waiting upon cp. PvA.135.

--sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed, concentrated Vin.I,63; D.III,252, 282; S.IV,186; A.III,251; Pug.25. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upaṭṭhāka: {'def': '【阳】仆人，护士，从者。(p71)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. upa + sthā, cp. BSk. upasthāka M Vastu I.251, and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Av. Ś. I.214; II,85, 112.] a servitor, personal attendant, servant, “famulus”. Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha (see D.I,206; Th.1, 1041 f.; ThA.in Brethren Loc. cit.; Vin.I,179 (Sāgato u.), 194; II,186; III,66; IV,47; D.I,150 (Nāgita); S.III,113; A.I,121; III,31, 189; J I 15, 100 (a merchant’s); II,416; Pug.28; DhA.II,93; VvA.149; PvA.211. -- agg° main follower, chief attendant D.II,6; gilān° an attendant in sickness, nurse Vin.I,303; A.I,26; saṅgh° one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin.I,216; A.I,26; III,39. -- dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka a bad (& good) attendant Vin.I,302.

--kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (Gen.) Vin.I,83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; III,62, 66, 67; IV,283, 286; VvA.120. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】仆人，护士，侍者。世尊成道后二十年间的侍者曾经有：Nāgasamālo那伽娑摩罗(见Ud.8-7、Thag.no.186.vv.267~270)，Nāgito那祇多(A.5.30.、A.6.42.、A.8.86.、《杂阿含1250经》、Thag.no.86.v.86.)，Upavāṇo优波摩那(见S.7.13.= 《杂阿含1181经》、S.12.26.、S.35.70.= 《杂阿含252经》、S.46.8.= 《杂阿含719经》、Thag.no.153.vv.185~186.等)，Sunakkhatto须那迦陀(善宿)(见D.24.波梨经等), Cundo纯陀(、??Thag.no.131.vv.141-142.)，Nando难陀(、Thag.no.139.vv.157-158.)，Sāgato娑竭陀(A.1.14./I,25.说他是火界善巧者Tejodhātukusalānaṁ)，Meghiyo(梵Mihira)弥醯(见Ud.4-1、Thag.no.66.v.66.) (JA.v.456./IV,95.)。JA.v.456./IV,95.︰“1Sace me bhante, Bhagavā attanā laddhacīvaraṁ na dassati, 2piṇḍapātaṁ na dassati, 3Ekagandhakuṭiyaṁ vasituṁ na dassati, 4maṁ gahetvā nimantanaṁ na gamissati, 5sace pana Bhagavā mayā gahitaṁ nimantanaṁ gamissati, 6sace ahaṁ tiroraṭṭhā tirojanapadā Bhagavantaṁ daṭṭhuṁ āgataṁ parisaṁ āgatakkhaṇeyeva dassetuṁ,(JA.IV,96.) 7labhissāmi yadā me kaṅkhā uppajjati, tasmiṁ khaṇeyeva Bhagavantaṁ upasaṅkamituṁ labhissāmi, 8sace yaṁ Bhagavā mama parammukhā dhammaṁ katheti, taṁ āgantvā mayhaṁ kathessati, evāhaṁ Bhagavantaṁ upaṭṭhahissāmī”ti ime cattāro paṭikkhepe catasso ca āyācanāti aṭṭha vare yāci, Bhagavāpissa adāsi.((1)我不接受世尊的衣。(2)不接受(世尊的)钵食。(3)不(与世尊)同住香室。(4)世尊接受邀请供养，我不陪同。(5)如果有邀请供养，将邀请转给世尊。(6)如果有远客，有权引导来客见世尊。(7)如果我有任何疑惑，有权在那时往诣世尊(厘清它们)。(8)当我不在场，世尊所说的法，他有权私下请世尊为他重说一遍。如蒙应允，我愿意侍侯世尊。」四个拒绝、四个恳求，共请求八个恩惠，世尊都允诺了。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upaṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】等候，照顾，服务，理解。 ~sālā, 【阴】出席的厅堂，集会厅。(p72)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】侍候，照顾，理解。upaṭṭhānasālā,【阴】出席的厅堂，集会厅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '﹐【中】现起，随侍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] -- 1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering A.I,151, 225; Sn.138; J.I,226, 237, 291; II,101; IV,138; VI,351. Ps.I,107; II,7 sq., 28, 230; PvA.104, 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176; VvA.75 (ther°); Sdhp.560. -- 2. worship, (divine) service D.III,188 sq. (°ṁ gacchati); PvA.122. Buddh° attendance on a Buddha PvA.93; ThA.18. ‹-› 3. a state room J.III,257.

--sambhāra means of catering, provisions PvA.20. --sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel [cp. BSk. upasthāna-śālā Divy 207] Vin.I,49, 139; II,153, 208; III, 70 (at Vesālī); IV,15, 42; D.II,119 (at Vesālī); S.II,280; V,321; A.II,51, 197; III,298; DhA.I,37, 38; III,413. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upaṭṭhāpana: {'def': '(fr. upa + sthā) ,【中】侍候，照顾，理解(attendance, service Vin.IV,291.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] attendance, service Vin.IV,291. (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upaṭṭita: {'def': '[upa + aṭṭita, from ard, see aṭṭita] pained, terrified; overcome, overwhelmed J.VI,82 (visavegena). (Page 141)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upekkhaka: {'def': '【形】漠不关心的，不感兴趣的。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】旁观的，不感兴趣的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upekkhā] disinterested, resigned, stoical Vin.III,4; D.I,37, 183; III,113, 222, 245, 269, 281; S.V,295 sq., 318; A.III,169 sq., 279; V,30; Sn.515, 855, 912; It.81; Nd¹ 241, 330; Pug.50, 59; Dhs.163; DhsA.172. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upekkhanā: {'def': 'upekkhā, upekhā, 【阴】中立，镇定，不关心。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. upa + īkṣ] is commentator’s paraphrase for upekkhā (q. v.) Nd¹ 501 = Nd² 166; Vbh.230. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'upekkhā, upekhā (upa近+ikkh(梵īks)见),【阴】中立，镇定，旁观(looking on)。upekkhāsatipārisuddhi(upekkhā舍-sati念-pārisuddhi清净), 舍念清净。可以解读作︰1.舍与念及清净。2.舍与念之清净。3.舍与由念而有的清净。*4.舍与念二者之清净。*5.由舍与念而有的清净。*6.由舍而有的念之清净。7.由舍而有的念和清净。8.舍的念的清净。9.舍之念与清净。10.由舍之念而有的清净。(水野弘元著，许洋主译，《巴利文法》，世界佛学名著译丛5，华宇出版社，1986年，页243。*4、*5、*6项为学界常解读的方式。第5项「由舍与念而有的(心)清净」可能最正确。「具舍与念，心极清净」，也就是「舍」、「念」、「清净」三个词，都是描述第四禅禅心的状态。--蔡奇林︰《第四禅「舍念清净」(upekkhā-sati-pārisuddhi)一语的重新解读》) Vism.167︰Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatiyā pārisuddhiṁ. Imasmuñ hi jhāne suparisuddhā sati, yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā, na aññena; tasmā etaṁ upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti vuccati. Vibhaṅge pi vuttaṁ :- ayaṁ sati imāya upekkhāya visadā (v.l. vivaṭā) hoti parisuddhā pariyodātā tena vuccati Upekkhāsatipārisuddhī ti (「舍念清净」意即：由舍所生的念的清净。因为在此禅中，念极清净，而此念的清净，是由舍所造，非由其他；因此说为「舍念清净」。在《分别论》中也说：此念由於此舍而变得明净(异读：显明)、清净、皎洁，因此说为「舍念清净」。)其中所引《分别论》的原文出处是Vibh. 261，其中visadā (明净) 在《分别论》读作vivaṭā (显明、没有遮蔽)。Vism. 168︰Na kevalañ c’ ettha tāya satiy’ eva parisuddhā, api ca kho sabbe pi sampayuttadhammā, satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.(这里不单只是念的清净，而是所有(与念)相应之法也都清净，然而，此项教说(只是)以念为首而说)。Vism. 168︰Tassā (ie. tatramajjhattupekkhāya) parisuddhacandalekhā pabhā viya, sahajatā pi sati-ādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā.(由於彼(中舍tatramajjhattupekkhā)清净之故──就像是清净的新月之光一样，与之相伴而生的念等(诸法)也变得清净、皎洁。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upekkhati: {'def': '(upa近+ikkh见+a), 旁观。upekkhi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upa + ikkh + a), 漠不关心。 upekkhi, 【过】。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[upa + īkṣ] to look on, to be disinterested or indifferent Sn.911; Nd¹ 328; J.VI,294. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upekkhavant: {'def': '(adj.) = upekkhaka J.V,403. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upekkhiya: {'def': 'upekkhitvā, 【独】中立，漠不关心。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'upekkhitvā,【独】中立，旁观。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upekkhā: {'def': '舍、中舍，中性的(感受)。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '舍;平等心', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '& Upekhā (f.) [fr. upa + īkṣ, cp. BSk. upekṣā Divy 483; Jtm 211. On spelling upekhā for upekkhā see Müller P. Gr. 16] “looking on”, hedonic neutrality or indifference, zero point between joy & sorrow (Cpd. 66); disinterestedness, neutral feeling, equanimity. Sometimes equivalent to adukkham-asukha-vedanā “feeling which is neither pain nor pleasure”. See detailed discussion of term at Cpd. 229--232, & cp. Dhs.trsl^n. 39. -- Ten kinds of upekkhā are enum^d. at DhsA.172 (cp. Dhs.trsl^n. 48; Hardy, Man. Buddhism 505). -- D 138 (°sati-parisuddhi purity of mindfulness which comes of disinterestedness cp. Vin.III,4; Dhs.165 & Dhs.trsln^n. 50), 251; II,279 (twofold); III,50, 78, 106, 224 sq., 239, 245 (six °upavicāras), 252, 282; M.I,79, 364; III 219; S.IV,71, 114 sq., V.209 sq. (°indriya); A I 42; 81 (°sukha), 256 (°nimitta); III,185, 291 (°cetovimutti); IV,47 sq., 70 sq., 300, 443; V,301, 360; Sn.67, 73, 972, 1107, (°satisaṁsuddha); Nd¹ 501 = Nd² 166; Ps.I,8, 36, 60, 167, 177; Pug.59 (°sati); Nett 25, 97 (°dhātu), 121 sq.; Vbh.12, 15 (°indriya), 54 (id.), 69, 85 (°dhātu), 228, 324, 326 (°sambojjhaṅga), 381 (°upavicāra); Dhs.150, 153, 165, 262, 556, 1001, 1278, 1582; Vism.134 (°sambojjhaṅga, 5 conditions of), 148 (°ânubrūhanā), 160 (def. & tenfold), 317 (°bhāvanā), 319 (°brahmavihāra), 325 (°vihārin), 461; SnA 128; Sdhp.461. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upeta: {'def': '(Upeti的【过分】), 已获得，已赋予。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of upeti] furnished with, endowed with, possessed of Sn.402, 463, 700, 722; Dh.10, 280; Nd² s. v., Th.1, 789; Pv.I,7⁶ (bal°); II 7¹² (phal°, v. l. preferable °upaga), IV.1¹² (ariyaṁ aṭṭhaṅgavaraṁ upetan = aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetaṁ yuttaṁ PvA.243); Vism.18 (+ sam°, upagata, samupagata etc); PvA.7. -- Note. The BSk. usually has samanvāgata for upeta (see aṭṭhaṅga). (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upeti: {'def': '[upa + i] to go to (with Acc.), come to, approach, undergo, attain D.I,55 (paṭhavi-kāyaṁ an-upeti does not go into an earthly body), 180; M.I,486 (na upeti, as answer: “does not meet the question”); S.III,93; It.89; Sn.209, (na saṅkhaṁ “cannot be reckoned as”) 749, 911, 1074; 728 (dukkhaṁ), 897; Sn.404 (deve); Nd¹ 63; Nd² 167; Dh.151, 306, 342; Sn.318; J.IV,309 (maraṇaṁ upeti to die), 312 (id.), 463 (id.); V,212 (v. l. opeti, q. v.); Th.1, 17 (gabbhaṁ); Pv.II,3³⁴ (saggaṁ upehi ṭhānaṁ); IV, 3⁵² (saraṇaṁ buddhaṁ dhammaṁ); Nett 66; fut. upessaṁ Sn.29; 2^nd sg. upehisi Dh.238, 348. -- ger. upecca Vv 33⁷; S.I,209 = Nett 131; VvA.146 (realising = upagantvā cetetvā vā); PvA.103 (gloss for uppacca flying up); see also upiya & uppacca. -- pp. upeta. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa近+i+a), 靠近，获得。upesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upa + i + a), 靠近，获得。 upesi, 【过】。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upetvā: {'def': 'upecca, (Upeti的【独】), 靠近了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upiya: {'def': '[ger. of upeti] undergoing, going into, metri causa as ūpiya (-°) and opiya, viz. hadayasmiṁ opiya S I 199 = Th.1, 119; senûpiya J.V,96 (v. l. senopiya; C. sayanûpagata). In tadûpiya the 2^nd part upiya represents an adj. upaka fr. upa (see ta I. a), thus found at Miln.9. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uplavana: {'def': '【中】漂浮的，升上表面。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】漂浮的，升上表面。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uplavati: {'def': '(u + plav + a), 飘浮，升到表面。 uplavi, 【过】。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(u出+plav+a), 飘浮，升到表面。uplavi,【过】。cf. plavati (飘浮)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uplāpeti: {'def': '[Sk. avaplāvayati, Caus. of ava + plu, with substitution of ud for ava; see also uppilavati] to immerse M.I,135 (vv. ll. upal° & opil°); J.IV,162 (fig. put into the shade, overpower; v. l. upal°). See also opilāpeti & ubbillāvita. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upocita: {'def': '[pp. of upa + ava + ci] heaped up, abounding, comfortable J.IV,471. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uposatha: {'def': '【阳】布萨，斋戒日，遵守八戒，佛教比丘每半个月诵波罗提木叉。 ~kamma, 【中】布萨业，遵守布萨。【中】布萨堂。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '布萨', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '[Vedic upavasatha, the eve of the Soma sacrifice, day of preparation]. At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon’s waxing and waning, viz. 1^st, 8^th, 15^th, 23^d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath. These days were utilized by the pre-Buddhistic reforming communities for the expounding of their views, Vin.I,101. The Buddhists adopted this practice and on the 15^th day of the half-month held a chapter of the Order to expound their dhamma, ib. 102. They also utilized one or other of these Up. days for the recitation of the Pāṭimokkha (pāṭimokkhuddesa), ibid. On Up. days laymen take upon themselves the Up. vows, that is to say, the eight Sīlas, during the day. See Sīla. The day in the middle of the month is called cātudassiko or paṇṇarasiko according as the month is shorter or longer. The reckoning is not by the month (māsa), but by the half-month (pakkha), so the twenty-third day is simply aṭṭhamī, the same as the eighth day. There is an accasional Up. called sāmaggi-uposatho, “reconciliation-Up.”, which is held when a quarrel among the fraternity has been made up, the Gen. confession forming as it were a seal to the reconciliation (Vin.V,123; Mah. 42). -- Vin.I,111, 112, 175, 177; II,5, 32, 204, 276; III,164, 169; D.III,60, 61, 145, 147; A.I,205 sq. (3 uposathas: gopālaka°, nigaṇṭha°, ariya°), 208 (dhamm°), 211 (devatā°); IV,248 (aṭṭhaṅga-samannāgata), 258 sq. (id.), 276, 388 (navah aṅgehi upavuttha); V,83; Sn.153 (pannaraso u); Vbh.422; Vism.227 (°sutta = A.I,206 sq.); Sdhp.439; DA.I,139; SnA 199; VvA.71, 109; PvA.66, 201. -- The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited is called uposathaggaṁ (Vin.III,66), or °āgāraṁ (Vin.I,107; DhA.II,49). The Up. service is called °kamma (Vin.I,102; V,142; J.I,232; III,342, 444; DhA.I,205). uposathaṁ karoti to hold the Up. service (Vin.I,107, 175, 177; J.I,425). Keeping the Sabbath (by laymen) is called uposathaṁ upavasati (A.I,142, 144, 205, 208; IV,248; see upavasati), or uposathavāsaṁ vasati (J.V,177). The ceremony of a layman taking upon himself the eight sīlas is called uposathaṁ samādiyati (see sīlaṁ & samādiyati); uposatha-sīla observance of the Up. (VvA.71). The Up. day or Sabbath is also called uposatha-divasa (J.III,52). (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'posatha, (梵(u)posatha、upavasatha，‹upa近+vas住),【阳】布萨，斋戒日，遵守八戒(At the time of the rise of Buddhism the word had come to mean the day preceding four stages of the moon’s waxing and waning, viz. 1st, 8th, 15th, 23d nights of the lunar month that is to say, a weekly sacred day, a Sabbath.)；佛教比丘每半个月(阴历十五(full moon望日)与阴历二九(或三十)(朔日)诵波罗提木叉戒与斋戒的日子)诵波罗提木叉(比丘守则)。uposathakamma,【中】布萨业，遵守布萨(戒)。uposathagga,【中】布萨堂(The hall or chapel in the monastery in which the Pāṭimokkha is recited (Vin.III,66))。aṭṭhaṅga-samannāgata uposatha﹐八关斋法(八支具足布萨(戒))。〈根本布萨经〉(A.III,70.Mūluposatha Sutta)记载，佛陀为毘舍佉详细解释牧牛者的布萨、尼乾外道的布萨、圣者的布萨三种布萨的不同。佛陀於此经开示，圣者的布萨是要藉由随念如来、法、僧、戒、与天的修持，而使心清净且断烦恼。另外，在〈根本布萨经〉、〈布萨经〉Uposatha Sutta〈A.VIII,41〉与〈毘舍佉布萨经〉Visakhuposatha Sutta〈VIII,43〉，佛陀又为比丘与毘舍佉解释，圣弟子如何成就八分布萨，而得大果与利益。求戒者向比丘念求受三皈依八戒文：Ahaṁ, bhante, tisaraṇena saddhiṁ uposatha-a??haṅgasīlaṁ dhammaṁ yācāmi.我尊者三皈依与布萨八 | 支 | 戒法我乞求阿亨盘蝶帝沙拉涅那沙丁乌婆沙它阿它葛西囊汤忙亚遮咪大德，我乞求三皈依和八戒法。(第二、三遍，念诵同文，或开头加上︰Dutiyam’pi(第二遍), Tatiyam’pi(第三遍))正授八戒念诵文：1. Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi.有息者| 杀离学处我受持 (pāṇā有息者+atipātā杀) atipāta “falling on to”; attack slaying 巴那帝巴大唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密 (我受持离杀生戒 )2. A-dinnādānā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi.不给予+拿起(ādānā) 离学处我受持阿地那他那唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密 (我受持离偷盗戒 )3. A-brahma-cariyā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi. 非梵、净行为离学处我受持阿巴拉妈喳里呀唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密我受持离非梵行戒)4. Musā-vādā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi. 虚妄语离学处我受持木沙哇他唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密 (我受持离妄语戒)5. Surā-meraya-majja-pamāda-ṭṭhānā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi. 须罗酒迷罗耶酒烈酒 (令)放逸 (依)处离学处我受持稣拉美拉呀妈车巴妈达它那唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密 (我受持离饮酒戒)6. Vi-kāla-bhojanā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi. 非时食离学处我受持唯卡了婆喳那唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密 (我受持离非时食戒)7.Nacca-gīta-vādita-visūka-dassanā mālā-gandha-vilepana-dhāraṇa-maṇḍana- 舞蹈唱歌奏乐戏剧看花鬘薰香涂油受持化妆纳这吉得哇地得唯稣格达色纳妈拉干得唯累伯纳达腊纳曼他纳vibhūsana-ṭṭhānā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi. 装饰处离学处我受持唯不色纳他那唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密 (我受持离跳舞、唱歌、奏乐、看戏，及离以花鬘、香水、涂油、化妆、装饰戒。)8. Uccā-sayana-mahā-sayanā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi.高床大(=豪华) 床离学处我受持屋喳沙呀纳妈哈沙呀纳唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密( 我受持离(坐卧)高床、大床戒。)受五戒者，第3条改念此条戒︰3. Kāmesu micchācārā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi. 淫欲邪 | 行离学处我受持葛美舒米恰遮拉唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密 (我受持离邪淫戒)受十戒者多念此条戒︰Jātarūpa-rajata-paṭiggahaṇā veramaṇī-sikkhāpadaṁ samādiyāmi.%b金银接受、拿取离学处我受持者搭鲁巴拉者搭巴低葛哈那唯腊妈尼昔卡巴当三妈地呀密 (我受持离金银戒。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uposathika: {'def': '【形】遵守八戒者。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. uposatha] -- 1. belonging to the Uposatha in phrase anuposathikaṁ (adv.) on every U., i. e. every fortnight Vin.IV,315. -- 2. observing the Sabbath, fasting (cp. BSk. uposadhika M Vastu II.9); Vin.I,58; IV, 75, 78; J.III,52; Vism.66 (bhatta); DhA.I,205. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】遵守八戒者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uposathin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upusatha] = uposathika, fasting Mhvs 17, 6. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppabbajati: {'def': '[ud + pabbajati] to leave the Order DhA.I,68; PvA.55. -- pp. °pabbajita. -- Caus. uppabbājeti to turn out of the Order J.IV,219; DhA.IV,195. -- Caus. II. uppabbajāpeti to induce some one to leave the Order J.IV,304. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+pa+vaj+a), 还俗。uppabbaji,【过】。uppabbajitvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppabbajita: {'def': '(uppabbajati的【过分】), 已还俗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppabbajjta: {'def': '[ud + pabbajita] one who has left the community of bhikkhus, an ex-bhikkhu VvA.319; DhA.I,311. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppabbājeti: {'def': '(uppabbajita的【使】), 驱逐出僧团。uppabbājesi,【过】。uppabbājita,【过分】。uppabbājetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppacca: {'def': '[ger. of uppatati] flying up Th.2, 248 (see under upacca)); S.I,209 (v. l. BB. upecca, C. uppatitvā pi sakuṇo viya) = Pv.II,7¹⁷ (= uppatitvā PvA.103) = DhA.IV,21 (gloss uppatitvā) = Nett 131 (upecca). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppaccati: {'def': '[ud + paccati, Pass. of pac] in ppr. uppacciyamāna (so read for upapacciyamāna, as suggested by v. l. BB. uppajj°) “being boiled out”, i. e. dried or shrivelled up (cp. uppakka 1) J.IV,327. Not with Morris J P T S. 1887, 129 “being tormented”, nor with Kern, Toev. under upapacc° as ppr. to pṛc (*upapṛcyamāna) “dicht opgesloten”, a meaning foreign to this root. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppajjamāna: {'def': '【现分】参考 uppajjanaka。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【现分】已出生，已形成。参考 uppajjanaka。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppajjana: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. uppajjati] coming into existence; birth, rebirth PvA.9 (°vasena), 33 (id.). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】出现，出生。uppajjanaka,【形】出生的，形成的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppajjanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. uppajjana] (belonging to) coming into existence, i. e. arising suddenly or without apparent cause, in °bhaṇḍa a treasure trove J.III,150. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppajjati: {'def': '(u出+pad去+ya), 生起，出现，被产生(to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence)。uppajji,【过】。uppajjeyya, 【未被】。uppajjamāna,【现分】。uppajjiṁsu,【3复.过】。uppādāya,【过】。S.12.66./II,108.︰‘Taṇhā panāyaṁ kattha uppajjamānā uppajjati, kattha nivisamānā nivisatī’ti? So sammasamāno evaṁ jānāti--yaṁ kho loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati. Kiñca loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ? Cakkhuṁ loke piyarūpaṁ, sātarūpaṁ. Etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisati.(然而，此渴爱生时在何处生？住时在何处住？他如是彻底地知道：「在此世间，凡是可爱色、可意色，渴爱生时在此处生，住时在此处住。」) uppajjamānā uppajjati, … nivisamānā nivisati.古译常作︰「生时生、住时住」。nuppajjati(na+uppajjati), 【反】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(u + pad + ya), 出生，出现。 uppajji, 【过】。 Uppajjana, 【中】出现，出生。 ~ka, 【形】出生的，形成的。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ud + pajjati of pad] to come out, to arise, to be produced, to be born or reborn, to come into existence D.I,180; Sn.584; Pv.II,1¹¹ (= nibbattati PvA.71); PvA.8 (nibbattati +), 9, 20, 129 (= pātubhavati); DA.I,165. ‹-› Pass. uppajjiyati Vin.I,50. -- ppr. uppajjanto PvA.5, 21; fut. °pajjissati PvA.5 (bhummadevesu, corresp. with niraye nibbattissati ibid.), 67 (niraye); aor. uppajji PvA.21, 50, 66; & udapādi (q. v.) Vin.III,4; J.I,81; ger. °pajjitvā D.II,157 = S.I,6, 158 = II.193 = J.I,392 = Th.1, 1159; & uppajja J.IV,24. -- Caus. uppādeti (q. v.). ‹-› pp. uppanna (q. v.). See also upapajjati and upapanna. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppajjitabba: {'def': '【潜】适合出生，适合出现。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【义】适合出生，适合出现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppajjitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. uppajjati] one who produces or is reborn in (with Acc.) D.I,143 (saggaṁ etc.). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppakitaka: {'def': 'indexed at Ud.III,2 wrongly for upakkitaka (q. v.). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppakka: {'def': '【形】肿胀的，烧焦的。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】肿胀的，烧焦的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ud + pac, cp. Sk. pakva & see also uppaccati] -- 1. “boiled out”, scorched, seared, dried or shrivelled up; in phrase itthiṁ uppakkaṁ okiliniṁ okiriniṁ Vin.III,107 = S.II,260; expl^d. by Bdhgh. Vin.III,273 as “kharena agginā pakkasarīra”. -- 2. “boiled up”, swollen (of eyes through crying) J.VI,10. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppala: {'def': '[Sk. utpala, uncertain etym.] the (blue) lotus; a waterlily. The 7 kinds of lotuses, mentioned at J.V,37 are: nīla-ratta-set-uppala, ratta-seta-paduma, seta-kumuda, kalla-hāra. -- D.I,75; II,19; Vin.III,33 (°gandha); J.II,443; Dh.55; Vv 32²; 35⁴; Pv.II,1²⁰; III,10⁵; DhA.I,384 (nīl°); III,394 (id.); ThA.254, 255; VvA.132, 161. ‹-› What is meant by uppala-patta (lotus-leaf?) at Vin.IV,261? (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵utpala),【中】青莲，优鉢罗花，即睡莲。学名 Nymphaea tetragona，属睡莲科。若冠青色(nila)，泥庐鉢罗花(巴niluppala；梵 nilotpala)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】睡莲。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppala niraya: {'def': '青莲花地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Uppalaka: {'def': '[uppala + ka] “lotus-like”, N. of a hell (cp. BSk. utpala at Divy 67 etc.) A.V,173. See also puṇḍarika. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppalavaṇṇā: {'def': 'f. 蓮華色 [比丘尼].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 蓮華色 [比丘尼].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Uppalin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. uppala] having lotuses rich in l., only in f. uppalinī a lotus-pond D.I,75; II,38; S.I,138; A.III,26; Vv 32²; DA.I,219. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppalinī: {'def': '【阴】充满睡莲的池塘或湖。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】充满睡莲的池塘或湖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppanna: {'def': '[pp. of uppajjati] born, reborn, arisen, produced, D.I,192 (lokaṁ u. born into the world); Vin.III,4; Sn.55 °ñāṇa; see Nd² 168), 998; J.I,99; Pv.II,2² (pettivisayaṁ); Dhs.1035, 1416; Vbh.12, 17, 50, 319; 327; DhA.III,301; PvA.21 (petesu), 33, 144, 155. -- anuppanna not arisen M.II,11; not of good class D.I,97 (see DA.I,267). (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(uppajjati 的【过分】), 已再生，已兴起。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '-uppanna, (uppajjati 的【过分】), 已再生，已兴起；…所生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppatamāna: {'def': '【现分】飞，跳跃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【现分】飞，跳跃。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppatana: {'def': '【中】飞，升起，跳跃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】飞，升起，跳跃。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppatati: {'def': '[ud + patati] to fly or rise up into the air; to spring upwards, jump up; 3^rd sq. pret. udapatta [Sk. *udapaptat] J.III,484 (so read for °patto, & change si to pi); ger. uppatitvā J.III,484; IV,213; PvA.103, 215; and uppacca (q. v.). -- pp. uppatita (q. v.). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + pat + a), 飞，跳起。 uppati, 【过】。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(u出+pat落下+a), 飞，跳起。uppati,【过】。uppata,【过分】飞起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppatha: {'def': '【阳】邪道，迷途。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】邪道，迷途，路边。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. utpatha, ud + patha] a wrong road or course D.I,10 (°gamana, of planets); S.I,38, 43; J.V,453; VI, 235; DhA.III,356 (°cāra). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppatita: {'def': '[pp. of uppatati] jumped up, arisen, come about Sn.1 (= uddhamukhaṁ patitaṁ gataṁ SnA 4), 591; Dh.222 (= uppanna DhA.III,301); Th.1, 371. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(uppatati 的【过分】)。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(uppatati 的【过分】)已飞，已跳起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppatitvā: {'def': '【独】飞了，跳跃了。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【独】飞了，跳跃了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppatti: {'def': '【阴】再生，出现，起源。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】再生，出现，起源。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic utpatti, ud + pad] coming forth, product, genesis, origin, rebirth, occasion A.II,133 (°paṭilābhikāni sanyojanāni); Vbh.137 (°bhava), 411; cp. Compendium, 262 f. (khaṇa); Miln.127 (°divasa); Vism, 571 sq. (°bhava, 9 fold: kāma° etc.); SnA 46, 159, 241, 254, 312, 445; PvA.144, 215. On uppatti deva see deva and upapatti. ‹-› See also aṭṭhuppatti, dānuppatti. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppaḷāseti: {'def': '[ud + pra + las, cp. Sk. samullāsayati in same meaning] to sound out or forth, to make sound Miln.21 (dhamma-saṅkhaṁ). Reading at D.II,337 is upaḷāseti in same meaning. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppaṇḍanā: {'def': '【阴】嘲笑，愚弄。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】嘲笑，愚弄(台语：搧大耳sian3 tua7 hinn7)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ut + paṇd or unknown etym.] ridiculing, mocking Miln.357; Vism.29; PugA 250 (°kathā). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppaṇḍeti: {'def': '[ut + paṇḍ, of uncertain origin] to ridicule, mock, to deride, make fun of Vin.I,216, 272, 293; IV, 278; A.III,91 = Pug.67 (ūhasati ullapati +); J.V,288, 300; DhA.II,29; III,41; PvA.175 (avamaññati +). ‹-› Note. The BSk. utprāsayati at Divy 17 represents the P. uppaṇḍeti & must somehow be a corruption of the latter (vv. ll. at Divy 17 are utprāśayati, utprāṇayati & utprāśrayati). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+paṇḍ+e), 嘲弄，愚弄。uppaṇḍesi,【过】。uppaṇḍita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(u + paṇḍ + e), 嘲弄，愚弄。 ~esi, 【过】。 uppaṇḍita, 【过分】。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppaṇḍukajāta: {'def': '【形】苍白的。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】苍白的。uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāte dhamanisanthatagatte,变成苍白，身体布满了血脉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāta: {'def': '(adj.) [redupl. intens. formation; ud + paṇḍu + ka + jāta; paṇḍu yellowish. The word is evidently a corruption of something else, perhaps upapaṇṇḍuka, upa in meaning of “somewhat like”, cp. upanīla, upanibha etc. and reading at Pv.II,1¹³ upakaṇḍakin. The latter may itself be a corruption, but is expl^d. at PvA.72 by upakaṇḍaka-jāta “shrivelled up all over, nothing but pieces (?)”. The trsl^n. is thus doubtful; the BSk. is the P. form retranslated into utpāṇḍuka Divy 334, 463, and trsl^d. “very pale”] “having become very pale” (?), or “somewhat pale” (?), with dubbaṇṇa in Khp, A 234, and in a stock phrase of three different settings, viz. (1) kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo upp° dhamani-santhata-gatto Vin.I,276; III,19, 110; M.II,121; distorted to BSk. bhīto utp°. kṛśāluko durbalako mlānako at Divy 334. -- (2) kiso upp°. J.VI,71; DhA.IV,66. -- (3) upp° dhamanisanth° J.I,346; II,92; V,95; DhA.I,367. Besides in a doubtful passage at Pv.II,1¹² (upakaṇḍakin, v. l. uppaṇḍ° BB.), expl^d. at PvA.72 “upakaṇḍakajāta”, vv. ll. uppaṇḍaka° and uppaṇḍupaṇḍuka°. (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppaṭipāṭi: {'def': '【阴】次序的短缺，不规则。uppaṭiyā,【副】反次序地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】次序的短缺，不规则。 uppaṭiyā, 【副】反次序地。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppaṭipāṭiyā: {'def': '[Abl. of uppaṭipāṭi, ud + paṭipāṭi] lit. “out of reach”, i. e. in a distance J.I,89; or impossible Vism.96 (ekapañho pi u. āgato nâhosi not one question was impossible to be understood). As tt. g. “with reference to the preceding”, supra Vism.272; SnA 124, 128; DhsA.135 (T. °paṭipāṭika). (Page 151)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upphāleti: {'def': '[Caus. of ud + phal] to cut, rip or split open Vin.I,276 (udara-cchaviṁ upphāletvā; v. l. uppāṭetvā, perhaps preferable). (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upphāsulika: {'def': '(adj.) [ud + phāsulikā for phāsukikā = phāsuka a rib] “with ribs out”, i. e. with ribs showing, emaciated, thin, “skinny” Pv.II,1¹ (= uggata-phāsuka PvA.68); IV,10¹ (MSS. uppā°); ThA.133 (spelt uppā°). (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppilavati: {'def': '(& Uplavati) [Sk. utplavati, ud + plu, cp. utplutya jumping up, rising Sp. Av. Ś I.209] -- 1. to emerge (out of water), to rise, float S.IV,313 (uplava imper.); Miln.80, 379; VvA.47 (uplavitvā, v. l. uppalavitvā); DA.I,256 (v. l. upari lavati). -- 2. to jump up, frisk about, to be elated or buoyant J.II,97 (cp. Morris J P T S. 1887, 139); Miln.370. -- See also upaplavati, uplāpeti & ubbillāvita etc. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upplavana: {'def': 'at DhA.I,309 remains to be explained, T. faulty. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppoṭhana: {'def': '【中】打扫，打。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppoṭheti: {'def': '(u + poṭh + e), 打，拂去灰尘。 ~esi, 【过】。 uppoṭhita, 【过分】。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(u出+poṭh+e), 打，拂去灰尘。uppṭhesi,【过】。uppoṭhita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ud + poṭheti] to beat PvA.4. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppāda: {'def': '【阳】上升，开始存在，成立，出生。 ~ka, 【形】生产的，产生的，生产者。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '3,【阳】出生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(Sk. utpāta, ud + pat), 飞上，跳，突然事件(flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen D.I,9. (v. l. uppāta) = Vism 30 (T. uppāta, v. l. uppāda))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (Sk. utpāda, u(梵ud)出+pad去), 开始存在，出现，出生(coming into existence, appearance, birth)。sahacittuppādā, 与心俱生。satuppādo(sati念+uppādo出生), 出生念。taṇhuppādā,渴爱生起。anuppāda(an不+uppāda出生), 不出生。S.1.11./I,6.：“Na tvaṁ bāle pajānāsi, yathā arahataṁ vaco; Aniccā sabbasaṅkhārā, uppādavayadhammino. Uppajjitvā nirujjhanti, tesaṁ vūpasamo sukho”ti.(汝即是愚者，不知罗汉语--一切行无常，乃是生灭法，生者必有灭，寂静乃为乐。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Sk. utpāda, ud + pad] coming into existence, appearance, birth Vin.I,185; D.I,185; S.III,39 (+ vaya); IV,14; V,30; A.I,152 (+ vaya), 286, 296; II,248 (taṇh°); III,123 (citt° state of consciousness); IV,65 (id.); Dh.182, 194; J.I,59, 107 (sat°); Vbh.303 (citt°), 375 (taṇh°); PvA.10; ThA.282. -- anuppāda either “not coming into existence” D.III,270, M.I,60; A.I,286, 296; II,214, 249: III,84 sq.; Ps.I,59, 66; Dhs.1367; or “not ripe” D.I,12. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. utpāta, ud + pat] flying up, jump; a sudden & unusual event, portent, omen D.I,9 (v. l. uppāta) = Vism.30 (T. uppāta, v. l. uppāda) Sn.360; J.I,374; VI, 475; Miln.178. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppādaka: {'def': 'uppādaka-, (fr. uppāda2),【形】制造，产生，生产者(producing, generating)。dukkhuppādaka,【形】苦产生。uppādakikā,【阴】。jhānuppādaka,【形】禅那产生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. uppāda²] producing, generating PvA.13 (dukkh°). f. °ikā DhA.IV,109 (jhān’). (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppādana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. uppada²] making, generating, causing PvA.71 (anubal° read for anubalappadāna?) 114. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. uppada2),【中】制造，升起，产生(making, generating, causing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】制造，升起，产生。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppādetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. uppādeti] one who produces, causes or brings into existence, creator, producer M.I,79; S.I, 191; III,66; V,351; Miln.217. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppādeti: {'def': '(u出+pad去+e, caus. of uppajjati), 1.生产，制造，引起(to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make)。2.得到(to get, obtain, find)。uppādesi,【过】。uppādita,【过分】。uppādetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of uppajjati, ud + pad] -- 1. to give rise to, to produce, put forth, show, evince, make D.I,135; M. I.162, 185; Pug.25; PvA.4, 16, 19, 59; Sdhp.539. cittaṁ u. to give a (temporary) thought to (with Loc.) J.I,81; Miln.85; DhA.II,89; PvA.3. -- 2. to get, obtain, find J.IV,2; Miln.140; DhA.I,90; PvA.121. -- 3. in lohitaṁ u. to draw (blood) Miln.214. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + pad + e), 生产，制造，引起。 uppādesi, 【过】。 uppādita, 【过分】。 uppādetvā, 【独】。 Uppādetu, 【阳】生产者，生殖者。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppādetu: {'def': '(Uppādetar)(fr. uppādeti),【阳】生产者，生殖者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppādetuŋ: {'def': '【不】要去生产，要去产生。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppādetuṁ: {'def': '【不】要去生产，要去产生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppādin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. uppāda²] having an origin, arising, bound to arise Dhs.1037, 1416; Vbh.17, 50, 74, 92 and passim; DhsA.45. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppāta: {'def': '【阳】飞起，流星，不寻常的事件。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppāṭaka: {'def': '[fr. ud + paṭ in meaning of “biting, stinging”] an insect, vermin S.I,170 (santhāro °ehi sañchanno “a siesta-couch covered by vermin swarm” trsl^d. p. 215 & note). (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppāṭana: {'def': '【中】拉出，扯裂，剥皮，连根拔起。uppāṭanaka,【形】做连根拔起或剥皮的工作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ud + paṭ] pulling out, uprooting, destroying, skinning J.I,454; II,283; VI,238; Miln.166; PvA.46 (kes°); Sdhp.140 (camm°). Cp. sam°. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】拉出，扯裂，剥皮，连根拔起。 ~ka, 【形】做连根拔起或剥皮的工作。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppāṭanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. uppāṭana] pulling up, tearing out, uprooting J.I,303 (°vāta); IV,333 (id.). (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppāṭeti: {'def': '[Sk. utpāṭayati, Caus. uf ud + paṭ to split, cp. also BSk. utpāṭayati nidhānaṇ to dig out a treasure Av. Ś I.294] to split, tear asunder; root out, remove, destroy Vin.II,151 (chaviṁ to skin); M.II,110 (attānaṁ); Th.2, 396 (ger. uppāṭiyā = °pāṭetvā ThA.259); J.I,281 (bījāni); IV,162, 382; VI,109 (= luñcati); Miln.86; DhA.III,206. ‹-› Caus. uppāṭāpeti in pp. uppāṭāpita caused to be torn off DhA.III,208. See also upphāleti. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+paṭ分离+e), 撕成碎片，根除，剥皮。uppāṭetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(u + paṭ + e), 撕成碎片，根除，剥皮。 uppāṭetvā, 【独】。 Uppāta, 【阳】飞起，流星，不寻常的事件。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppāṭita: {'def': '(Uppāṭeti的【过分】) 撕成碎片，根除，剥皮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppīḷa: {'def': '(adj.) [ud + pīḍ] oppressing or oppressed: an° free from oppression, not hurt or destroyed D.I,135 (opp. sa-uppīḷa; T. upapīḷa but v. l. upp°); J.III,443; V,378; PvA.161. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uppīḷana: {'def': '【中】压迫，压抑。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】压迫，压抑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uppīḷeti: {'def': '[ud + pīḍ for ava + pīḍ, cp. uplāpeti = opilāpeti, & opīḷeti] -- 1. to press (down) on to, to hold (tight) to (with Acc.), to cover up or close M.I,539 (piṭṭhi-pāṇiṁ hanukena); J I 483 (hatthena akkhīni); II,245 (hatthikumbhe mukhaṁ); V,293 (aggalaṁ); ThA.188. -- 2. to stampede VvA.83 (paṭhaviṁ). (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+pīḷ虐待+e), 压下，压破，压迫。uppīḷesi,【过】。uppīḷetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(u + pil + e), 压下，压破，压迫。 ~esi, 【过】。 uppīḷetvā, 【独】。 Uppoṭhana, 【中】打扫，打。(p78)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uppīḷita: {'def': '[pp. of uppīḷeti] pressed J.VI,3. (Page 152)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Uppīḷeti的【过分】) 压下，压破，压迫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upādhi: {'def': '【阳】名称。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa+ā+dhā),【阳】1.名称(cushion)。2.补充(supplement)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. upa + ā + dhā] 1. cushion J.VI,253. -- 2. supplement, ornament (?), in °ratha “the chariot with the outfit”, expl^d. by C. as the royal chariot with the golden slipper J.VI,22. (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upādhiya: {'def': '[fr. upāhi] being furnished with a cushion J.VI,252 (adj.). (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upādi: {'def': 'Upādi-(=upādāna),【阳】生命的燃料(“stuff of life”, substratum of being, khandha)。upādisesa,【形】【阳】有剩余一些生命的燃料，仍然倚赖著存命(having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i. e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined)。【反】anupādisesa(an-upādi-sesa), 无剩余(nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna(cp. similarly BSk. anupādi-vimukti M Vastu I.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material) substratum)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】生命的燃料。 ~sesa, 【形】有剩余一些生命的燃料，仍然倚赖着存命。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upādinna: {'def': '(Upādiyati的【过分】)已抓住，已执取(者)( grasped at, laid hold of; or “the issue of grasping”)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upādiyati: {'def': '(upa+ā+dā+i+ya；Sk. upādatti, BHS upādiyati), 执取(to take hold of)，抓住(to grasp)，攀缘(cling to)。upādiyi,【过】。na kiñci loke upādiyati於世间无任何执取 = parinibbāyati入灭)。upādiyaṁ , 【现分】。ppr.med.upādiyamāna & upādiyāna。ger. upādāya (taking up)。pp. upādiṇṇa。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[upa + ā + dā, see ādiyati¹] to take hold of, to grasp, cling to, show attachment (to the world), cp. upādāna D.II,292; M.I,56, 67; S.II,14; III,73, 94, 135; IV, 168 (na kiñci loke u. = parinibbāyati); Sn.752, 1103, 1104; Nd¹ 444 (= ādeti); Nd² 164. ppr. upādiyaṁ S.IV,24 = 65 (an°); -- ppr. med. upādiyamāna S.III,73; SnA 409, & upādiyāna (°ādiyāno) Sn.470; Dh.20. ‹-› ger. upādāya in lit. meaning “taking up” J.I,30; Miln.184, 338, 341; for specialised meaning & use as prep. see separately as also upādā and upādiyitvā VvA.209; DA.I,109 (an°); DhA.IV,194 (an°). -- pp. upādiṇṇa (q. v.). (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa + ā + dā + i + ya), 抓住。 upādiyi, 【过】。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upādi°: {'def': '[the comp^n.-from of upādāna, derived fr. upādā in analogy to nouns in °a & °ā which change their a to i in comp^n. with kṛ & bhū; otherwise a n. formation fr. dā analogous to °dhi fr. dhā in upadhi] = upādāna, but in more concrete meaning of “stuff of life”, substratum of being, khandha; only in comb^n. with °sesa (adj.) having some fuel of life (= khandhas or substratum) left, i. e. still dependent (on existence), not free, materially determined S.V,129, 181; A.III,143; It.40; Vism.509. More frequently neg. an-upādi-sesa (nibbāna, nibbānadhātu or parinibbāna, cp. similarly BSk. anupādi-vimukti M Vastu I.69) completely emancipated, free, without any (material) substratum Vin.II,239 (nibbāna-dhātu); D.III,135; M.I,148 (parinibbāna); A.II,120; IV,75 sq., 202, 313; J.I,28, 55; Sn.876; It.39, 121 (nibbāna-dhātu); Ps. I.101; Vism.509; DhA.IV,108 (nibbāna); VvA.164, 165. Opp. saupādisesa A.IV,75 sq., 378 sq.; Sn.354 (opp. nibbāyi); Vism.509; Nett 92. See further ref. under nibbāna & parinibbāna. (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upādiṇṇa: {'def': '[for °ādinna with substitution of ṇṇ for nn owing to wrong derivation as pp. from ādiyati² instead of ādiyati¹] grasped at, laid hold of; or “the issue of grasping”, i. e. material, derived, secondary (cp. upādā), see def. at Dhs.trsl^n. 201, 324. -- Dhs.585, 877, 1211, 1534; Vbh.2 sq., 326, 433; Vism.349, 451; an° Vin.III,113; Dhs.585, 991, 1212, 1535. (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upādiṇṇaka: {'def': '(adj,) = upādiṇṇa DhsA.311, 315, 378; Vism.398. (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upādā: {'def': '(adv.) [shortened ger. of upādiyati for the usual upādāya in specialised meaning] lit. “taking up”, i. e. subsisting on something else, not original, secondary, derived (of rūpa form) Dhs.877, 960, 1210; Vism.275, 444 (24 fold); DhsA.215, 299, 333, cp. Dhs.trsl^n. 127, 197. -- Usually (and this is the earlier use of upādā) as neg. anupādā (for anupādāya) in meaning “not taking up any more (fuel, so as to keep the fire of rebirth alive)”, not clinging to love of the world, or the kilesas q. v., having no more tendency to becoming; in phrases a. parinibbānaṁ “unsupported emancipation” M.I,148; S.IV,48; V,29; DhA.I,286 etc.; a. vimokkho mental release A.V,64 (A A: catuhi upādānehi agahetvā cittassa vimokkho; arahattass’etaṁ nāmaṁ); Vin.V,164; Ps.II,45 sq.; a. vimutto D.I,17 (= kinci dhammaṁ anupādiyitvā vimutto DA.I,109); cp. M.III,227 (paritassanā). (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upādāna: {'def': '【中】取，抓的，执着，燃料。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】取蕴。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】执着的消失。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. upa + ā + dā] -- (lit. that (material) substratum by means of which an active process is kept alive or going), fuel, supply, provision; adj. (-°) supported by, drawing one’s existence from S.I,69; II 85 (aggikkhandho °assa pariyādānā by means of taking up fuel); V,284 (vāt°); J.III,342 sa-upādāna (adj.) provided with fuel S.IV,399; anupādāna without fuel DhA.II,163. ‹-› 2. (appl^d.) “drawing upon”, grasping, holding on, grip, attachment; adj. (-°) finding one’s support by or in, clinging to, taking up, nourished by. See on term Dhs.trsl^n. 323 & Cpd. 171. They are classified as 4 upādānāni or four Graspings viz. kām°, diṭṭh°, sīlabbat°, attavād° or the graspings arising from sense-desires, speculation, belief in rites, belief in the soul-theory D.II,58; III,230; M.I,51, 66; S.II,3; V 59; Dhs.1213; Ps.I,129; II,46, 47; Vbh.375; Nett 48; Vism.569. -- For upādāna in var. connections see the foll. passages: D.I,25; II,31, 33, 56; III,278; M.I,66, 136 (attavād°) 266; S.II,14, 17, 30, 85; III,10, 13 sq., 101, 135, 167, 191; IV,32, 87 sq., 102 (tannissitaṁ viññāṇaṁ tadupādānaṁ), 390, 400 (= taṇhā); A.IV,69; V,111 (upāy°); Sn.170, 358, 546; Ps.I,51 sq., 193; II,45 sq, 113; Vbh.18, 30, 67, 79, 119, 132; Dhs.1059, 1136, 1213, 1536 sq.; Nett 28 sq., 41 sq., 114 sq.; DhA.IV,194. -- sa° full of attachment (to life) M.I,65; Vin.III,111; S.IV,102; an° unattached, not showing attachment to existence S.IV,399; Vin.III,111; Th.1, 840; Miln.32; DA.I,98.

--kkhandha, usually as pañc’upādāna-kkhandhā the factors of the “fivefold clinging to existence” [cp. BSk. pañc’u°-skandhāḥ Av. Ś II.168¹ & note] D.II,35, 301 sq.; III,223, 286; M.I,61, 144, 185; III,15, 30, 114, 295; Ps.II,109 sq.; Vbh.101; Vism.505 (khandha-pañcaka). See for detail khandha II.B 2. --kkhaya extinction or disappearance of attachment S.II,54; A.III,376 sq.; Sn.475, 743; It.75. --nidāna the ground of upādāna; adj. founded on or caused by attachment Ps.II,111; Vbh.135 sq. --nirodha destruction of “grasping” Vin.I,1 (in formula of paṭicca-samuppāda); S.II,7; III,14; A.I,177. --paccaya = °nidāna S.II,5; III 94; Sn.507, 742. (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. upa + ā + dā),【中】取，抓的，执著，燃料(fuel, supply, provision; adj. (-°) supported by, drawing one’s existence from)。upādānakkhandha,【阳】取蕴。upādānakkhaya,【阳】执著的消失。【反】anupādāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '取;执著;燃料', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Upādānakkhandha: {'def': '五取蕴，成为执著对象的五种(名色)法。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Upādāniya: {'def': '【形】与执着关联的。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. upādāna, for *upādānika › upādānaka),【形】与执著关联的(belonging to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derived)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. upādāna, for *upādānika › °aka] belonging to or connected with upādāna, sensual, (inclined to) grasping; material (of rūpa), derived. See on term Dhs.trsl^n. 203, 322. -- S.II,84; III,47; IV,89, 108; Dhs.584, 1219, 1538; Vbh.12 sq., 30, 56, 119, 125, 319, 326. (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upādāya: {'def': '(adv.) [ger. of upādiyati] -- 1. (as prep. with Acc.) lit. “taking it up” (as such & such), i. e. (a) out of, as, for; in phrase anukampaṁ upādāya out of pity or mercy D.I,204; PvA.61, 141, 164. -- (b) compared with, alongside of, with reference to, according to D.I,205 (kālañ ca samayañ ca Acc. to time & convenience); DhA.I,391; VvA.65 (paṁsucuṇṇaṁ); PvA.268 (manussalokaṁ). The same use of upādāya is found in BSk., e. g. at Divy 25, 359, 413; Av. Ś I.255. -- 2. (ic same meaning & application as upādā, i. e. in neg. form first & then in positivé abstraction from the latter) as philosophical term “hanging on to”, i. e. derived, secondary (with rūpa) Vbh.12, 67 etc.; Nd¹ 266. Usually as anupādāya “not clinging to”, without any (further) clinging (to rebirth), emancipated, unconditioned, free [cp. BSk. paritt-anupādāya free from the world Divy 655], freq. in phrase a. nibbuta completely emancipated S.II,279; A.I,162; IV, 290; besides in foll. pass.: Vin.I,14 (a. cittaṁ vimuccati) 182 (id.); S.II,187 sq.; IV,20, 107; V,317; Dh.89 = S.V,24 (ādānapaṭi-nisagge a. ye ratā); Dh.414; Sn.363; It.94 (+ aparitassato). (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upādāti 的【独】), 1.抓住(“taking it up”)。2.比较，关於(compared with, alongside of, with reference to, according to)。upādāyarūpa﹐所造色，是源自或依靠四大元素产生的色法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upādāti 的【独】), 抓住，比较，关于。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upāgacchati: {'def': '[upa + ā + gam] to come to, arrive at, reach, obtain, usually aor. upāgañchi Cp I 10¹⁰, pl. upāgañchuṁ Sn.1126; or upāgami Sn.426, 685, pl. upāgamuṁ Sn.302, 1126. Besides in pres. imper. upāgaccha PvA.64 (so read for upagaccha). -- pp. upāgata. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāgata: {'def': '[pp. of upāgacchati] come to, having reached or attained Sn.1016; PvA.117 (yakkhattaṁ); Sdhp.280. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upāgacchati 的【过分】), 已到达，已达到。(p76)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upāgacchati 的【过分】), 已到达，已达到。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upāhana: {'def': '【中】凉鞋，草鞋(a shoe, sandal)。upāhanā ārohitvā(穿草鞋)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】凉鞋，鞋。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upāhanā: {'def': '(f.) [with metathesis for upānahā = Sk. upānah f. or upānaha m.; but cp. BSk. upānaha nt. Divy 6] a shoe, sandal Vin.I,185; II,118, 207 (adj. sa-upāhana), 208; S.I,226; J.IV,173, 223; Pv.II,4⁹; Nd² 226; KhA 45; DhA.I,381 (chatt °ṁ as nt? v. l. °nā); PvA.127, 186. ‹-› upāhanaṁ (or upāhanā) ārohati to put on sandals J.IV, 16; VI, 524; opp. omuñcati take off Vin.II,207, 208; J.III,415; IV,16. -- Note. An older form upānad° (for upānadh = Sk. upānah) is seen by Kern in pānadûpama J.II,223, which is read by him as upānadûpama (v. l. upāhan-upama). See Toev. s. v. upānad. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāhata: {'def': '[upa + āhata] struck, afflicted, hurt J.I,414. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāli: {'def': 'm. 優波離 [佛弟子, 持律第一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. 優波離 [佛弟子, 持律第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（比库名）伍巴离，（古音译：）优波离，优婆离', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Upālāpeti: {'def': 'at PvA.276 read upalāpeti (q. v.). (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāraddha: {'def': '[pp. of upārambhati] blamed, reprimanded, reproved A V 230. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāramati: {'def': '[upa + ā + ram] to cease, to desist J.V,391, 498. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upārambha: {'def': '【阳】谴责，指责。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】谴责，指责，存心。upārambhapariyesanā﹐【阴】找碴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. upārambha, upa + ālambhatc] -- 1. reproof, reproach, censure M.I,134, 432; S.III,73; V,73; A.I,199; II,181; III,175; IV,25; Vbh.372. -- 2. (adj.) indisposed, hostile Th.1, 360 sq.; DA.I,21, 263. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upārambhati: {'def': '[Sk. upālambhate, upa + ā + labh] to blame, reprimand, reproach M.I,432, 433. -- pp. upāraddha (q. v.). (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāsaka: {'def': '优婆萨;信士;信男', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【阳】优婆塞，在家信徒，来接近的人。 ~tta, 【中】信徒的状态。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹upa近 + ās坐, cp. upāsati),【阳】优婆塞(音译)，伊蒲塞(古音译)，在家信徒(a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee)，来接近的人。upāsakatta,【中】信徒的本色。《舍利弗阿毘昙论》：「法轮既转，便有圣众，即说三语，口受三教：归依佛，归依法，归依僧。受此三语已，即名优婆塞。」(卷第六，T28.573.3) Esā…tulā etam pamāṇaṁ mama sāvakānaṁ upāsakānaṁ(此是我诸声闻优婆塞之量秤、尺度。)A.5.177.：Ko ājīvoti pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanaṁ. Vuttañhetaṁ-- “pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca? Satthavaṇijjā, sattavaṇijjā, maṁsavaṇijjā, majjavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā”ti.(什么是他的活命︰舍断五种邪贸易，以法公正地维持生命。曾这么说：『诸比丘！在家信徒不可从事这五种买卖。是哪五种？买卖武器、买卖有情、买卖肉、买卖酒类、买卖毒品。诸比丘！在家信徒不可从事这五种买卖。』) AA.2.2./II,114.：Kā vipattīti yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti, ayamassa vipatti. Api ca yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti, malañca patikuṭṭho ca, sāpissa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha-- “pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti, upāsakamalañca, upāsakapatikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṁ pacceti, no kammaṁ, ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṁ pariyesati, tattha ca pubbakāraṁ karotī”ti (A.5.175./III,206.).(什么是他(优婆塞)的失坏？他的戒和活命失坏是他的失坏。再者，当知使他成为贱民〈旃陀罗Candala〉、垢秽及卑劣的也是他的失坏。从义上，即他们没有信等五法。如说：『诸比丘！具足五法的在家信徒成为贱民的在家信徒、垢秽的在家信徒和卑劣的在家信徒。是哪五种？没有信；恶戒；迷信徴兆；相信祥瑞，而不是业；以及从此(佛教)之外寻求应施者，并先为该处服务。』', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. upa + ās, cp. upāsati] a devout or faithful layman, a lay devotee Vin.I,4, 16 (tevāciko u.), 37, 139, 195 sq.; II,125; III,6, 92; IV,14, 109; D.I,85; II,105, 113; III,134, 148, 153, 168, 172 sq., 264; M.I,29, 467, 490; S.V,395, 410; A.I,56 sq.; II,132 (°parisā); III 206 (°caṇḍāla, °ratana); IV,220 sq. (kittāvatā hoti); Sn.376, 384; J.I,83; Pv I 10⁴; Vbh.248 (°sikkhā); DA.I,234; PvA.36, 38, 54, 61, 207. -- f. upāsikā Vin.I,18, 141, 216; III,39; IV,21, 79; D.III,124, 148, 172, 264; M.I,29, 467, 491; S.II,235 sq.; A.I,88; II,132; V,287 sq.; Miln.383; PvA.151, 160. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāsakatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. upāsaka] state of being a believing layman or a lay follower of the Buddha Vin.I,37; S.IV,301; Vv 84²¹. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāsana: {'def': '【中】服务，伺候，箭术，（技术的）训练。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. upāsati] attendance, service, honour S.I,46 (samaṇ°); Th.1, 239; Miln.115. Cp. payir°. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】服务，伺候，箭术，(技术的)训练。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. upāsati] -- 1. archery J.VI,448; usually in phrase katûpāsana skilled in archery M.I,82; S.II, 266; A.II,48; J.IV,211; Mhvs 24, 1. -- Miln.232 (°ṁ sikkhitvā). -- 2. practice Miln.419. -- 3. in °sālā gymnasium, training ground Miln.352. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāsati: {'def': '(upa + ās + a), 照顾，服侍。 Upāsita, 【过分】。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[upa + ās] lit. “to sit close by”, to go after, attend, follow, serve, honour, worship D.II,287; A.I,162; J.V, 339, 371 (= upagacchati C.); Miln.418 (lakkhe upāseti fix his attention on the target). -- 3^rd pl. pres. med. upāsare A.I,162; J.IV,417 (= upāyanti C.). Cp. payirupāsati. -- pp. upāsita & upāsīna (q. v.). See also upāsaka, upāsana¹. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa近+ās +a), 照顾，服侍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upāsikā: {'def': '【阴】优婆夷，女在家信徒。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】优婆夷，女在家信徒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see upāsaka; cp. payir°. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '优婆夷;信女', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Upāsita: {'def': '【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of upāsati] honoured, served, attended S 1133, cp. Nd² 165; Th.1, 179. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāsīna: {'def': '[pp. of upāsati] sitting near or close to J.V,336. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāta: {'def': '[according to Kern, Toev. s. v. = Sk. upātta, pp of upa + ā + dā “taken up”; after Morris J.P. T. S. 1884, 75 = uppāta “flying up”] thrown up, cast up, raised (of dust) Th.1, 675. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upātidhāvati: {'def': '[upa + ā + dhāvati] to run on or in to Ud.72. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upa + ā + dhāvati), 闯入(to run on or in to Ud.72.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upātigacchati: {'def': '[upa + ati + gacchati] to “go out over”, to surpass, overcome, only in 3^rd sg. pret. upaccagā Sn.333, 636, 641, 827; Th.1, 181; 2, 4; J.I,258; VI,182; & 3^rd pl. upaccaguṁ S.I,35; A.III,311; J.III,201. (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upātipanna: {'def': '[pp. of upâtipajjati, upa + ā + pad] fallen into, a prey to (with Loc.) Sn.495 (= nipanna with gloss adhimutta SnA 415). (Page 148)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāvisi: {'def': '3^rd sg. aor. of upavisati (q. v.). (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(upavisati 的【过】), (他)坐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(upavisati 的【过】), （他）坐。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upāya: {'def': '[fr. upa + i, cp. upaya] approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem S.III,53 sq., 58; D.III,220 (°kosalla); Sn.321 (°ññū); J.I,256; Nd² 570 (for upaya); PvA.20, 31, 39, 45, 104, 161; Sdhp.10, 12. 350, 385. -- Cases adverbially; Instr. upāyena by artifice or means of a trick PvA.93; yena kenaci u. PvA.113. -- Abl. upāyaso by some means, somehow J.III,443; V,401 (= upāyena C.). ‹-› anupāya wrong means J.I,256; Sdhp.405; without going near, without having a propensity for S.I,181; M.III,25.

--kusala clever in resource J.I,98; Nett 20; SnA 274. (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. upa + i),【阳】方法(台语︰步数)，方便，资源(approach; fig. way, means, expedient, stratagem)。upāyakusala,【形】对方法的善巧(clever in resource)。upāyakosalla,【中】善巧於手段。Instr. upāyena。Abl. upāyaso,由方法(by some means, somehow)。anupāya, 方法错误(wrong means J.I.256; Sdhp 405; without going near, without having a propensity for S.I,181; M.III,25.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】方法，资源。 ~kusala, 【形】对资源的聪明。 ~kosalla, 【中】聪明于手段。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Upāyana: {'def': '【中】贡物，礼物。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. upa + i, cp. upāya] going to (in special sense), enterprise, offering, tribute, present J v.347; VI, 327; Miln.155, 171, 241; Sdhp.616, 619. (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. upa + i, cp),【中】贡品(tribute)，礼物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Upāyatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. upāya] a means of (-°) VvA.84 (paṭipajjan°). (Page 149)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Upāyāsa: {'def': '[upa + āyāsa, cp. BSk. upāyāsa Divy 210, 314.] (a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance, unsettled condition M.I,8, 144, 363; III,237; A.I,144, 177, 203 (sa°); II,123, 203; III,3, 97, 429; Sn.542; It.89 = A.I,147 = M.I,460; J.II,277 (°bahula); IV 22 (id.); Pug.30, 36; Vbh.247; Nett 29; Miln.69; Vism.504 (def.); DA.I,121. -- anupāyāsa peacefulness, composure, serenity, sincerity D.III,159; A.III,429; Ps.I 11 sq. (Page 150)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】苦难，伤心事。(p77)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(upa + āyāsa, cp. BSk. upāyāsa),【阳】恼，闷，伤心事((a kind of) trouble, turbulence, tribulation, unrest, disturbance, unsettled condition)。D.22./II,306.︰“Katamo ca, bhikkhave, upāyāso? Yo kho, bhikkhave, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa āyāso upāyāso āyāsitattaṁ upāyāsitattaṁ, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, upāyāso.(复次，诸比丘！什么是‘恼’呢？诸比丘！凡是有俱若干不幸，被苦法所恼，愁、闷、气馁、沮丧，诸比丘！这称为‘恼’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ura: {'def': '(m. nt.) & Uro (nt.) [Sk. uras] -- 1. the breast, chest. -- Cases after the nt. s.-declension are Instr. urasā Th.1, 27; Sn.609; & Loc. urasi Sn.255; J.III,148; IV, 118, also urasiṁ J.III,386 (= urasmiṁ C.). Other cases of nt. a-stem, e. g. Instr. urena J.III,90; PvA.75; Loc. ure D.I,135; J.I,156, 433, 447; PvA.62 (ure jāta; cp. orasa). -- Vin.II,105 (contrasted with piṭṭhi back); IV,129; J.IV,3; V,159, 202; Nd² 659; Pv IV.10⁸; DhA.III,175; DA.I,254; DhsA.321; PvA.62, 66. -- uraṁ deti (with Loc.) to put oneself on to something with one’s chest, fig. to apply oneself to J.I,367, 401, 408; III,139, 455; IV,219; V,118, 278. -- 2. (appl^d.) the base of a carriage pole Vv 63²⁸ (= īsāmūla VvA.269).

--ga going on the chest, creeping, i. e. a snake S.I,69; Sn.1, 604; J.I,7; IV,330; VI,208; Vv 80⁸; Pv.I,12¹ (= urena gacchati ti urago sappass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ PvA.63); PvA.61, 67. --cakka an iron wheel (put on the chest), as an instrument of torture in Niraya J.I,363, 414. --cchada “breast cover”, breast plate (for ornament) Vin.II,10; J.IV,3; V,215, 409; VI,480; ThA.253. --ttāḷi beating one’s breast (as a sign of mourning & sorrow) M.I,86, 136; A.II,188; III,54, 416; IV,293; PvA.39. --tthala the breast A.II,174. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳，中】乳房，胸。 ~cakka, 【中】折磨人的铁轮（置于胸部的工具）。~cchada, 【阳】胸甲。 ~ttāḷiŋ, 【副】捶打自己的胸部。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】乳房，胸。uracakka,【中】折磨人的铁轮(置於胸部的刑具)。uracchada,【阳】胸甲。urattāḷiṁ,【副】捶打自己的胸部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Urabbha: {'def': '[Sk. urabhra, with ulā & uraṇa to be compared with Gr. a]rήn wether, cp. Hom. εί ros wool; Lat. vervex; Ags. waru = E. ware (orig. sheepskins) = Ger. ware. Here also belongs P. urāṇī] a ram D.I,127; A.I,251 sq.; II,207; IV,41 sq.; J.V,241; Pug.56; DA.I,294; DhA.II,6. See also orabbhika. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】公羊。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】公羊，古译：羖羊。cf. aja﹐雄山羊，古译：羯羊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uraga: {'def': '【阳】蛇(胸行者)，爬行的动物。uragasāracandamaya, 牛头栴檀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蛇，爬行的动物。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uru: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Av. ravah space; Gr. eu)rus wide; Lat. rūs free or wide space, field; Idg. *ru, *uer wide, to which also Goth. rūms space = Ags. rūm, E. room, Ger. raum] wide, large; excellent, eminent J.V,89; Miln.354; Sdhp.345, 592. -- pl. urū sands, soil J.V,303. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】大的，宽的，显赫的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】大的，宽的，显赫的。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Urundā: {'def': '(f.) [ura + undā?] freedom of the chest, free breathing, relief D.II,269 (v. l. uruddhā perhaps preferable, for ura + uddharana lifting or raising the chest). (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uruvela: {'def': '（城市名）伍卢韦喇，（古音译：）优楼频螺，乌卢频螺', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Uruvela-kassapa: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Uruvilvā-kāśyapa] 優樓頻螺迦葉 [三迦葉兄弟の長兄].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Uruvilvā-kāśyapa] 優樓頻螺迦葉 [三迦葉兄弟的長兄].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Urāṇī: {'def': '(f.) [or uraṇī?, f. of uraṇa, see urabbha] an ewe J.V,241 (= urāṇikā C.); v. l. uraṇī & uraṇikā. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Urūḷhava: {'def': '(adj.) [doubtful, prob. for urūḷhavant, with affix vant to a pp. formed with ud°. The word is taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as ud-ūḷha of vah (with d for r). The well accredited (and older) variant ubbuḷhavā is expl^d. (see Kern, s. v.) as pp. of ud + bṛh², cp. upabrūhana. Perhaps we have to consider this as the legitimate form urūḷhava as its corruption. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 141 takes urūḷhavā as ud + rūḷha, pp. of ruh (with r. for rr = dr), thus “overgrown”] large, bulky, immense; great, big, strong. Only in one stock phrase “nāgo isādanto urūḷhavo” Vv 20⁹, 43⁹; J.VI,488; of which variant n. ī. ubbuḷhavā M.I,414 = 450. The word is expl^d. at J.VI,488 by “ubbāhana-samattha”; at VvA.104 (pl. urṳḷhavā) by “thāmajava-parakkamehi byūhanto (v. l. brahmanto) mahantaṁ yuddha-kiccaṁ vahituṁ samatthā ti attho”. The BSk. udviddha (Divy 7) may possibly be a corruption of ubbūḷha. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usabha: {'def': '【阳】公牛王，高贵的人，勒沙婆，140个腕尺 (hattha, 肘) 的长度。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic ṛṣabha; Av. aršan male, Gr. a)ρshn, a)ρrhn masculine, to Idg. *eres & *rēs to wet, sprinkle (with semen), as also in Sk. rasa juice, rasā wet, liquid, Lat. rōs dew. A parallel root *ueres in Sk. varṣa rain, Gr. e)ρsh dew; Sk. vṛṣan & vṛṣabha bull] a bull; often fig. as symbol of manliness and strength (cp. nisabha) D.I,6 (°yuddha bull-fight), 9 (°lakkhaṇa signs on a b.), 127; Vin.III,39 (puris° “bull of a man”, a very strong man); A.I,188; II,207; IV,41 sq., 376; V,347, 350; Sn.26 sq., 416, 646, 684; Dh.422; J.I,28 (V.203; °kkhandha broadshouldered), 336; V,99 (bharatûsabha); VI,136; Pug.56; Vism.153 (°camma, in simile); DhA.I,396; SnA 226, 333; KhA 144; PvA.163; VvA.85. -- The comp^n. forms of usabha are āsabha, isabha (in nisabha) & esabha (q. v.). The relations between usabha, vasabha & nisabha are discussed at SnA 40. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】公牛王，古译：特牛；高贵的人，勒沙婆(140个腕尺 (hattha, 肘) 的长度)。chinnavisāṇa-usabha﹐截角牛(截去头角之牛)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [= usabha¹, in special application (?)] a certain measure of length, consisting of 20 yaṭṭhis (see yaṭṭhi) or 140 cubits J.I,64 (eight), 70 (id.); II,91; IV,17 (one), 142 (eight); DhA.I,108 (°mattaṁ). (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usmā: {'def': '【阳】热(heat)。usmākata it appears as usmīusmā.\xa0usmāgata heated, belonging to heat ; as tt. one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic (= samaṇateja C.; cp. BSk. usṇagata & usmagata)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】热。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [see usumā] heat D.II,335, 338; M.I,295; S.II, III,143; IV,215, 294; V,212; Dhs.964; DA.I,310. -- In comb^n. with °kata it appears as usmī°, e. g. at M I 132, 258.

--gata heated, belonging to heat Dhs.964; as tt. one who mortifies or chastises himself, an ascetic J.V,209 (= samaṇateja C.; cp. BSk. uṣṇagata & uṣmagata Divy 166, 240, 271. 469, & see Kern’s mistakes at Toev. s. v.). (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussa: {'def': '(adj.) [der. fr. ud = *ud-s(y)a, in analogy to oma fr. ava; but taken by Kern, Toev. s. v. as an abbreviated ussada] superior, higher (opp. oma inferior) A.III,359; Sn.860 (= Nd¹ 251 with spelling ossa), 954. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussada: {'def': 'ussanna, 【形】丰富的，过度的，充满的。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna]: this word is beset with difficulties, the phrase satt-ussada is applied in all kinds of meanings, evidently the result of an original application & meaning having become obliterated. satt° is taken as *sapta (seven) as well as *sattva (being), ussada as prominence, protuberance, fulness, arrogance. The meanings may be tabulated as follows: (1) prominence (cp. Sk. utsedha), used in characterisation of the Nirayas, as “projecting, prominent hells”, ussadanirayā (but see also below 4) J.I,174; IV,3, 422 (pallaṅkaṁ, v. l. caturassạṁ, with four corners); V,266. -- adj. prominent ThA.13 (tej-ussadehi ariyamaggadhammehi, or as below 4?). -- 2. protuberance, bump, swelling J.IV,188; also in phrase sattussada having 7 protuberances, a qualification of the Mahāpurisa D.III,151 (viz. on both hands, feet, shoulders, and on his back). -- 3. rubbing in, anointing, ointment; adj. anointed with (-°), in candan° J.III,139; IV,60; Th.1, 267; Vv 53⁷; DhA.I,28; VvA.237. -- 4. a crowd adj. full of (-°) in phrase sattussada crowded with (human beings) D.I,87 (cp. DA.I,245: aneka-satta-samākiṇṇa; but in same sense BSk. sapt-otsada Divy 620, 621); Pv IV.1⁸ (of Niraya = full of beings, expl^d. by sattehi ussanna uparûpari nicita PvA.221. -- 5. qualification, characteristic, mark, attribute, in catussada “having the four qualifications (of a good village)” J.IV,309 (viz. plenty of people, corn, wood and water C.). The phrase is evidently shaped after D.I,87 (under 4). As “preponderant quality, characteristic” we find ussada used at Vism.103 (cf. Asl. 267) in comb^ns. lobh°, dos°, moh°, alobh° etc. (quoted from the “Ussadakittana”), and similarly at VvA.19 in Dhammapāla’s definition of manussa (lobh’ādīhi alobh’ādīhi sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā), viz. sattā manussa-jātikā tesu lobh’‹-› ādayo alobh’ādayo ca ussadā. -- 6. (metaph.) self-elevation, arrogance, conceit, haughtiness Vin.I,3; Sn.515, 624 (an° = taṇhā-ussada-abhāvena SnA 467), 783 (expl^d. by Nd¹ 72 under formula sattussada; i. e. showing 7 bad qualities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha etc.), 855. -- See also ussādana, ussādeti etc. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(most likely to ud + syad; see ussanna),【形】丰富的，过度的，充满的(prominence(cp. Sk. utsedha), protuberance, fulness, arrogance)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussadaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ussada 4] over-full, overflowing A.III,231, 234 (°jāta, of a kettle, with vv. ll. ussuraka° & ussuka°). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】满溢(over-full, overflowing (ussadakajāta, of a kettle, with vv. ll. ussuraka- & ussuka-))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussahana: {'def': '【中】努力，尽力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】努力，尽力。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ussahati: {'def': '(u(d)+sah胜过+a), 试，努力，竭力。ussahi,【过】。ussahe, opt.3sg.,能够(做某事)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(u + sah + a), 试，努力，竭力。 ussahi, 【过】。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ud + sah, cp. BSk. utsaha Jtm 215; utsahetavya Divy 494; utsahana Divy 490; ucchahate for utsahate Av. Ś II.21] to be able, to be fit for, to dare, venture Vin.I,47, 83; II,208; III,17; D.I,135; S.IV,308, 310; Miln.242; VvA.100. -- Caus. ussāheti (see pp. ussāhita). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussajjati: {'def': '[ud + sṛj, cp. BSk. protsṛjati Divy 587] to dismiss, set free, take off, hurl A.IV,191. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussakkati: {'def': '² [by-form of ussukkati] to endeavour Vism.437; VvA.95 (Caus. II. ussakkāpesi), 214. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (ud + sakkati, see sakkati) to creep out or up to, to rise. ussakkitvā﹐【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [ud + sakkati, see sakkati] to creep out or up to, to rise A.III,241 sq; Miln.260. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussanna: {'def': '(pp. of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna),【形】1.满溢(overflowing)。2.滋润(anointed)。3.广布(spread out, wide)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of ud + syad, cp. abhisanna] -- 1. overflowing, heaped up, crowded; extensive, abundant, preponderant, excessive, full of (°-) Vin.I,285 (cīvaraṁ u. overstocked; II,270 (āmisaṁ too abundant); III,286; Th.2, 444 (= upacita ThA.271); J.I,48, 145 °kusalamūla); DhA.I,26 (id.); (lobho etc.) Asl. 267; Miln.223 (id.); J.I,336 (kāla, fulfilled); III,418; IV,140; Pv III,5¹ (°puñña, cp. PvA.197); PvA.71 (°pabhā thick glow). Cp. accussanna. -- 2. anointed VvA.237. -- 3. spread out, wide DhA.II,67 (mahāpaṭhavī u.), 72 (id.). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussannatā: {'def': '(abstr. fr. ussanna),【阴】丰富，充满(ccumulation, fulness, plenty)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】丰富，充满。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. ussanna] accumulation, fulness, plenty Kvu 467 (where Kvu trsl^n. p. 275 gives ussadattā); VvA.18, 19. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussarati: {'def': '[ud + sarati of sṛ] to run out, run away J.I,434 (imper. ussaratha); V,437. -- pp. ussaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. ussāreti (q. v.). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussava: {'def': '【阳】款宴，节日的，典礼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】款宴，节日的，典礼。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. utsava] feast, making merry, holiday Vin.III,249; J.I,475; II,13, 248; VvA.7, 109 (°divasa). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussaya: {'def': 'in Ussayavādikā, 诉讼(Vin.IV,224 is a variant of usuyya° “using envious language, quarrelsome”. -- Another ussaya [fr. ud + wri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & ussāpeti] meaning “accumulation” is found in cpd. samussaya only.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'in °vādika Vin.IV,224 is a variant of usuyya° “using envious language, quarrelsome”. -- Another ussaya [fr. ud + śri, cp. Sk. ucchrita, P. ussita & ussāpeti] meaning “accumulation” is found in cpd. samussaya only. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussayāpeti: {'def': 'see udassaye. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussaṅkha: {'def': '(adj.) [ud + saṅkha] with ankles midway (?) in °pāda the 7^th of the characteristics of a Mahāpurisa D.II,17; III,143, 154; DA. explains: the ankles are not over the heels, but midway in the length of the foot. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussaṅkin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ud + śaṅk] distrustful, fearful, anxious Vin.II,192. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussaṅkita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of ud + śaṅk] = ussaṅkin A.III,128; DhA.III,485 (+ pari°; cp. ā°). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussaṅkī: {'def': '【形】不信用的，充满恐惧。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Ussaṅkin)(‹ud + waṅk),【形】不信用的，充满恐惧(distrustful, fearful, anxious)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussaṭa: {'def': '[pp. of ud + sarati of sṛ, cp. saṭa for *sūta] run away M.II,65. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usseneti: {'def': '[denom. fr. ussena = ussayana, ud + śri (?)] to draw on to oneself, to be friendly S.III,89 (v. l. ussi°); A.II,214 sq. (opp. paṭisseneti); Ps.II,167 (ussi°); Kvu I. 93 (reading ussineti + visineti). See also paṭiseneti. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usseti: {'def': '[ud + śri] to erect, raise, stand up J IV 302; aor. ussesi J.VI,203. -- Caus. ussāpeti; pp. ussita & ussāpita (q. v.). (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usseḷheti: {'def': '(?) Vin.II,10 (for ussoḷh°?); cp. ussoḷhikāya. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussita: {'def': '[Sk. ucchrita, pp. of ud + sri, see ussāpeti] erected, high S.V,228; Th.1, 424 (pannaddhaja); J.V,386; Vv 84¹⁵; VvA.339. Cp. sam°. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已吊起，已升起。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已吊起，已升起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussiñcana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ussiñcati] drying, baling out, raising water, exhausting J.I,417. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】将（艇中）水戽出，抽水。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】将水戽出，抽水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussiñcati: {'def': '(u出+sic倾倒+ṁ-a), 洗，将水戽出(to bale)，抽水。ussiñci,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ud + sic] to bale out, exhaust J.I,450, II.70; IV,16; Miln.261. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussota: {'def': '(adj.) [ud + sota] nt. ussotaṁ as adv. “up-stream” Miln.117. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussoḷhi: {'def': '【阴】努力。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】努力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [a by-form of ussāha fr. ud + sah, pp. *soḍha dialectical] exertion M.I,103; S.II,132; V,440; A. II. 93, 195; III,307; IV,320; V,93 sq. Often comp^d. with ussāha (q. v.). (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussoḷhikā: {'def': '(f.) [adj. of ussoḷhi] belonging to exertion, only in Instr. as adv. ussoḷhikāya “in the way of exertion”, i. e. ardently, keenly, eagerly S.I,170 (naccati). (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussuka: {'def': '【形】热心的，精力充沛的。Dhp.(v.199)︰ussukesu anussukā,在渴望中无渴望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. utsuka, also BSk. e. g. Jtm 31⁶⁸] -- 1. endeavouring, zealous, eager, active S.I,15 (an° inactive); A.IV,266; Sn.298. -- 2. greedy, longing for Dh.199 (an°). (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】热心的，精力充沛的。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ussukin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ussuka] greedy, longing; only neg. an° Pug.23. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussukita: {'def': '(adj.) = ussukin; only neg. an° free from greed VvA.74. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussukka: {'def': '(nt.) [*utsukya fr. ussuka; cp. BSk. utsukya Divy 601 and autsukya Av. Ś I.85] zeal, energy, endeavour, hard work, eagerness Vin.I,50; S.IV,288, 291, 302; Nd² s. v. Nett 29; VvA.147; PvA.5, 135; Vism.90 (āpajjati); 644 (°ppahānaṁ). -- Cp. appossukka. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】努力，热心，精力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】热心，精力。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ussukkati: {'def': '[denom. fr. ussukka] to endeavour D.I,230. ‹-› Caus. II. ussukkāpeti to practice eagerly, to indulge in, to perform VvA.95, 98, 243. See also ussakkati. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + suk + a), 努力，试。 ussukki, 【过】。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(u出+suk(梵svask)+a), 努力，试。ussukki,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussukkatā: {'def': '(f.) = ussukka A Y.195. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussukkāpeti: {'def': '(Ussukkati的【使】), 诱骗，唤醒。ussukkāpesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussussati: {'def': '(u出+sus(梵wus)弄乾+ya), 乾涸，蒸发。ussussi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ud + sussati of śuṣ] to dry up (intrs.) S.I,126; III,149 (mahāsamuddo u.); Sn.985; J.VI,195. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + sus + ya), 干涸，蒸发。 ussussi, 【过】。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ussuta: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of ud + sru, cp. avassuta] defiled, lustful (cp. āsava), only neg. an° free from defilement Dh.400. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussuyā: {'def': 'Ussuyaka, uss. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāda: {'def': '(‹ussadeti),抛弃、放弃(throwing up on)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. ussādeti] throwing up on DA.I,122. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussādana: {'def': '(nt.) [to ussādeti, cp. ussādita] -- 1. overflowing, piling up, abundance M.III,230 (opp. apasādana). -- 2. (probably confused with ussāraṇa) tumult, uproar, confusion A.III,91, 92 (v. l. ussāraṇa) = Pug.66 (= hatthiassarathâdīnaṁ c’eva balakāyassa ca uccāsadda-mahāsaddo Pug.A 249). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussādeti: {'def': '[denom. fr. ussada 1] -- 1. to dismiss D.III,128 [for ussāreti¹] -- 2. to raise, cause to rise up on, haul up, pile up M.I,135; III,230; A.IV,198, 201; Miln.187, 250. -- Pass. ussādiyati (q. v.). -- pp. ussādita (q. v.). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussādita: {'def': '[fr. ussādeti, BSk. ucchrāyita Divy 76, 77, 466]. [See ussāpita & ussārita under ussāpeti & ussāreti. There exists in Pāli as well as in BSk. a confusion of different roots to express the notion of raising, rising, lifting & unfolding, viz. sṛ, syad, śri, sad, chad. (See ussada, ucchādana, ussādeti, ussāpeti, ussāreti)]. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussādiyati: {'def': '[Pass. med. of ussādeti, cp. ussada 4] to be in abundance, to be over Vin.II,167. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāha: {'def': '【阳】努力，竭力。ussāhavantu, 精力充沛，活跃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】努力，竭力。 ~vantu, 精力充沛，活跃。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. utsāha & utsaha, see ussahati] strength, power, energy; endeavour, good-will M.II,174; S.V,440; A.I,147; II,93, 195; III,75, 307; IV,320; V,93 sq.; Miln.323, 329 (dhiti +) Vism.330; Sdhp.49, 223, 535, 619; SnA 50; DhA.III,394; PvA.31, 106, 166; VvA.32, 48. -- In exegetical literature often comb^d. with the quâsi synonym ussoḷhi e. g. at Nd² s. v.; Dhs.13, 22, 289, 571. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāhana: {'def': '(f.) [fr. ussahati cp. BSk. utsahana Divy 490] = ussāha Nett 8. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāheti: {'def': '(ussahati 的【使】), 鼓励，刺激。ussāhesi,【过】。ussāhetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ussahati 的【使】), 鼓励，刺激。 ussāhesi, 【过】。 ussāhetvā, 【独】。 Ussiñcati (u + sic + ŋ-a), 洗，将（艇中）水戽出，抽水。 ussiñci, 【过】。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ussāhita: {'def': '(Ussāheti的【过分】) 鼓励，刺激。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of ussāheti, Caus. of ussahati] determined, incited, encouraged, urged J.I,329; VvA.109; PvA.201. Cp. sam°. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāpana: {'def': '【中】举起，升起。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】举起，升起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ussāpeti] lifting up, raising, erecting, unfolding (of a flag or banner) A.IV,41; Nd² 503 (dhamma-dhajassa). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of ud + &stodacute;ri, cp. BSk. ucchrāpayati Av. S.I,384, 386, 387; II,2] to lift up, erect, raise, exalt Vin.II,195; A.IV,43; J.II,219; IV,16; V,95 (chattaṁ); PvA.75 (id.); Miln.21; DhA.I,3; III 118 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ussāpita & ussita (q. v.). See also usseti. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + si + āpe), 举起，吊起，升起。 ~esi, 【过】。 ussāpetvā, 【独】。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(u出+si眠﹑卧+āpe), 举起，吊起，升起。ussāpesi,【过】。ussāpetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussāpita: {'def': '(Ussāpeti的【过分】) 举起，吊起，升起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of ussāpeti, cp. ussādita] lifted, raised, unfurled Miln.328 (dhamma-dhaja); J.II,219. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ussāreti] procession, going or running about, tumult DhA.II,7 (so read for ossāraṇā). Cp. ussādana. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāraṇā: {'def': '【阴】骚动，群众的冲闯。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】骚动，群衆的冲闯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussāreti: {'def': '² [= ussādeti] to cause to raise aloft (of a flag), to lift J.V,319 (= ussāpeti). -- pp. ussārita. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of ussarati] to cause to move back, to cause to go away or to recede Vin.I,32, 46 (here a student, when folding up his master’s robe, has to make the corners move back a hand’s breadth each time. Then the crease or fold will change and not tend to wear through), 276; II,237 (here the reading ussādeti may be preferred); J.I,419; IV,349; V,347. -- Caus. II. ussārāpeti J.II,290. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+sar(梵sr)动转+e), 把…搁置一边。ussāresi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(u + sar + e), 把…搁置一边。 ~esi, 【过】。 Ussāva, 【阳】露。 ~bindu, 【中】露珠。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ussārita: {'def': '[pp. of ussāreti²] lifted out or up Vism.63 (samuddavīcīhi thale ussārita; v. l. ussādita). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Ussāreti的【过分】) 搁置一边。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussāsa: {'def': 'see nirussāsa. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussāva: {'def': '¹ [either = Sk. avaśyāya, or to ud + sru] hoarfrost, dew D.II,19; J.IV,120; V,417; °bindu a dew drop A.IV,137; Pv IV.1⁵; SnA 458; in comparisons: Vism.231, 633. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [fr. ud + sru] outflow, taint, stain (cp. āsava) DhA.IV,165 (taṇhā°; v. l. ussada, to ussada 6). (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】露。ussāvabindu,【中】露珠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussāvana: {'def': '(nt.) [= ussāpana] proclamation (of a building as legal store house); in °antika within the proclaimed limit Vin.I,239. (Page 157)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ussīsaka: {'def': '【中】放置头部（在床）的一边，枕头。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [ud + sīsa + ka] the head of a bed, a pillow for the head J.I,266; II,410, 443; IV,154; V,99; VI,32, 37, 56; DhA.I,184 (°passe, opp. pāda-passe). (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】放置头部(在床)的一边，枕头。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ussūra: {'def': '【中】日出。（ussūre, 太阳在天上的时候）。 ~seyyā, 【阴】在日出之后睡觉。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj) [ut + sūra] “sun-out”, the sun being out; i. e. after sunrise or after noon, adverbially in °bhatta eating after mid-day, unpunctual meals A.III,260, and °seyyā sleep after sunrise, sleeping late D.III,184; DhA.II,227. Besides as Loc. adv. ussūre the sun having been up (for a long time), i. e. at evening Vin I 293; IV,77; J.II,286, also in ati-ussūre too long after sunrise VvA.65; DhA.III,305. (Page 158)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】日出。(ussūre, 太阳在天上的时候)。ussūraseyyā,【阴】在日出之后睡觉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Usu: {'def': '【阳】【阴】箭。usukāra,【阳】制箭者，造箭者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. & f) Sk. iṣu] an arrow Vin.III,106 (°loma); D.I,9; M.I,86; III,133; S.I,127; A.II,117; III,162; J.IV,416; VI,79, 248, 454; Miln.331, 339; SnA 466; PvA.155.

--kāra an arrow-maker, fletcher M.II,105; Dh.80, 145; Th.1, 29; J.II,275; VI,66; DhA.I,288. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳，阴】箭。 ~kāra, 【阳】制箭者，造箭者。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Usumā: {'def': '(f.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. uṣman, of which the direct equivalent is P. usmā (q. v.)] heat J.I,31 (= uṇha III,55), 243; II,433; Vism.172 (usuma-vaṭṭi-sadisa); DA.I,186; DhA.I,225; II,20. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usuyyaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. usuyyā] envious, jealous Vin.II,190; Sn.318, 325; J.II,192 (v. l. asuyy°); V,114. -- Note. The long vowel form usūyaka occurs in cpd. abbhusūyaka (q. v.). Spelling ussuyikā occurs at Vv 33²¹ (see VvA.147). (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usuyyanā: {'def': '(f.) & Usuyyitatta (nt.) are exegetical abstr. formations of usuyyā (q. v.). Dhs.1121; Pug.19. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usuyyati: {'def': '& Usūyati [Sk. asūyati; fr. usuyā envy] to be jealous or envious, to envy (with Acc.) Vin.I,242; J.III, 27 (ppr. an-usuyyaṁ); Pv.II,3²⁰ (maṁ usūyasi = mayhaṁ issaṁ karosi PvA.87). (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usuyyā: {'def': '& Usūyā (f.) [Sk. asūyā] envy, jealousy, detraction S.I,127 (ū); Sn.245 (u); J.II,193 (ū); III,99 (ū; v. l. ussuyyā); Miln.402 (ū); Dhs.1121 (u); VvA.71 (u); SnA 332 (u). (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usā: {'def': '(f.) [doubtful] (a certain) food J.VI,80. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usīra: {'def': '【中】芳香须芒草 (Andropogon zizamoides) 的芬香根。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk.uwīra),【中】芳香须芒草 (Andropogon Muricantum；white vala) 的芬香根。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [Sk. uśīra] the fragrant root of Andropogon Muricatum (cp. bīraṇa) Vin.I,201; II,130 (°mayā vijanī); S.II,88 (°nāḷi); A.II,199 (id.); Dh.337; J.V,39; Th.1, 402 (°attho). (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Usūyaka: {'def': '【形】羡慕的人，嫉妒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】羡慕的人，嫉妒的。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Usūyanā: {'def': 'usūyā, 【阴】羡慕，嫉妒。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'usūyā,【阴】羡慕，嫉妒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Usūyati: {'def': '(usūy + a), 嫉妒，羡慕。 usūyi, 【过】。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(usūy+a), 嫉妒，羡慕。usūyi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ut: {'def': '(t)aṇḍa see uddaṇḍa. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Utrasta: {'def': '[pp. of uttasati, also cp. uttasta] frightened, terrified, alarmed Vin.II,184; S.I,53, 54 (an°); Sn.986; Miln.23; DhA.II,6 (°mānasa); PvA.243 (°citta), 250 (°sabhāva). (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Utrāsa: {'def': '[= uttāsa] terror J.II,8 (citt°). (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】恐怖。 utrāsī, 【形】可怕的，胆小的。(p68)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】恐怖。utrāsī,【形】可怕的，胆小的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Utrāsin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. *Sk. uttrāsa = P. uttāsa] terrified, frightened, fearful, anxious S.I,99, 219. -- Usually neg. an° in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away S.I,99; Th.1, 864; Nd² 13; J.IV,296; V,4; Miln.339. See also apalāyin. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Utta: {'def': '(= vutta), (vadati 的【过分】), 已讲，已做声。【中】说话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur° speaking badly or spoken of badly, i. e. of bad repute A.II,117, 143; III,163; Kh VIII,2; KhA 218. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(= vutta), (vadati 的【过分】), 已讲，已做声。【中】说话。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttama: {'def': '【形】最高的，最好的，贵族，优良的。 ~ṅga, 【中】最重要的部份即：头。 ~ṅgaruha, 【中】头发。 ~attha, 【阳】最高的利益。 ~porisa, 【阳】最伟大的人。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】最高的，最好的，贵族的，优良的。uttamaṅga,【中】最重要的部份即：头。uttamaṅgaruha,【中】头发。uttamattha,【阳】最高的利益。uttamaporisa,【阳】最伟大的人。uttamapurisa(uttamapurusa)﹐上士。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [superl. of ud°, to which compar. is uttara. See etym. under ud°] “ut-most”, highest, greatest, best Sn.1054 (dhammaṁ uttamaṁ the highest ideal = Nibbāna, for which seṭṭhan Sn.1064; cp. Nd² 317); Dh.56; Nd¹ 211; Nd² 502 (in paraphrase of mahā comb^d. with pavara); KhA 124; DhA.I,430: PvA.1, 50. -- dum-uttama a splendid tree Vv 39³; nar° the best of men Sn.1021 (= narāsabha of 996); pur° the most magnificent town Sn.1012; puris° the noblest man Th.1, 629, 1084; nt. uttamaṁ the highest ideal, i. e. Arahantship J.I,96.

--aṅga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin.II,256 = M.I,32 = A.IV,278 (in phrase uttamaṅge sirasmiṁ); J.II,163; also in cpd. °bhūta the hair of the head Th.2, 253 (= kesa-kalāpa ThA.209, 210) & °ruha id. J.I,138 = VI,96 (= kesā C.); (b) the eye J.IV,403; (c) the penis J.V,197. --attha the highest gain or good (i. e. Arahantship SnA 332) Sn.324; Dh.386, 403; DhA.IV,142; ThA.160. --adhama most contemptible J.V,394, 437. --guṇā (pl.) loftiest virtues J.I,96. --purisa It.97 & --porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dh.97 (see DhA.II,188). --bhāva the highest condition, state or place DhA.II,188 (°ṁ patto = puris’‹-› uttamo). (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttamatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. uttama] highest amount, climax, limit DA.I,169 (for paramatā). (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttanta: {'def': '[= utrasta, is reading correct?] frightened, faint Vin.III,84. See uttasta & utrasta. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttara: {'def': '¹ (adj.) compar. of ud°, q. v. for etym.; the superl. is uttama] -- 1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in cpds., J.II,420 (musal° with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara²); see also below. -- 2. northern (with disā region or point of compass) D.I,153; M.I,123; S.I,224; PvA.75. uttarāmukha (for uttaraṁmukha) turning north, facing north Sn.1010. -- 3. subsequent, following, second (°-) J.I,63 (°āsāḷha-nakkhatta). ‹-› 4. over, beyond (-°): aṭṭh’utara-sata eight over a hundred, i. e. 108; DhA.I,388. -- sa-uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i. e. inferior D.I,80 (citta), II.299; M.I,59; S.V,265; Vbh.324 (paññā); Dhs.1292, 1596; DhsA.50. -- anuttara without a superior, unrivalled, unparalleled D.I,40; S.I,124; II,278; III,84; Sn.179. See also under anuttara.

--attharaṇa upper cover J.VI,253. --âbhimukha facing North D.II,15. --āsaṅga an upper robe Vin.I,289; II, 126; S.I,81; IV,290; A.I,67, 145; II,146; DhA.I,218; PvA.73; VvA.33 = 51. --itara something higher, superior D.I,45, 156, 174; S.I,81; J.I,364; DhA.II,60; IV,4. --oṭṭha the upper lip (opp. adhar°) J.II,420; III,26; IV, 184. --chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa° a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) D.I,7; A.I,181; III,50. --chadana = °chada D.II,187; DhA.I,87. --dvāra the northern gate J.VI,364. --dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok°), higher righteousness D.II,188 (paṭividdha-lok’uttara-dhammatāya uttama-bhāvaṁ patta). --pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin.II,120 = 148. --pubba north-eastern J.VI,518. --sse (v. l. °suve) on the day after tomorrow A.I,240. (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. uttarati] crossing over, to be crossed, in dur° difficult to cross or to get out of S.I,197 (not duruttamo); Miln.158; and in cpd. °setu one who is going to cross a bridge Miln.194 (cp. uttara-setu). (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】1.比较高的(higher, high, superior, upper)。2.跟随的(subsequent, following, second)。3.北方的(northern)。4.上面的(over, beyond)。【中】答案，答覆。uttarattharaṇa,【中】上面的掩护。uttaracchada,【阳】遮阳篷，天篷。uttarasve,【副】后天，明天的明天。lokuttara (loka+uttara) ,【形】出世间(=涅盘)。sa-uttara, 有上心(having something above or higher, having a superior)。anuttara, 无上心(without a superior, unrivalled, unparalleled)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】比较高的，比较远的，北方的，上面的。【中】答案，答复。 ~attharaṇa, 【中】上面的掩护。 ~cchada, 【阳】遮阳篷，天篷。 ~sve,【副】后天，明天的明天。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttarati: {'def': '[ud + tarati¹] -- 1. to come out of (water) Vin.II,221 (opp. otarati); J.I,108 (id.). -- 2. to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Miln.117, 118, 132, 260, 277. -- 3. to cross over, to go beyond M.I,135; aor. udatāri Sn.471 (oghaṁ). -- 4. to go over, to overspread J.V,204 (ger. uttariyāna = avattharitvā C.). -- pp. otiṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. uttareti (q. v.). (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + tar + a), 从水出来，（渡过…）转变，克服。 uttari, 【过】。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(u出+tar+a), 从水出来，(渡过…)转变，克服。uttari,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttaraṇa: {'def': '【中】横越，克服，证得，(考试)通过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】横越，克服，证得，（考试）通过。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. uttarati] bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Th.1, 418; J.I,195. In BSk. uttaraṇa only in sense of crossing, overcoming, e. g. Jtm 31 ^Q (°setu). ‹-› Cp. uttara. (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttari: {'def': 'uttariṁ,【副】越过(over, beyond)，在远处(further)，比较远的(moreover)，而且、此外(besides)，附加的(additional)。uttarikaraṇīya,【中】附加的责任(an additional duty, higher obligation)。uttaribhaṅga,【阳】多一小块(an extra portion)，小小块(tit-bit)。uttaribhaṅgika﹐美味的馅(serving as dainties)。uttarimanussadhamma,【阳】上人法(superhuman)，超出人类的能力(beyond the power of men)--体证禅那(jhāna四禅八定)、解脱(vimokkha)、正受(sampatti三摩钵地、等至)、等引(samāhita‹samādahati‘完全放置’的过去分词，已安置，三摩呬多)、道(magga四向)、果(phala四果)，乃至「我在空屋受乐」(suññāgāre abhiramāmi，指得初禅乃至第四禅)等。uttarisāṭaka(= uttarīyaṁ)【阳】上衣(upper or outer garment)，披风(cloak, mantle)。atthi…uttariṁ manussadhammā alamariya (ñāṇadassana) viseso adhigato phāsuvihāro.(有达到超越人法之殊胜最上(知见)而安住否？) Pārā.III,91︰Uttarimanussadhammo nāma jhānaṁ vimokkho samādhi samāpatti ñāṇadassanaṁ maggabhāvanā phalasacchikiriyā kilesappahānaṁ vinīvaraṇatā cittassa suññāgāre abhirati.(超越凡人的法(上人法)︰禅那(初禅乃至第四禅)、解脱(空、无相、无愿)、三昧(空、无相、无愿)、正受(三摩钵地，空、无相、无愿)、智见(三明)、修道(指四圣谛等三十七菩提分)、证果(证初果乃至四果)、断染(断染瞋痴)、心离盖(离染瞋痴)、心乐空屋(乐在初禅乃至第四禅)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'uttariŋ, 【副】越过，在远处，比较远的，而且，此外，附加的。~karaṇīya,【中】附加的责任。~bhaṅga,【阳】多一小块，小小块。~manussadhamma,【阳】上人法，超出人类经验的基准。~sāṭaka,【阳】上衣。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(°-) & Uttariṁ (adv.) [comp^n. form of uttara, cp. aṅgi-bhūta uttāni-karoti etc.] out, over, beyond; additional, moreover, further, besides. -- (1) uttariṁ: D.I,71; M.I,83; III,148; S.IV,15; Sn.796 (uttariṁ kurute = uttariṁ karoti Nd² 102, i. e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially); J.II,23; III,324; Miln.10 (ito uttariṁ anything beyond this, any more) DhA.IV,109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially; see vuttari); VvA.152. -- uttariṁ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i. e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism.314, referring to Ps.II,131, which is quoted at Miln.198, as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā. -- (2) uttari° in foll. cpds.

--karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation S.II, 99; III,168; A.V,157 = 164; It.118. --bhaṅga an extra portion, tit-bit, dainties, additional or after-meal bits Vin.II,214; III,160; IV,259; J.II,419; DhA.I,214 sa-uttaribhaṅga together with dainty bits J.I,186, cp. 196 (yāgu). --bhaṅgika serving as dainties J.I,196. --manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in cpd. °dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adj. of a transcendental character, miraculous, overwhelming Vin.I,209; II,112; III,105; IV,24; D.I,211; III,3, 12, 18; M.I,68; II,200; S.IV,290, 300, 337; A.III,430; V,88; DhA.III,480. --sāṭaka a further, i. e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle J.II,246; DhA.IV,200; PvA.48, 49 (= uttarīyaṁ). (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttarika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. uttara] transcending, superior, superhuman Nett 50. (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttaritara: {'def': '【形】更质优的。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】更质优的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttariya: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *uttarya] -- 1. state of being higher. Cp. III,3⁵; neg. an° state of being unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya. -- 2. an answer, rejoinder DhA.I,44 (karaṇ°-karaṇa). (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(abstr.‹uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *uttarya),【中】1. state of being higher; neg. anuttariya state of being unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya. -- 2. an answer, rejoinder', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttarā: {'def': '【阴】北方的方向。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】北方的方向。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttarānandamātā: {'def': '（居士名）伍答拉难答母，（古音译：）郁多罗难陀母', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Uttarāsaṅga: {'def': '【阳】上衣，郁多罗僧(比丘三衣之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】上衣，郁多罗僧。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttarīya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. uttara] an outer garment, cloak PvI.10³ (= uparivasanaṁ uparihāraṁ uttarisāṭakaṁ PvA.49); Dāvs III,30; ThA.253. (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹uttara),【中】斗蓬(披风an outer garment, cloak )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】斗蓬。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttasana: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. ud + tras, cp. uttāsana] frightening, fear J.I,414 (v. l. for uttasta). (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】惊慌，恐怖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】惊慌，恐怖。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttasati: {'def': '¹ [identical in form with next] only in Caus. uttāseti to impale, q. v. (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+tas +a), 惊慌，惊吓。uttasi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [ut + tasati²] -- 1. to frighten J.I,47 (v.267). ‹-› to be alarmed or terrified Vin.I,74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati); III,145 (id.); J.II,384; VI,79; ppr. uttasaṁ Th.1, 863; & uttasanto Pv.II,2³. -- See utrasati. Caus. uttāseti (q. v.). ‹-› pp. uttasta & utrasta (q. v.). Cp. also uttanta. (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + tas + a), 惊慌，惊吓。 uttasi, 【过】。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttasta: {'def': 'uttrasta (uttasati 的【过分】), 已惊吓，已吓坏，已恐惧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of uttasati²; usual form utrasta (q. v.)] frightened, terrified, faint-hearted J.I,414 (°bhikkhu; v. l. uttasana°). (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'uttrasta (uttasati 的【过分】), 已惊吓，已吓坏。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttatta: {'def': '(uttapati 的【过分】), 1. 已加热，已溶化。2. 已光亮。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ud + tatta¹, pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta] heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure J.VI,574 (hemaṁ uttattaṁ agginā); Vv 84¹⁷; Pv III,3² (°rūpa, so read for uggata°, reading correct at PvA.188 °singī); PvA.10 (°kanaka, T. uggatta°); Mhbv 25 (id.). (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(uttapati 的【过分】), 1.已加热，已溶化。2.已光亮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttaṇḍula: {'def': '【形】煮得差的（饭），有未煮熟谷粒的饭。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】煮得差的(饭)，未煮熟的饭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttaṇḍāla: {'def': '(adj.) [ud + taṇḍula] “grainy”, i. e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp. atikilinna too thin or liquid) J.I,340; III,383 (id.); IV,44 (id.). (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttiṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [ud + tiṇa] in uttiṇaṁ karoti to take the straw off, lit. to make off-straw; to deprive of the roof M.II,53. Cp. next. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【三】无草的。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【三】无草的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttiṇṇa: {'def': '(uttarati 的【过分】), 已越过，已到彼岸去，已出来，已经过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(uttarati 的【过分】), 已越过，已到彼岸去，已出来，已经过。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of uttarati] drawn out, pulled out, nt. outlet, passage J.II,72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa? (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttiṭṭha: {'def': '[= ucchiṭṭha? Cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cy^s. referred to uṭṭhahati “alms which one stands up for, or expects”] left over, thrown out Vin.I,44 (°patta); Th.1, 1057 (°piṇḍa); 2, 349 (°piṇḍa = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka-piṇḍa ThA.242); J.IV,380 (°piṇḍa; C. similarly as at ThA; not to the point); 386 (°piṇḍa = ucchiṭṭhaka piṇḍa C.); Miln.213, 214. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttiṭṭhati: {'def': '(u出+ṭhā站 +a) 升，站起来，努力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttiṭṭhe: {'def': 'see uṭṭhahati. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttāna: {'def': 'uttānaka,【形】仰卧的，显然的，浅的。uttānaseyyaka,【形】婴儿的。uttānīkamma, uttānīkaraṇa,【中】曝露，显示。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. ut + tan, see tanoti & tanta] -- 1. streched out (flat), lying on one’s back, supine Vin.I,271 (mañcake uttānaṁ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch); II,215; J.I,205; Pv IV.10⁸ (opp. avakujja); PvA.178 (id.), 265. -- 2. clear, manifest, open, evident [cp. BSk. uttāna in same sense at Av. S.II,106] D.I,116; S.II,28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito); J.II,168 (= pākaṭa); V,460; PvA.66, 89, 140, 168. -- anuttāna unclear, not explained J.VI,247. -- The cpd. form (°-) of uttāna in comb^n. with kṛ & bhū is uttānī° (q. v.). -- 3. superficial, “flat”, shallow A.I,70 (parisa); Pug.46.

--mukha “clear mouthed”, speaking plainly, easily understood D.I,116 (see DA.I,287); DhA.IV,8. --seyyaka “lying on one’s back”, i. e. an infant M.I,432; A.III,6; Th.1, 935; Miln.40; Vism.97 (°dāraka). (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'uttānaka, 【形】仰卧的，显然的，浅的。 ~seyyaka, 【形】婴儿的。 ~nīkamma, ~nīkaraṇa, 【中】曝露，显示。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttānaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. uttāna] -- 1. (= uttāna¹) lying on one’s back J.VI,38 (°ṁ pātetvā); DhA.I,184. -- 2. (= uttāna²) clear, open D.II,55; M.I,340 = DhA.I,173. (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttānī: {'def': '(°-) [the comp^n. form of uttāna in cpds. with kṛ & bhū cp. BSk. uttānī-karoti M Vastu III,408; uttānī-kṛta Av. Ś I.287; II,151] open, manifest etc., in °kamma (uttāni°) declaration, exposition, manifestation S.V,443; Pug.19; Vbh.259, 358; Nett 5, 8, 9, 38. -- °karaṇa id. SnA 445. -- °karoti to make clear or open, to declare, show up, confess (a sin) Vin.I,103; S.II,25, 154; III,132, 139; IV,166; V,261; A.I,286; III,361 sq. (Page 131)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttānīkaroti: {'def': '(uttāna + i + kar + o), 澄清，阐明。 uttānīkari, 【过】。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(uttāna+i+kar行+o), 澄清，阐明。uttānīkari,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttāpeti: {'def': '(u出+tap(梵tap)热+e), 加热，折磨。uttāpesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of uttapati] to heat, to cause pain, torment J.VI,161. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttāra: {'def': '[fr. ud + tṛ as in uttarati] crossing, passing over, °setu a bridge for crossing (a river) S.IV,174 = M.I,134; cp. uttara². (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttāreti: {'def': '[Caus. of uttarati] to make come out, to move or pull out J.I,194; SnA 349. -- pp. uttārita (q. v.). (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+tar +e), 横越，解救，协助。uttāresi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(u + tar + e), 横越，解救，协助。 uttāresi, 【过】。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttārita: {'def': '[pp. of uttāreti] pulled out, brought or moved out J.I,194. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Uttāreti的【过分】) 横越，解救，协助。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttāritatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. uttārita] the fact of having or being brought or moved out J.I,195. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttāsa: {'def': '【阳】恐怖，恐惧。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. uttrāsa, fr. ud + tras] terror, fear, fright D.III,148; S.V,386; Miln.170; PvA.180. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】恐怖，恐惧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uttāsana: {'def': '【中】刺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. uttāseti²] impalement J.II,444; SnA 61 (sūle). (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】刺。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttāsavant: {'def': '(adj.) [uttāsa + vant] showing fear or fright, fearful S.III,16 sq. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uttāseti: {'def': '² [cp. Sk. uttaṁsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taṁs to shake, a variation of tars to shake, tremble] to impale A.I,48; J.I,230, 326; II,443; III,34; IV,29. -- pp. uttāsita (q. v.). Cp. uttāsana. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taṁs is uttāseti² is a variant] to frighten, terrify J.I,230, 385; II,117. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+tas害怕+e), 刺穿。(uttasati 的【使】) 惊吓，使恐怖。uttāsesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(u + tas + e), 刺穿。 (uttasati 的【使】) 惊吓，使恐怖。 uttāsesi, 【过】。 Uttiṭṭhati (u +ṭhā + a) 升，站起来，努力。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uttāsita: {'def': '[pp. of uttāseti²] impaled Pv IV.1⁶ (= āvuta āropita VvA.220); J.I,499; IV,29. (Page 132)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Uttāseti的【过分】) 刺穿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Utu: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adj. ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Lat. ars “art”, Gr. damar(t), further Lat. rītus (rite), Ags. rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q. v. under appeti] -- 1. (lit.) (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa-utu occasion or time of the sun(-rise) DhA.I,165; utuṁ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraṁ utuṁ gaṇhāpeti “to cause the body to take season”, i. e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. J.III,527; DA.I,252. -- (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism.128. There are usually three seasons men‹-› tioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha, vassa & hemanta A.IV,138; SnA 317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at J.V,330 & VI,524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā) in the wintry season S.V,51. -- (c) the menses SnA 317; J.V,330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi Loc., as expl^d. by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya). -- 2. (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues, II, 8, n.; Kvu trsl^n. 207; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism, p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs.trsl^n. introd. XVII; & cp. cpds. So in connection with kamma at Vism.451, 614; J.VI,105 (kamma-paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Miln.410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā).

--āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs.trsl^n. 174) PvA.148. --ûpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities) according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Sn.249 (= gimhe ātapa-ṭṭhāna-sevanā vasse rukkha-mūla-sevanā hemante jalappavesa-sevanā SnA 291). --kāla seasonable, favourable time (of the year) Vin.I,299; II,173. --ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Miln.268 (kamma°, hetu°, utu°); Vism.451. --nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Miln.268. --pamāṇa measure of the season, i. e. the exact season Vin.I,95. --pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause of disease) S.IV,230; A.II,87; III,131; V,110; Miln.112, 304; Vism.31. --parissaya danger or risk of the seasons A.III,388. --pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons J.VI,524. --vāra time of the season, °vārena °vārena according to the turn of the season J.I,58. --vikāra change of season Vism.262. --veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Sn.291 (cp. SnA 317). --saṁvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. °ā the seasons D.III,85 = A.II,75; S.V,442. The phrase utusaṁvaccharāni at Pv.II,9⁵⁵ is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi cpd., viz. cycles of seasons & of years, i. e. vasanta-gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta-saṁvacchar’adi bahūni saṁvaccharāni ca PvA.135. Similarly at J.V,330 (with Cy). --sappāya suitable to the season, seasonable DhA 327. --samaya time of the menses SnA 317. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴，中】季节，气候，（生理）月经。 ~kāla, 【阳】月经期。 ~parissaya,【阳】季节的危险。 ~sappāya, 【阳】愉快的季节或气候。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】【中】季节，气候，(生理)月经。utukāla,【阳】排卵期(古说︰月经期)。utukkhāna(utu+akkhāna),【中】季节宣告。utuja, 时节生。utuparissaya,【阳】季节的危险。utupasevana,顺应节气。utusappāya,【阳】愉快的季节或气候。utusamuṭṭhānarūpa﹐【中】时节生色，从结生心的「住时」(ṭhiti)开始，在业生色(kammasamuṭṭhānarūpa)聚里的火界即能开始产生时节生色。utujaṭṭhamakarūpa﹐【中】时节生八法聚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Utuka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [utu + ka] seasonable, only in cpd. sabbotuka belonging to all seasons, perennial D.II,179; Pv IV. 12² (= pupphupaga-rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha PvA.275); Sdhp.248. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Utunī: {'def': '【阴】月经来潮的女人。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [formed fr. utu like bhikkhunī fr. bhikkhu] a menstruating woman Vin.III,18; IV,303; S.IV,239; A.III,221, 229; Miln.127. an° A.III,221, 226. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】月经来潮的女人。mātā ca utunī hoti,母有经水，指母的排卵期。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uviṭṭa: {'def': '[= viṭṭha, pp. of viś, with prefixed u] having entered, come in D.II,274 (v. l. BK. upa°). (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uyyassu: {'def': '(imper. 3^rd. sg.) is v. l. BB. and C. reading at J.VI,145, 146 for dayassu, fly; probably for (i) yassu of yā to go. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uyyodhika: {'def': '【中】军事演习。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】军事演习。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ud + yudh] a plan of combat, sham fight Vin.IV,107; D.I,6; A.V,65; DA.I,85. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uyyoga: {'def': '【阳】努力。参考 uyyāma。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】参考 uyyāma。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. ud + yuj] departure, approach of death Dh.236 (cp. DhA.III,335). (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uyyojana: {'def': '【中】鼓动，煽动，派遣。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. uyyojeti] inciting, instigation A.IV,233. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】激励，鼓动，怂恿，派遣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uyyojeti: {'def': '(u出+yuj连接+e)( caus.of uyyuñjati), 怂恿(to instigate)，解散(to dismiss)，寄出(send off)，送别(take leave of)。uyyojesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[caus. of uyyuñjati] -- 1. to instigate Vin.IV,235; J.III,265. -- 2. to dismiss, take leave of (Acc.), send off, let go Vin.I,179; A.III,75; J.I,119 (bhikkhu-saṅghaṁ), 293; III,188; V,217; VI,72; Vism.91; DhA.I,14, 15, 398; II,44; VvA.179; PvA.93. -- pp. uyyojita (q. v.). (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + yuj + e), 煽动，解散，送别。 uyyojesi, 【过】。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uyyojita: {'def': '[pp. of uyyojeti] instigated Miln.228; PvA.105. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(uyyojeti的【过分】) 怂恿，解散，送别。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uyyuta: {'def': '(adj.) [ud + yuta] striving, busy (in a good or bad cause) Sn.247, 248; J.V,95. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uyyutta: {'def': '(uyyuñjati 的【过分】), 1.已精力充沛。2.已使列队行进。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(uyyuñjati 的【过分】), 1. 已精力充沛。 2. 已使列队行进。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of uyyuñjati] striving, active, zealous, energetic J.I,232. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uyyuñjana: {'def': '【中】活动。uyyuñjanta,【现分】活跃的，忙碌的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】活动。~janta,【现分】活跃的，忙碌的。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uyyuñjati: {'def': '(u出+yuj连接+ṁ-a), 离去(to go away, depart, leave one’s house)。uyyuñji,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[ud + yuj] to go away, depart, leave one’s house Dh.91 (cp. DhA.II,170). -- pp. uyyutta. -- Caus. uyyojeti (q. v.). (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u + yuj + ŋ-a), 努力，忙碌。 uyyuñji, 【过】。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uyyāma: {'def': '【阳】努力。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. udyama, ud + yam; P. uyyāma with ā for a, as niyāma › niyama; cp. BSk. udyama Jtm 210] exertion, effort, endeavour Dhs.13, 22, 289, 571; DhsA.146. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】努力，勤劳(台语：拼势piann3 se3，扑拼phah piann3，搰力kut lat8，俨硬giam2 nge7)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uyyāna: {'def': '【中】公园，小乐园。 ~kīḷā, 【阴】在公园里娱乐。 ~pāla, 【阳】守园人，园丁。 ~bhūmis, 【阴】乐所，乐地。(p80)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. udyāna, fr. ud + yā] a park, pleasure grove, a (royal) garden J.I,120, 149; II,104; IV,213; V,95; VI,333; PvA.6, 74, 76; VvA.7; Sdhp.7.

--kīḷā amusement in the park, sports DhA.I,220; IV,3. --pāla overseer of parks, head gardener, park keeper J.II,105, 191; IV,264 bhūmi garden ground, pleasure ground J.I,58; Vv 64¹⁹; Pv.II,12⁹; DA.I,235. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹ud+yā﹐Sk.udyāna),【中】公园(park)，小乐园(pleasure grove)，(皇家)花园(a (royal) garden)。uyyānakīḷā,【阴】在公园里娱乐。uyyānapāla,【阳】守园人，园丁。uyyānabhūmi,【阴】花园(garden ground)，娱乐地(pleasure ground)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uyyānavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. uyyāna] full of pleasure gardens Pv III,3⁶. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uyyāti: {'def': '[ud + yā] to go out, to go away J.II,3, 4 (imper. uyyāhi); IV,101. -- Caus. uyyāpeti to cause to go away, to bring or take out S.IV,312. (Page 155)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uñcha: {'def': '& Uñchā (f.) [Sk. uñcha & uñchana, to uñch. Neumann’s etym. uñchā = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima trsl.² II.682) is incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia] anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning S.II, 281; A.I,36; III,66 sq., 104; Vin.III,87; Sn.977; Th.2, 329, 349; J.III,389; IV,23, 28, 434, 471 (°ya, Dat. = phalâphal’atthāya C.); ThA.235, 242. Cp. samuñchaka.

--cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, J.II,272; III,37, 515; V,3; DA.I,270; VvA.103; ThA.208. --cārika (adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā SnA 295 (cp. DA.I,270, 271). --patta the gleaning-bowl, in phrase uñchāpattāgate rato “fond of that which has come into the gl. b.” Th.1, 155 = Pv IV.7³ (= uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato PvA.265; trsl^d. in Psalms of Brethren “contented with whatever fills the bowl”). aññāt°, marked off as discarded (goods) S.II,281, so S A. (Page 128)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uñchati: {'def': '(uch + ñ-a), 寻求捐献，拾落穗。 uñchi, 【过】。 uñchita, 【过分】。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(uñch+ṁ-a), 寻求捐献，拾落穗(to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism.60 (= gavesati))。uñchi,【过】。uñchita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. uñch] to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism.60 (= gavesati). (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uñchā: {'def': '【阴】为生计聚集任何东西。 ~cariyā, 【阴】为拾落穗到处迁徙。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】为生计聚集任何东西。uñchācariyā,【阴】为拾落穗到处迁徙。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uññā: {'def': '(= avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññātabba?) ,【阴】轻视(contempt Vin.IV,241; Vbh.353 sq. (attuññā))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [= avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññātabba? ] contempt Vin.IV,241; Vbh.353 sq. (att°). (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uññātabba: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. fr. ava + jñā (?)] to be despised, contemptible, only in stock-phrase “daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo” S.I,69; Sn.p. 93; SnA 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaṁ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at J.V,63 mā naṁ daharo [ti] uññāsi (v. l. maññāsi) apucchitvāna (v. l. ā°). (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【义】轻视的，卑鄙的，可鄙的(to be despised, contemptible)。S.3.1./I,69.︰Bhikkhu, kho, mahārāja, daharoti na uññātabbo, daharoti na paribhotabbo.(大王！比丘是年少不可轻视，年少不应轻视。)(世尊跟波斯匿王宣说四种年少不可轻视，又见Sn.p.93; SnA 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaṁ katvā jānitabbo ti))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【潜】卑鄙的，可鄙的。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uḍḍahati: {'def': '(u + dah + a), 烧掉。 uḍḍahi, 【过】。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[ud + ḍahati] to burn up (intrs.) KhA 181 (uḍḍaheyya with v. l. uḍḍayheyya, the latter preferable). Usually in Pass. uḍḍayhati to be burnt, to burn up (intrs.) S.III,149, 150 (v. l. for ḍayhati); J.III,22 (udayhate); V,194. fut. uḍḍayhissati J.I,48. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+dah放置+a), 烧掉。uḍḍahi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uḍḍayhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. uḍḍayhati, see uddahati] burning up, conflagration Pug.13 (°velā = jhāyana-kālo Pug.A 187); KhA 181 (T. uḍḍahanavelā, v. l. preferable uḍḍayh°). (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uḍḍayhati: {'def': '(uḍḍahati的【被】) 烧掉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uḍḍeti: {'def': '(u + ḍī + e), 飞，中止。 uḍḍesi, 【过】。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [ud + ḍeti to fly. The etym. is doubtful, Müller P. Gr. 99 identifies uḍḍeti¹ & uḍḍeti² both as causatives to ḍī. Of uḍḍeti² two forms exist, uḍḍ° & oḍḍ°, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning (“lay snares”), it may be a cpd. with ava° instead of ud°. It is extremely doubtful whether uḍḍeti² belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably lī, layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l ›ḍis a freq. Pāli phenomenon. Another Caus. II. of the same root (ḍī?) is uṭṭepeti] to fly up M.I,364 (kāko maṁsapesiṁ ādāya uḍḍayeyya; vv. ll. ubbaḍaheyya, uyya, dayeyya); J.V,256, 368, 417. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [see discussion under uḍḍeti¹] (a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin.II,131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, v. l. uḍḍhetvā). -- (b) to throw away, reject PvA.256 (+ chaḍḍayāmi gloss). -- pp. uḍḍita. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(u出+ḍī+e), 飞，中止。uḍḍesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uḍḍha: {'def': '(-°) (num. ord.) [the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to uḍḍha under the influence of the preceding aḍḍha] the fourth, only in cpd. aḍḍhuḍḍha “half of the fourth unit”, i. e. three & a half (cp. diyaḍḍha 1 1/2 and aḍḍha-teyya 2 1/2) J.V,417 sq. (°āni itthisahassāni); Mhvs XII.53. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uḍḍita: {'def': '(Uḍḍeti的【过分】) 已飞，已中止，诱入圈套(ensnared)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of uḍḍeti²] ensnared (?), bound, tied up S.I,40 (= taṇhāya ullaṅghita C.; trsl^d. “the world is all strung up”). (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uḷu: {'def': '【阳】星，星座。 ~rāja, 【阳】月亮。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】星，星座。uḷurāja,【阳】月亮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. uḍu, dialectical?] a lunar mansion Miln.178. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uḷumpa: {'def': '【阳】筏，漂流物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[dial.?] a raft, a float Vin.I,230; III 63 (°ṁ bandhati); J.IV,2; DhA.II,120. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】筏，漂流物。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uḷuṅka: {'def': '【阳】长柄杓子(a ladle﹐台语：匏桸pu5 hia、鲎桸hau7 hia)，匙(a spoon)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[dial.?] a ladle, a spoon Vin.I,286; J.I,120, 157; III,461; Miln.8; DhA.I,425; II,3, 20; IV,75, 123. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】杓子。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uḷāra: {'def': '【形】高的，贵族，显赫的。uḷāratā,【阴】uḷāratta,【中】巨大，显赫。Nd1A(CS:p.171)︰Uḷārabhogakulāti avasesavessādikulā, etena pahūtajātarūparajatādiṁ dīpeti.(显赫家︰富裕商人等家庭，有丰富的金银等。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】高的，贵族，显赫的。 ~tā, 【阴】 ~tta, 【中】巨大，显赫。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic udāra, BSk. audāra] great, eminent, excellent, superb, lofty, noble, rich. -- Dhammapāla at VvA.10--11 distinguishes 3 meanings: tīhi atthehi ūḷāraṁ; paṇītaṁ (excellent), seṭṭhaṁ (best), mahantaṁ (great) Vin.III,41 (°bhoga); D.I,96; M.III,38 (°bhogatā); S.V,159; Sn.53, 58, 301; Nd² 170; J.I,399; V,95; Vv 1¹; 84²⁶; Pv.I,5¹² (= hita samiddha PvA.30); VvA.18 (°pabhāva = mahānubhāva); ThA.173, 280; PvA.5, 6, 7, 8, 25, 30, 43, 58 and passim; Sdhp.26, 260, 416. ‹-› Der. oḷārika (q. v.). (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uḷāratta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. uḷāra] greatness etc.; only neg. an° smallness, insignificance, inferiority VvA.24. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uḷāratā: {'def': '(f.) = uḷāratta Sdhp.254. (Page 156)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uḷūka: {'def': '【阳】猫头鹰。uḷūkapakkhika,【形】猫头鹰的羽毛制成的衣服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】猫头鹰。 ~pakkhika, 【形】猫头鹰的羽毛制成的衣服。(p81)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uṇha: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Vedic uṣṇā f. to oṣati to burn, pp. uṣṭa burnt, Sk. uṣṇa = Lat. ustus; cp. Gr. eu]/w, Lat. uro to burn, Ags. ysla glowing cinders, Lith. usnis nettle] hot, as adj. only in phrase uṇhaṁ lohitaṁ chaḍḍeti to spill hot blood, i. e. to kill oneself DhA.I,95; otherwise in cpds.; abs. only as nt. “heat” & always in contrast to sītaṁ “cold” Vin.II,117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi); D.II,15 (opp. sīta); M.I,85; A.I,145 = 170 = J.V,417 (sītaṁ vā uṇhaṁ vā tiṇaṁ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā); Sn.52, 966 (acc °); Nd¹ 486 = Nd² 677 (same as under sita); J.I,17 (V.93); Miln.410 (megho uṇhaṁ nibbāpeti); PvA.37 (ati°).

--ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa) paṇḍu-kambala-sil’āsanaṁ uṇhākāraṁ dassesi, of Sakka’s throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e. g. J.I,330; V,92; DhA.I,17, and passim. --odaka hot water VvA.68. --kalla glowing-hot embers or ashes J.II,94 (so read for °kalala); IV,389 (°vassa, rain of hot ashes, v. l. °kukkuḷavassa). --kāla hot weather Vin.II,209. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】热的【中】热。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Vedic usṇā f. to osati to burn, pp. usṭa burnt, Sk. usṇa),【形】热的。【中】热。uṇhodaka,热水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṇhatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. uṇha] hot state, heat Vism.171. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】热。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(abstr. fr. uṇha),【中】热(hot state, heat Vism.171.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṇhīsa: {'def': '(Sk. usṇīsa),【中】缠头巾(a turban)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. uṣṇīṣa] a turban D.I,7; II,19 = III,145 (°sīsa cp. Dial. II.16); J.II,88; Miln.330; DA.I,89; DhsA.198. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】缠头巾。(p67)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uṇṇa: {'def': '(nt.) & Uṇṇā (f.) [Sk. ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Lat. lāna wool; Goth. wulla; Ohg. wolla = E. wool; Lith. vilna; Cymr. gwlan (= E. flannel); Gr. lh_nos, also ou_]los = Lat. vellus (fleece) = Ags. wil-mod] -- 1. wool A.III,37 = IV.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) J.II,147; SnA 263 (patt°). -- 2. hair between the eyebrows Sn.1022, & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamuk’antare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. D.II,18 = III,144 = 170 = SnA 285. Also at Vism.552 in jāti-uṇṇāya.

--ja in uṇṇaja mukha J.VI,218, meaning “rounded, swelling” (C. expl^s. by kañcan’ādāso viya paripuṇṇaṁ mukhaṁ). --nābhi (either uṇṇa° or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Idg. *ǔebh to weave as in Lat. vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sk. vā) a spider, lit. “wool- i. e. thread-weaver”, only in comb^n. with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin.II,110 = A.II,73 = J.II,147 (= makkaṭaka C). (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 uṇṇā, 【阴】羊毛，纤维。（关于佛陀）在眉毛之间的一根毫毛。 ~nābhi, 【阳】蜘蛛。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】，Uṇṇā,【阴】羊毛，纤维，纤毛。uṇṇa-bhamukantara眉间白毫(佛陀在眉毛之间的一根毫毛)。uṇṇanābhi,【阳】蜘蛛。uṇṇaṁsu﹐纤毛线。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṇṇama: {'def': '[fr. uṇṇamati] loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs.1116, 1233. Cp. unnama. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṇṇamati: {'def': '[ud + nam] to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Sn.366, 829, 928; Nd¹ 169; J.VI,346 inf. uṇṇametave Sn.206. Cp. unnamati. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ud + nam), 升起(to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited)。inf. uṇṇametave, 了不起(Sn.206.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṇṇata: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of uṇṇamati, Sk. unnata] raised, high, fig. haughty (opp. oṇata) A.II,86; Sn.702 (an° care = uddhaccaṁ n’āpajjeyya SnA 492); Pug.52 (= ucca uggata Pug.A 229). Cp. unnata. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṇṇati: {'def': '(f.) [fr. uṇṇamati] haughtiness Sn.830; Nd¹ 158, 170; Dhs.1116, 1233. Cp. unnati. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṇṇī: {'def': '(Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa),【阴】羊毛织物(a woollen dress Vin.II,108.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa] a woollen dress Vin.II,108. (Page 130)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭepaka: {'def': 'one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk°) Vin.I,79 (vv. ll. uṭṭhe°, uḍḍe°, uḍe°). See remarks on uṭṭepeti. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭepeti: {'def': 'in phrase kāke u. “to scare crows away” (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin.I,79. Reading doubtful & should probably be read uḍḍepeti (? Caus. of uḍḍeti = oḍḍeti, or of uḍḍeti to make fly away). The vv. ll. given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, uḍḍoyeti. See also uṭṭepaka. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhahati: {'def': 'uṭṭhāti (u +ṭhā + a), 站起来，出现，活跃。 uṭṭhāsi, uṭṭhahi, 【过】。uṭṭhita, 【过分】。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Uṭṭhāti (u+ṭhā +a), 站起来，出现，活跃。uṭṭhāsi, uṭṭhahi,【过】。uṭṭhita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Uṭṭhāti [ud + sthā see tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati] to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or exert oneself, to be active, pres. uṭṭhahati Pug.51. -- pot. uṭṭhaheyya S.I,217; as imper. uttiṭṭhe Dh.168 (expl^d. by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaṁ gharadvāre ṭhatvā DhA.III,165, cp. Vin Texts I.152). -- imper. 2^nd pl. uṭṭhahatha Sn.331; 2^nd sg. uṭṭhehi Pv.II,6¹; J.IV,433. -- ppr. uṭṭhahanto M.I,86; S.I,217; J.I,476. -- aor. uṭṭhahi J.I,117; PvA.75. -- ger. uṭṭhahitvā PvA.4, 43, 55, 152, & uṭṭhāya Sn.401. -- inf. uṭṭhātuṁ J.I,187. ‹-› Note. When uṭṭh° follows a word ending in a vowel, and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e. g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin.II,278; āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism.126. See also under vuṭṭhahati. -- pp. uṭṭhita; Caus. uṭṭhāpeti. -- Cp. pariyuṭṭhāti. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhahitvā: {'def': 'Uṭṭhāya, (Uṭṭhahati的【独】), 起来了，出现了。uṭṭhāyāsanā,起座。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṭṭhahāna: {'def': '[ppr. of uṭṭhahati] exerting oneself, rousing oneself; an° sluggish, lazy Dh.280 (= ayāyāmanto DhA.III,409); cp. anuṭṭhahaṁ S.I,217. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhapana: {'def': 'see vo°. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhita: {'def': '[pp. of uṭṭhahati] -- 1. risen, got up Pv.II,9⁴¹ (kāl°); Vism.73. -- 2. arisen, produced J.I,36; Miln.155. -- 3. striving, exerting oneself, active J.II,61; Dh.168; Miln.213. --an° S.II,264; Ps.I,172. -- Cp. pariy°. ‹-› Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel; see vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati, e. g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion D.II,9; pāto vuṭṭhito risen early PvA.128. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(uṭṭhāti 的【过分】), 已起来，已兴起，已生产。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(uṭṭhāti 的【过分】), 已起来，已兴起，已生产。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṭṭhāhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.] = uṭṭhāyaka J.V,448; f. °ikā A.III,38 (v. l. °āyikā); IV,266 sq. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】起来，上升，起源，能源，工业，产品。 ~ka,【形】生产的，出产的。~vantu,【形】奋发的。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】起来，起立，上升，起源，能源，工业，产品。uṭṭhānaka,【形】生产的，出产的。uṭṭhānavantu,【形】奋发的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. ut + ṣṭhā] -- 1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) D.II,134 (sīha-seyyaṁ kappesi uṭṭhāna-saññaṁ manasikaritvā); Dh.280 (°kāla); J.I,392 (an°-seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism.73 (aruṇ-uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) DhA.I,17. -- 2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adj. (-°) producing J.I,47 (kapp°); VI,459; Miln.326 (dhaññ° khettaṁ atthi). -- 3. “rousing”, exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry, often syn. with viriya M.I,86; A.I,94; II,135 (°phala); III,45 (°viriya), 311; IV,281 (°sampadā); It.66 (°adhigataṁ dhanaṁ earned by industry); Pv IV.3²⁴; Pug.51 (°phala); Miln.344, 416; ThA.267 (°viriya); PvA.129 (+ viriya). --an° want of energy, sluggishness A.IV,195; Dh.241. ‹-› Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh° after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q. v.) gabbha-vuṭṭhānaṁ J.I,114. See also vuṭṭh°, and cp. pariy°. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhānaka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. uṭṭhāna] -- 1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing J.I,377, 420 (satasahass°); III, 229 (id.); V,44 (id.). Cp. uṭṭhāyika. -- 2. energetic J.VI,246. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhānavant: {'def': '(adj.) [uṭṭhāna + vant] strenuous, active Dh.24. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigata: {'def': '(uṭṭhāna起来+vīriya勇悍+adhigata达到), 发起勇悍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṭṭhāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. II. of utthahati] -- 1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaṁ (suriyaṁ) u. to let the sun rise, i. e. wait for sunrise or to go on till sunrise J.I,318; VI,330; Vism.71, 73 (aruṇaṁ). -- 2. to raise J.VI,32 (paṭhaviṁ). ‹-› 3. to fit up J.VI,445 (nāvaṁ). -- 4. to exalt, praise DA.I,256. -- 5. to turn a person out DhA.IV,69. -- See also vuṭṭhāpeti. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(uṭṭhāti 的【使】), 令上升，升起，赶走一个人。uṭṭhāpesi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(uṭṭhāti 的【使】), 令上升，升起，赶走一个人。 uṭṭhāpesi, 【过】。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Uṭṭhātar: {'def': '[n. ag. of ut + ṣṭhā, see uṭṭhahati] one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy S.I,214; A.IV,285, 288, 322; Sn.187; J.VI,297. --an° one who is without energy S.I,217; Sn.96. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhātu: {'def': '【阳】起来的人，唤醒自己的人。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】起来的人，唤醒自己的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṭṭhāyaka: {'def': '【形】 (uṭṭhāyikā,【阴】) 活跃的，勤勉的。(p66)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [adj. formation fr. uṭṭhāya, ger. of uṭṭhahati] “getting-up-ish”, i. e. ready to get up, quick, alert, active, industrious; f. uṭṭhayikā Th.2, 413 (= uṭṭhāna-viriyasampannā ThA.267; v. l. uṭṭhāhikā) (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】【阳】(uṭṭhāyikā,【阴】) 活跃的，勤勉的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Uṭṭhāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [= uṭṭhānaka] yielding, producing J.II,403 (satasahass°). (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭhāyin: {'def': '(adj.) [adj. form. fr. uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka] getting up D.I,60 (pubb° + pacchā-nipātin rising early & lying down late). (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Uṭṭitvā: {'def': 'at Vin.II,131 is doubtful reading (see p. 318, v. l. uḍḍhetvā), and should perhaps be read uḍḍetvā (= oḍḍetva, see uḍḍeti), meaning “putting into a sling, tying or binding up”. (Page 129)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

V: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十九个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 w。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十九个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 w。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Va: {'def': '⁴ is (metrically) shortened form of vā, as found e. g. Dh.195 (yadi va for yadi vā); or in correlation va-va either-or: Dh.108 (yiṭṭhaṁ va hutaṁ va), 138 (ābādhaṁ va cittakkhepaṁ va pāpuṇe). (Page 590)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ (indecl.) [for eva, after long vowels] even, just (so), only; for sure, certainly Dh.136 (aggi-daḍḍho va tappati); J.I,138, 149 (so pi suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇo va ahosi), 207; SnA 76 (vakāro avadhāraṇ’attho eva-kāro vā ayaṁ, sandhi-vasen’ettha e-kāro naṭṭho: wrong at this passage Sn.38 for va²=iva!); PvA.3 (eko va putto), 4 (ñātamattā va). (Page 590)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (indecl.) [the enclitic, shortened form of iva after long vowels. Already to be found for iva in RV metri causâ] like, like as, as if; only in poetry (as already pointed out by Trenckner, Miln.422): It.84 (tālapakkaṁ va bandhanā), 90 (chavālātaṁ va nassati); Dh.28; Sn.38 (vaṁso visālo va: see C. explⁿ under va³); Pv.I,8¹ (ummatta-rūpo va; =viya PvA.39); I,11⁶ (naḷo va chinno); Miln.72 (chāyā va anapāyinī); J.III,189 (kusamuddo va ghosavā); IV,139 (aggîva suriyo va); DhA.III,175. (Page 590)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'iva 或 eva 被弄短的词形。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ the syllable “va” KhA 109 (with ref. to ending °vā in Bhagavā, which Bdhgh exp^ls as “va-kāraṁ dīghaṁ katvā,” i. e. a lengthening of va); SnA 76 (see below va³). (Page 590)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3 (for eva, after long vowels)。【叹】(even, just (so), only; for sure, certainly.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'iva 或 eva 被弄短的词形。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '4 , 或(is (metrically) shortened form of vā, as found e. g. Dh 195 (yadi va for yadi vā); or in correlation va-va either-or.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (the enclitic, shortened form of iva after long vowel),【叹】(like, like as, as if; only in poet.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vabbhācitaṁ: {'def': 'is a a(/pac legomέnon at M.I,172; read perhaps better as vambhayitaṁ: see p. 545. Neumann trsl^d only “thus spoken” (i. e. bhāsitam etaṁ). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaca: {'def': '(nt.) a kind of root Vin.I,201=IV.35. Cp. vacattha. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2,【中】菖蒲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1,【阳】【中】(mano-group), 语，话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano-组), 语，话。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vacana: {'def': '【中】说话，语，字，叙述，术语，表达。 ~kara, 【形】服从的。~kkhama, 【形】乐意做他人的吩咐的。 ~ttha, 【阳】字的意谓。 ~nīya,【形】适合被讲的，适合被劝告的。 ~patha, 【阳】叙述的方法。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vac; Vedic vacana] 1. speaking, utterance, word, bidding S.II,18 (alaṁ vacanāya one says rightly); IV,195 (yathā bhūtaṁ); A.II,168; Sn.417, 699, 932, 984, 997; Miln.235; Pv.II,2⁷; SnA 343, 386. -- mama vacanena in my name PvA.53. -- dubbacana a bad word Th.2, 418 (=dur-utta-vacana ThA.268). --vacanaṁ karoti to do one’s bidding J.I,222, 253. ‹-› 2. (t. t. g.) what is said with regard to its grammatical, syntactical or semantic relation, way of speech, term, expression, as: āmantana° term of address KhA 167; SnA 435; paccatta° expression of sep. relation, i. e. the accusative case SnA 303; piya° term of endearment Nd² 130; SnA 536; puna° repetition SnA 487; vattamāna° the present tense SnA 16, 23; visesitabba° qualifying (predicative) expression VvA.13; sampadāna° the dative relation SnA 317. At SnA 397 (comb^d with linga and other terms) it refers to the “number,” i. e. singular & plural.

--attha word-analysis or meaning of words Vism.364; SnA 24. --kara one who does one’s bidding, obedient; a servant Vv 16⁵; 84²¹; J.II,129; IV,41 (vacanaṁ-kara); V,98; PvA.134. --khama gentle in words S.II,282; A.IV,32. --paṭivacana speech and counterspeech (i. e. reply), conversation DhA.II,35; PvA.83, 92, 117. --patha way of saying, speech M.I,126 (five ways, by which a person is judged: kālena vā akālena vā, bhūtena & a°, saṇhena & pharusena, attha-saṁhitena & an°, mettacittā & dosantarā); A.II,117, 153; III,163; IV,277, cp. D.III,236; Vv 63¹⁷ (=vacana VvA.262); SnA 159, 375. --bheda variance in expression, different words, kind of speech SnA 169, cp. vacanamatte bhedo SnA 471. --vyattaya distinction or specification of expression SnA 509. --sampaṭiggaha “taking up together,” summing up (what has been said), résumé KhA 100. --sesa the rest of the words PvA.14, 18, 103. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】说话，语，字，敍述，术语，表达。vacanakara,【形】服从的。vacanakkhama,【形】乐意做他人的吩咐的。vacanattha,【阳】字的意谓。vacananīya,【形】适合被讲的，适合被劝告的。vacanapatha,【阳】敍述的方法。ekavacana﹐单数。dvivacana﹐双数(梵文)。bahuvacana(梵vahuvacana)﹐复数。「五种语。一应时语。二应理语。三应量语。四寂静语。…云何应时语？谓非纷扰，或遽寻思，或不乐闻，或不安住正威仪时，而有所说。又应先序初时所作，然后赞励正起言说，又应待他语论终已方起言说，如是等类一切，当知名应时语。云何应理语？谓依四道理，能引义利称实而语，名应理语。云何应量语？谓文句周圆，齐尔所语决有所须，但说尔所不增不减，非说杂乱无义文辞，如是等类名应量语。云何寂静语？谓言不高疏，亦不喧动，身无奋发，口不咆勃而有所说，名寂静语。云何正直语？谓言无诡诈，不因虚构而有所说，离谄曲故，发言纯质，如是当知名正直语。」(《瑜》T30.855.3)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vacanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vacana] to be spoken to, or to be answered D.I,175; Sn.p. 140. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vacasa: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [the adj. form of vaco=vacas] having speech, speaking, in cpd. saddheyya° of credible speech, trustworthy Vin.III,189. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '-vacasa (the adj. form of vaco=vacas) ,【形】讲话的(having speech, speaking)。saddheyyavacasā, 说话值得信赖的(of credible speech, trustworthy)。Pārā.III,189︰Saddheyyavacasā nāma āgataphalā abhisametāvinī viññātasāsanā.(说话值得信赖︰已证果，彻底地了解法，理解教法。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vacattha: {'def': '(nt.) a kind of root Vin.I,201=IV.35. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】白菖蒲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vacatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. vaco] is found only in cpd. dubbacatā surliness J.I,159. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vacca: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. BSk. vaccaḥ AvŚ I.254] excrement, fæces Vin.II,212; IV,229, 265; Vism.250 (a baby’s); VbhA.232 (id.), 243; PvA.268. -- vaccaṁ osajjati, or karoti to ease oneself J.I,3; PvA.268.

--kuṭī (& kuṭi) a privy Vin.II,221; J.I,161; II,10; Vism.235, 259, 261; VbhA.242; DhA.II,55, 56; PvA.266, 268. --kūpa a cesspool Vin.II,221; J.V,231; Vism.344 sq.; DhA.I,180. --ghaṭa a pot for excrements, chamber utensil, commode Vin.I,157=II.216; M.I,207. --doṇikā id. Vin.II,221. --magga “the way of fæces,” excrementary canal, opening of the rectum Vin.II,221; III,28 sq., 35; J.I,502; IV,30. --sodhaka a privy-cleaner, night-man Mhvs 10, 91. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】排泄物，粪便，(家畜的)粪。vaccakuṭī,【阴】厕所(privy)，茅房(lavatory)。vaccakūpa,【阳】茅坑(厕所里的粪坑)。vaccamagga,【阳】肛门。vaccasodhaka,【阳】清理厕所工人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】排泄物，粪便，（家畜的）粪。 ~kuti, 【阴】厕所，茅房。 ~kūpa,【阳】茅坑（厕所里的粪坑）。 ~magga, 【阳】肛门。 ~sodhaka, 【阳】清理厕所工人。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaccasin: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. varcasvin & Ved. varcin, having splendour, might or energy, fr. Vedic varcas] energetic, imposing D.I,114 (brahma°; Dial. I.146 “fine in presence, “ cp. DA.I,282). See also under brahma. ‹-› Note. The P. root vacc is given at Dhtm 59 in meaning of “ditti,” i. e. splendour. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaccha: {'def': '【阳】小牛，崽子。 ~ka, 【阳】小牛犊。 ~giddhinī, 【阴】渴望有犊子的母牛。 ~tara, 【阳】大牛犊。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】小牛，小动物。vacchaka,【阳】小公牛，小牛犊。vacchagiddhinī,【阴】渴望有犊子的母牛。vacchatara,【阳】大牛犊，古译：特犊。vacchatari﹐小母牛，牸犊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [=rukkha, fr. vṛkṣa] a tree; only in mālā° an ornamental plant Vin.II,12; III,179; Vism.172; DhA.II,109. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic vatsa, lit. “one year old, a yearling”; cp. Gr. e)/tos year, Sk. vatsara id., Lat vetus old, vitulus calf; Goth. wiprus a year old lamb=Ohg. widar=E. wether] a calf Dh.284; J.V,101; Vism.163 (in simile), 269 (id.; kūṭa° a maimed calf); DhsA.62 (with popular etym. “vadatī ti vaccho”); VvA.100, 200 (taruṇa°). ‹-› On vaccha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

--giddhinī longing for her calf S.IV,181. --gopālaka a cow-herd Vism.28. --danta “calf-tooth,” a kind of arrow or javelin M.I,429; J.VI,448. --pālaka cow-herd Vv 51². (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vacchaka: {'def': '[Demin. fr. vaccha¹] a (little) calf J.III,444; V,93, 433; Miln.282 (as go-vacchaka).

--pālaka a cow-herd J.III,444. --sālā cow-shed, cowpen J.V,93; Miln.282. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vacchala: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. vatsala] affectionate, lit. “loving her calf” ThA.148 (Ap v.64). (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】亲爱的，挚爱的。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】亲爱的，挚爱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vacchara: {'def': '【中】年。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. vatsara] year Sdhp.239. See the usual saṁvacchara. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】年。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vacchatara: {'def': '[fr. vaccha; the compar. suffix in meaning “sort of, --like.” Cp. Sk. vatsatara] a weaned calf, bullock D.I,127, 148; S.I,75; A.II,207; IV,41 sq.; Pug.56; DA.I,294. -- f. vacchatarī D.I,127; S.I,75; Vin.I,191; Pug.56. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vacchati: {'def': 'is fut. of vasati to dwell. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaccita: {'def': '[pp. of vacceti, denom. of vacca] wanting to ease oneself, oppressed with vacca Vin.II,212, 221. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaco: {'def': '(& vaca) (nt.) [Vedic vacas, of vac] speech, words, saying; Nom. & Acc. vaco Sn.54, 356, 988, 994, 1006, 1057, 1110, 1147; J.I,188; Nd¹ 553 (=vacana byāpatha desanā anusandhi); Pv.I,11¹². Instr. vacasā Vin.II,95 (dhammā bahussutā honti dhatā v. paricitā); III,189; S.I,12 (+manasā); Sn.365, 663, 890 (=vacanena Nd¹ 299); Vism.241; Mhvs 19, 42. -- As adj. (-°) vaca in combⁿ with du° as dubbaca having bad speech, using bad language, foul-mouthed M.I,95; S.II,204; A.II,147; III,178; V,152 sq.; J.I,159; Pug.20; Sdhp.95, 197. Opp. suvaca of nice speech M.I,126; A.V,24 sq.; Pv IV.1³³ (=subbaca PvA.230). -- Cp. vacī & vācā. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vacā: {'def': '【阴】菖蒲(sweet flag plant﹐多年生草本植物 (Acorus calamus)，生在水边，有淡红色根茎，叶子形状像剑，肉穗花序。根茎可做香料，做健胃剂，外用可治牙痛、齿龈出血)，鸢尾根(orris root﹐见 Golomī)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】菖蒲（多年生草本植物 (Acorus calamus)，生在水边，地下有淡红色根茎，叶子形状像剑，肉穗花序。根茎可做香料，中医用做健胃剂，外用可以治牙痛、齿龈出血等），鸢尾根（见 Golomī）。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vacī: {'def': '【阴】讲话，字。vacīkamma,【中】口业(口说的行动)。vacīgutta,【形】控制讲话的。vacīduccarita,【中】话讲的不恰当。vacīparama,【形】只擅长於讲话而不擅长於行动的人(光说不练者)。vacībheda,【阳】说话。vacīviññatti,【阴】语表(见《清净道论》Vism.448)。vacīsaṅkhāra,【阳】语行(见《清净道论》 Vism.531)。vacīsamācāra,【阳】言谈的好行为。vacīsucarita,【中】言谈的善行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】讲话，字。 ~kamma, 【中】口业（口述的行动）。 ~gutta, 【形】控制讲话的。 ~duccarita,【中】话讲的不恰当。 ~parama, 【形】只擅长于讲话而不擅长于行动的人。 ~bheda, 【阳】说话。 ~viññatti, 【阴】语表（见《清净道论》448）。 ~saṅkhāra, 【阳】语行（见《清净道论》531）。 ~samācāra, 【阳】言谈的好行为。 ~sucarita, 【中】言谈的好行动。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(°-) [the composition form of vaco] speech, words; rare by itself (and in this case re-established from cpds.) and poetical, as at Sn.472 (yassa vacī kharā; expl^d at SnA 409 by “vācā”), 973 (cudito² vacīhi=vācāhi SnA 574). Otherwise in cpds, like: --gutta controlled in speech Sn.78. --para one who excels in words (not in actions), i. e. a man of words J.II,390. --parama id. D.III,185. --bheda “kind of words,” what is like speech, i. e. talk or language Vin.IV,2; Miln.231 (meaning here: break of the vow of speech?); various saying, detailed speech, specification KhA 13; SnA 464, 466. See also vākya-bheda & vācaṁ bhindati. --viññatti intimation by language Vism.448; Miln.370; Dhs.637. --vipphāra dilating in talk Miln.230, 370. --samācāsa good conduct in speech M.II,114; III,45; D.III,217. ‹-› Often coupled (as triad) with kāya° & mano° (=in deed & in mind; where vācā is used when not compounded), e. g. in (vacī) --kamma (+kāya° & mano°) deed by word M.I,373, 417; III,207; D.III,191, 245; °duccarita misbehaviour in words (four of these, viz. musāvāda, pisuṇā vācā, pharusā vācā, samphappalāpa A.II,141 D.III,52, 96, 111, 214, 217; Nd¹ 386; Pug.60; DhA.I,23; III,417; °saṅkhāra antecedent or requisite for speech M.I,301; A.III,350; S.IV,293; VbhA.167; Vism.531; °sañcetanā intention by word VbhA.144; °sucarita good conduct in speech A.II,141 (the 4: sacca-vācā, apisuṇā vācā, saṇhā vācā, mantā bhāsā). (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vacībhedasamuṭṭhāpaka: {'def': '﹐【形】产生说话的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vacīsaṅkhāra: {'def': '﹐【阳】语行。“vitakketvā vicāretvā pacchā vācaṁ bhindati, tasmā vitakkavicārā vacīsaṅkhāro.”(先有寻、伺，后发语，故寻、伺为口行。)(M.44./I,301.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vada: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vad] speaking, in cpd. vaggu° speaking pleasantly Sn.955 (cp. Nd¹ 446; SnA 571=sundaravada); suddhiṁ° of clean speech Sn.910. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadana: {'def': '【中】脸，演讲，说话语。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vad] speech, utterance VvA.345 (+kathana). (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】脸，演讲，说话语。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vadapeti: {'def': '(vadati 的【使】), 使人说。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】~petvā。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vadati 的【使】), 使人说。【过】vadapesi。【过分】vadapita。【独】vadapetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vadati: {'def': '[vad, Ved. vadati; Dhtp 134 vada=vacana] to speak, say, tell A.IV,79; Sn.1037, 1077 sq.; Pug.42; PvA.13, 16, 39; Pot. 1^st sg. vade (so read for vado?) M.I,258; 3^rd sg. vadeyya Pv.I,3³; aor. 3^rd pl. vadiṁsu PvA.4. -- Cp. abhi°, upa°, pa°, vi°. -- Another form (not Caus.: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 139²) is vadeti D.I,36; Vin.II,1; Sn.825; Sn.p. 140 (kiṁ vadetha); J.I,294; imper. vadehi PvA.62; Pot. med. 1^st pl. vademase D.III,197; fut. vadessati Sn.351; aor. vadesi DhA.III,174. -- A specific Pāli formation is a Caus. vādiyati in act. and med. sense (all forms only in Gāthā style), e. g. indic. vādiyati Sn.824=892, 832; expl^d as vadati SnA 541, 542, or katheti bhaṇati etc. (the typical Niddesa explⁿ of vadati: see Nd² 555) Nd¹ 161. In contracted (& shortened) form Pot. 2^nd sg. vajjesi (*vādiyesi) you might tell, i. e. please tell Pv.II,11⁶ (=vadeyyāsi PvA.149); III,6⁷ (same explⁿ p. 203). The other Pot. forms from the same base are the foll.: 1^st sg. vajjaṁ Th.2, 308; 2^nd sg. vajjāsi Th.2, 307; J.III,272; VI,19; and vajja Th.2, 323; 3^rd sg. vajjā Sn.971 (cp. Nd¹ 498); J.VI,526 (=vadeyya C.); 3^rd pl. vajjuṁ Sn.859 (=vadeyyuṁ katheyyuṁ etc. Nd² 555); J.V,221. -- Caus. vādeti to make sound, to play (a musical instrument) J.I,293; II,110, 254 (vādeyyāma we might play); Ap 31 (aor. vādesuṁ); PvA.151 (vīṇaṁ vādento). -- Pass. vajjati (*vādiyati) to be played or sounded J.I,13 (vajjanti bheriyo); Ap 31 (ppr. vajjamāna & aor. vajjiṁsu). ‹-› Another form of ppr. med. (or Pass.) is vadāna (being called, so-called) which is found in poetry only (contracted fr. vadamāna) at Vin.I,36=J.I,83. -- pp. udita² & vādita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. vādāpeti to cause to be played Mhvs 25, 74 (tūriyaṁ). (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vad说+a), 说，讲。【过】vadi。【过分】vutta。【现分】vadanta, vadamāna。【义】vattabba。【独】vatvā, vaditvā。【不】vattuṁ。vuttanayena﹐依已说过的原理。sammā vadamāno﹐正说。N’eso n’atthīti vadāmi,我不说：它不存在。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vad + a), 说，讲。【过】 vadi。【过分】 vutta。【现分】 vadanta,vadamāna。【潜】 vattabba。【独】 vatva, vaditvā。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vadaññu: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. vadāniya, which also in P. avadāniya] lit. “(easily) spoken to,” addressable, i. e. liberal, bountiful, kind S.I,43; A.II,59, 61 sq.; IV,271 sq., 285, 289, 322; Sn.487; Pv IV.1³³, 3⁴², 10¹¹, 15⁴; VvA.281. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadaññutā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. vadaññu] bounty, kindness, liberality; neg. a° stinginess A.V,146, 148 sq.; Vbh.371. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadaññū: {'def': '【形】不拘泥的，慷慨的，听取恳求道德。 ~utā, 【阴】宽大，磊落。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不拘泥的，慷慨的，听取恳求道德。vadaññutā,【阴】宽大，磊落。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaddalika: {'def': '【阴】雨云朵的堆积。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】雨云朵的堆积。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaddalikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. late Sk. vārdala & BSk. vardalikā MVastu III,301; Divy 500] rainy weather Vin.I,3; J.VI,52 (Loc. vaddalike); DhA.III,339; VbhA.109. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaddha: {'def': '¹ (adj.-n.) [pp. of vaḍḍhati; see also vaḍḍha, vuḍḍha & vuddha. The root given by Dhtp (166) for vṛdh is vadh in meaning “vuddhi”] 1. grown, old; an Elder; venerable, respectable; one who has authority. At J.I,219 three kinds of vaddha are distinguished: one by nature (jāti°), one by age (vayo°), one by virtue (guṇa°); J.V,140 (=paññāya vuddha C.). Usually comb^d with apacāyati to respect the aged, e. g. J.I,219; and in cpd. vaddh-apacāyika respecting the elders or those in authority J.IV,94; and °apacāyin id. Sn.325 (=vaddhānaṁ apaciti-karaṇa SnA 332); Dh.109; DhA.II,239 (=buḍḍhatare guṇavuddhe apacāyamāna). Cp. jeṭṭh’apacāyin. -- 2. glad, joyful; in cpd. °bhūta gladdened, cheerful J.V,6. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic vardhra in meaning “tape”] a (leather) strap, thong J.II,154 (vv. ll. baddha, bandhana, bandha, vaṭṭa). Occurs as aṁsa° shoulder strap at Ap 310, where ed. prints baddha (=baddha²).

--maya consisting of a strap, made of leather J.II,153. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Vuddha。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】老的，庄严的。vaddhatara,【形】年长者，资深者。bhikkhū vuḍḍhatarā, 诸较年长的比丘。参考 Vuddha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaddhaka: {'def': '[vaddha+ka] in cpd. aṁsa° “shoulder strap” should be the uniform reading for a series of diff. spellings (°vaṭṭaka, °baddhaka, °bandhaka) at Vin.I,204; II,114; IV,170. Cp. Geiger, Zeitschrift fur Buddhismus IV.107. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaddhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vṛdh; see the usual vaḍḍhana] increase, furthering J.III,422 (kula°); Sdhp.247 (pīti°), 307 (id.). (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 vaḍḍhana。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 vaḍḍhana。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaddhava: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vaddha¹ 2] joy, pleasure J.V,6 (but C.=paṇḍita-bhāva). (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaddhavya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vaddha¹ 1] (old) age J.II,137 (=vuddhabhāva, mahallakatā C.). (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaddheti: {'def': '[fr. vardh to cut, cp. vaḍḍhaka & vaḍḍhakī] to cut off, is Kern’s proposed reading (see Toev. s. v.) at J.VI,527 (siro vaddhayitvāna) for vajjheti (T. reading vajjhayitvāna). (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaddhi: {'def': 'in antavaddhi at J.I,260 is to be read as vaṭṭi. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaddhāpacāyana: {'def': '【中】向年长者尊敬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】向年长者尊敬。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vadeti: {'def': '(vad + e), 说。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vad +e), 说。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vadha: {'def': '【阳】处罚，杀害，死刑。 ~ka, 【阳】刽子手，施行处罚的人。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】处罚，杀害，死刑。vadhaka,【阳】刽子手，施行处罚的人。vadhabandha﹐囚禁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vadh] striking, killing; slaughter, destruction, execution D.III,176; A.II,113; Pug.58; J.II,347; Miln.419 (°kata); DhA.I,69 (pāṇa°+pāṇa-ghāta), 80, 296; DhA.II,39; VbhA.382. -- vadhaṁ dadāti to flog J.IV,382. -- atta° self-destruction S.II,241; piti° parricide DA.I,153; miga° hunting J.I,149.

--bandhana flogging and binding (imprisoning). In this connection vadh is given as a separate root at Dhtp 172 & 384 in meaning “bandhana.” See A.II,209; V,206; Sn.242 (vadha-cheda-bandhana; v. is expl^d at SnA 285 as “sattānaṁ daṇḍ’ādīhi ākoṭanan” i. e. beating) 623 (=poṭhana SnA 467); J.I,435; IV,11; VbhA.97. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadhaka: {'def': '(fr. vadh),【阳】杀，谋杀，谋杀者(slaying, killing; murderous; a murderer)。vadhakacitta, 杀心。vadhakacetanā, 杀意(murderous intention)。【阴】vadhikā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vadh] slaying, killing; murderous; a murderer S.III,112 (in simile); IV,173 (id.); A.IV,92 (id.); Th.2, 347; D.III,72 (°citta); KhA 27; VvA.72 (°cetanā murderous intention); Vism.230, 231 (in sim.); Sdhp.58. ‹-› f. vadhikā J.V,425 (pl. °āyo). (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadhati: {'def': '(Vedic vadh; the root is given at Dhtp 169 in meaning of “hiṁsā”), 打，处罚，杀(to strike, punish; kill, slaughter, slay; imper. 2nd pl. vadhetha Vism.314; ger. vadhitvā M.I,159; D.I,98; J.I.12; IV.67; SnA 257 (hiṁsitvā+); fut. vadhissati Mhvs 25, 62; aor. vadhi J.I.18 (cp. ud-abbadhi); cond. 1st sg. vadhissaṁ Miln.221. -- grd. vajjha: see a°. -- Caus. vadheti J.I.168; Miln.109. pp. vadhita.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic vadh; the root is given at Dhtp 169 in meaning of “hiṁsā”] to strike, punish; kill, slaughter, slay; imper. 2^nd pl. vadhetha Vism.314; ger. vadhitvā M.I,159; D.I,98; J.I,12; IV,67; SnA 257 (hiṁsitvā+); fut. vadhissati Mhvs 25, 62; aor. vadhi J.I,18 (cp. ud-abbadhi); cond. 1^st sg. vadhissaṁ Miln.221. -- grd. vajjha: see a°. -- Caus. vadheti J.I,168; Miln.109. ‹-› pp. vadhita. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadheti: {'def': '(vadh拷问+e), 【使】杀，欺负，伤害。【过】vadhesi。【现分】vadhenta。【独】vadhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vadh + e), 杀，欺负，伤害。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 vadhenta。【独】vadhitvā。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vadhita: {'def': '[pp. of vadheti] smitten Th.1, 783=M.II,73 (not with Kern, Toev. s. v.=vyathita). (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vadheti 的【过分】)已杀，已欺负，已伤害。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vadheti 的【过分】)。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vadhukā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vadhū] a daughter-in-law, a young wife A.II,78; DhA.III,260. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】少妻，媳妇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(fr. vadhū),【阴】媳妇(a daughter-in-law, a young wife)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】少妻，媳妇。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vadhū: {'def': '(Ved. Vadhū),【阴】媳妇(a daughter-in-law)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女人。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Ved. vadhū; to Lith. vedù to lead into one’s house] a daughter-in-law VvA.123. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadāna: {'def': 'see vadati. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadāniya: {'def': '[another form of vadaññu] see a°. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vadāpana: {'def': '【中】使人说。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vādāpeti, Caus. II. of vadati] making somebody speak or something sound DhsA.333 (we should better read vād°). (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】使人说。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vagga: {'def': '¹ [Vedic varga, fr. vṛj; cp. Lat. volgus & vulgus (=E. vulgar) crowd, people] 1. a company, section, group, party Vin.I,58 (du°, ti°), 195 (dasa° a chapter of 10 bhikkhus). -- 2. a section or chapter of a canonical book DhA.I,158 (eka-vagga-dvi-vagga-mattam pi); DhsA.27.

--uposatha celebration (of the uposatha) in groups, “incomplete congregation” (trslⁿ Oldenberg) Dpvs 7, 36. More likely to vagga²! --gata following a (sectarian) party (Bdhgh identifies this with the 62 diṭṭhigatikā SnA 365) S.I,187; Sn.371. --bandha, in Instr. °ena group by group Mhvs 32, 11. --bandhana banded together, forming groups DhA.IV,93, 94. --vagga in crowds, confused, heaped up J.VI,224; PvA.54. --vādaka taking somebody’s part Vin.III,175. --sārin conforming to a (heretic) party Sn.371, 800, 912; Nd¹ 108, 329. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】群，一伙人，（书的）一章。【形】分裂的，争吵的。 ~bandhana,【中】一个团体的形成，（一）伙，协会。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】群，一夥人，(书的)一章。【形】分裂的，争吵的。vaggabandhana,【中】一个团体的形成，(一)夥，协会。vaggagata﹐外道宗派。vaggasārin追随宗派。chabbaggiyā(cha(ḷ)六+vagga群) bhikkhū, 六群比丘(巴利律藏及《本生》等载︰Assaji（阿说迦）、Punabbasu（满宿、弗那跋）、Paṇḍuka、Lohitaka、Mettiya(慈)、Bhummaja(地)。智度论云︰(一、二)难陀(、跋难陀)，三瞿伽梨，四阐陀，五马师，六满宿。))。sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū, 十七群比丘。Vin.Pāci.IV,114︰Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū sattarasavaggiye bhikkhū bhiṁsāpenti. Te bhiṁsāpiyamānā rodanti. (那时，六群比丘吓唬十七群比丘，他们受到惊吓而哭泣。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.-nt.) [vi+agga, Sk. vyagra; opposed to samagga] dissociated, separated; incomplete; at difference, dissentious Vin.I,111 sq., 129, 160; IV,53 (saṅgha); A.I,70 (parisā); II,240. -- Instr. vaggena separately, secessionally, sectariously Vin.I,161; IV,37, 126.

--ārāma fond of dissociation or causing separation M.I,286; It.11 (+adhamma-ṭṭha; trslⁿ Seidenstücker not quite to the point: rejoicing in parties, i. e. vagga¹) =Vin.II,205. --kamma (ecclesiastical) act of an incomplete chapter of bhikkhus Vin.I,315 sq. (opp. sam‹-› agga-kamma). --rata=°ārāma. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaggana: {'def': 'see vaggati (ref. of Vv 64⁹). (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaggati: {'def': '[valg, to which belong Oicel. valka to roll; Ags. wealkan=E. walk] to jump Vv 64⁹ (expl^d at VvA.278 as “kadāci pade padaṁ” [better: padāpadaṁ?] nikkhipantā vagganena gamane [read: vagga-gamanena] gacchanti); J.II,335, 404; IV,81, 343; V,473. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaggatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. vagga²] distraction, dissension, secession, sectarianism Vin.I,316 (opp. samaggatta). (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaggiya: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中)一个团体的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 属于一个团体的。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(--°) (adj.) [fr. vagga¹] belonging to a group, forming a company, a party of (--°), e. g. pañcavaggiyā therā J.I,57, 82; bhikkhū M.I,70; II,94; chabbaggiyā bhikkhū (the group of 6 bh.) Vin.I,111 sq., 316 sq. & passim; sattarasa-vaggiyā bhikkhū (group of 17) Vin.IV,112. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaggu: {'def': '【形】可爱的，愉快的。vagguvada,【形】有悦耳语言的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可爱的，愉快的。 ~vada, 【形】有悦耳语言的。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic valgu, fr. valg; freq. in combⁿ with vadati “to speak lovely words”] lovely, beautiful, pleasant, usually of sound (sara) D.II,20 (°ssara); S.I,180, 190; Sn.350, 668; Vv 5³, 36¹, 364 (°rūpa), 50¹⁸ (girā), 63⁶, 64¹⁰ (ghoso suvaggu), 64²⁰, 67², 84¹⁷; Pv.I,11³; II,12¹; III,3⁴; J.II,439; III,21; V,215; Sdhp.245. The foll. synonyms are frequently given in VvA.& PvA.as expl^ns of vaggu: abhirūpa, cāru, madhura, rucira, savanīya, siniddha, sundara, sobhaṇa.

--vada of lovely speech or enunciation Sn.955 (=madhura-vada, pemaniya-vada, hadayaṅgama°, karavīkaruda-mañju-ssara Nd¹ 446). (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vagguli: {'def': '& Vaggulī (m. & f.) [cp. Sk. valgulī, of valg to flutter] a bat Vin.II,148; Miln.364, 404; Vism.663 (in simile); DhA.III,223.

--rukkha a tree on which bats live Vism.74. --vata “bat-practice,” a certain practice of ascetics J.I,493; III,235; IV,299. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】蝙蝠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】蝙蝠。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaha: {'def': 'vaha-, -vaha, (fr. vah带) 1.带，带来(bringing, carrying, leading(vāri° river=mahānadī); S I.103; PvA 13 (anattha°). Doubtful in hetu-vahe, better with v. l. °vaco, expld by sakāraṇa-vacana)。Acc. vahaṁ。2.流(a current (Gangā°); V.388 (mahā°)。Cp. vāha.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(-°) [fr. vah] 1. bringing, carrying, leading Pv.I,5⁸ (vāri° river=mahānadī PvA.29); S.I,103; PvA.13 (anattha°). Doubtful in hetu-vahe Pv.II,8⁵, better with v. l. °vaco, expl^d by sakāraṇa-vacana PvA.109. -- 2. a current J.IV,260 (Gaṅgā°); V,388 (mahā°). -- Cp. vāha. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vahana: {'def': '【中】运载，负担，流动。 ~ka, 【形】负担的，引起的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】运载，负担，流动。vahanaka,【形】负担的，引起的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. vah] 1. carrying VvA.316; DhA.III,472 (dhura°). -- 2. a current J.IV,260. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vahanaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [vahana+ka] carrying, bearing J.II,97 (dhura°). (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vahati: {'def': '(vah + a), 负担，携带，做自己的工作，流动。【过】 vahi。【过分】vahita。【现分】 vahanta。【独】 vahitvā。【潜】 vahitabba。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vah带+a), 1.负担，携带(to carry, bear, transport)。2.著手，做自己的工作(to proceed, to do one’s work)。3.工作(to work, to be able, to have power)。【过】vahi。【过分】vahita。【现分】vahanta﹐vuyhamāna, vāhiyamāna(in med. pass. sense)。【独】vahitvā。【义】vahitabba。imper. vaha; inf. vahituṁ; pass. vuyhati (Sk. uhyate) to be carried (along); pass. also vahīyati (=nīyati); ppr. vahīyamāna. pp. ūḷha (see soḍha), vuḷha & vūḷha (būḷha). -- Caus. vāheti to cause to go, to carry, to drive away。pp. vahita (for vāh°). Cp. ubbahati2.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vah, Idg. *ǔeĝh to drive, lead, cp. Sk. vahitra= Lat. vehiculum=E. vehicle; Gr. o]/xos waggon, Av. vaƶaiti to lead, Lat. veho to drive etc.; Goth. ga-wigan =Ohg. wegan=Ger. bewegen; Goth. wēgs=Ger. weg, E. way; Ohg. wagan=E. waggon, etc. -- Dhtp 333 & Dhtm 498: vaha pāpuṇane] 1. to carry, bear, transport J.IV,260; PvA.14 (=dhāreti); Miln.415 (of iron: carry weight). -- imper. vaha Vv 81¹⁷; inf. vahituṁ PvA.122 (perhaps superfluous); grd. vahitabba Mhvs 23, 93. ‹-› 2. to proceed, to do one’s work M.I,444; Mhvs 34, 4 guḷayantaṁ vahitvāna, old var. reading for P.T.S. ed. T. reading guḷayantamhi katvāna. -- 3. to work, to be able, to have power A.I,282. -- Pass. vuyhati (Sk. uhyate) to be carried (along) Vin.I,106; Th.1, 88; ppr. vuyhamāna S.IV,179; Th.1, 88; J.IV,260; PvA.153; pass. also vahīyati PvA.56 (=nīyati); ppr. vahīyamāna Miln.397. -- pp. ūḷha (see soḍha), vuḷha & vūḷha (būḷha). -- Caus. vāheti to cause to go, to carry, to drive away Vin.II,237; Sn.282; J.VI,443. -- ppr. vāhiyamāna (in med. pass. sense) J.VI,125. -- pp. vahita (for vāh°) Miln.346. Cp. ubbahati². (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vahitu: {'def': '【阳】持有人。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】持有人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaja: {'def': '(Vedic vraja: see vajati),【阳】牛棚，牛栏(a cattle-fold, cow-pen)。Giribbaja, 放牧之地(a (cattle or sheep) run on the mountain J.III,479; as Npl. at Sn.408.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】牛棚，牛栏。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic vraja: see vajati] a cattle-fold, cow-pen A.III,393; J.II,300; III,270, 379; Vism.166, 279; DhA.I,126, 396. -- giribbaja a (cattle or sheep) run on the mountain J.III,479; as Npl. at Sn.408. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajalla: {'def': 'see rajo-vajalla. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajati: {'def': '[Vedic vraj, cp. Ved. vraja (=P. vaja) & vṛjana enclosure=Av. v∂r∂ƶ &schwamacr;na-, with which cp. Gr. ei)ρgnumi to enclose, ei(rgmόs, Lat. vergo to turn; Gaelic fraigh hurdle; Ags. wringan=E. wring=Ger. ringen, E. wrinkle =Ger. renken, and many others, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. vergo. -- The Dhtp (59) defines vaj (together with aj) by “gamana”] to go, proceed, get to (Acc.), lit. to turn to (cp. vṛj, vṛṇakti, pp. vṛkta, which latter coincides with vṛtta of vṛt in P. vatta: see vatta¹ & cp. vajjeti to avoid, vajjita, vajjana etc.) Sn.121, 381, 729 (jātimaraṇa-saṁsāraṁ), 1143; J.III,401; IV,103 (nirayaṁ); Pv IV.1⁷² (Pot. vajeyya); Nd² 423 (=gacchati kamati); Mhvs 11, 35 (imper. vaja as v. l.; T. reads bhaja). See cpds. anubbajati, upabb°, pabb°, paribb°. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vaj+a), 去，著手进行。【过】vaji。【现分】vajamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vaj + a), 去，着手进行。【过】 vaji。【现分】 vajamāna。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vajira: {'def': '【中】钻石(台语：镟石suan7 cioh8)，雷电。vajirapāṇi, vajirahattha,【阳】手持钻石权杖的，即：帝释 (Sakka)。vajira-pāṇī yakkho﹐密迹力士，又作密迹金刚，秘密主，为夜叉神之总名。彼常手持金刚杵以保护佛陀。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】钻石，雷电。 ~pāṇi, ~hattha, 【阳】手持钻石权杖的，即：帝释 (Sakka)。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. vajra=vajira¹] a diamond A.I,124 (°ûpamacitta)=Pug.30; Dh.161; J.IV,234; Miln.118, 267, 278; Mhvs 30, 95; KhA 110 (°saṅkhāta-kāya); DhA.I,387 (°panti row of diamonds), 392 sq. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Vedic vajira, Indra’s thunderbolt; Idg. *ǔeĝ=Sk. vaj, cp. Lat. vegeo to thrive, vigeo›vigour; Av. vaƶra; Oicel. vakr=Ags. wacor=Ger. wacker; also E. wake etc. See also vājeti] a thunderbolt; usually with ref. to Sakka’s (=Indra’s) weapon D.I,95=M.I,231 (ayasa); Th.1, 419; J.I,134 (vajira-pūritā viya garukā kucchi “as if filled with Sakka’s thunderbolt.” Dutoit takes it in meaning vajira² and trsl^s “with diamonds”); SnA 225 (°āvudha the weapon of Sakka).

--pāṇin having a thunderbolt in his hand (N. of a yakkha) D.I,95=M. I.231. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajja: {'def': '【中】过失，乐器。【形】应该被避免的，应该被告诉的。 ~nīya, 【形】适合被避免的，适合被避开的。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'vajjā, vajjuṁ﹐pot. of vad, see vadati(说，讲)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.-nt.) [cp. Sk. vādya, grd. of vad] 1. “to be said,” i. e. speaking D.I,53 (sacca°=sacca-vacana DA.I,160). See also mosa-vajja. -- 2. “to be sounded,” i. e. musical instrument J.I,500 (°bheri). (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(grd. of vajjati, cp. Sk. varjya),【中】罪，过失(a fault, sin)。【形】应该被避免的(that which should be avoided)，应该被告诉的。peyya-vajja, 爱言，随顺众生根性，善言慰谕，令受道住真理。vajjadassin, 看见过失(finding fault)。anavajja & sāvajja, the relation of which to vajja is doubtful, see avajja.。Pakativajjato, 自性罪。《分别论》(Vbh.247.)︰“Aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī”ti tattha katame aṇumattā vajjā? Yāni tāni vajjāni appamattakāni oramattakāni lahusāni lahusammatāni saṁyamakaraṇīyāni saṁvarakaraṇīyāni cittuppādakaraṇīyāni manasikārapaṭibaddhāni--ime vuccanti “aṇumattā vajjā”. Iti imesu aṇumattesu vajjesu vajjadassāvī ca hoti bhayadassāvī ca ādīnavadassāvī ca nissaraṇadassāvī ca. Tena vuccati “aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī”ti. (「於小量罪生怖畏」在此，什么是罪呢？於小量罪生怖畏，是小量、些许、轻、轻量，可作制止、可作防护、可运作心生起、可被作意所伏，这些是说小量之罪。如此於小量之罪，或见罪，或见畏，或见过失，或见离脱，依是说於小量之罪而见畏，於此说「於小量罪生怖畏」。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'vajjā, vajjuṁ: Pot. of vad, see vadati. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [grd. of vajjati, cp. Sk. varjya] that which should be avoided, a fault, sin D.II,38; S.I,221; Vin.II,87 (thūla° a grave sin); A.I,47, 98; IV,140; Ps.I,122; Dh.252; VbhA.342 (syn. with dosa and garahitabba); KhA 23 (paṇṇatti° & pakati°), 24 (id.), 190 (loka°); DA.I,181 (=akusala-dhamma). Freq. in phrase: aṇumattesu vajjesu bhaya-dassāvin “seeing a source of fear even in the slightest sins” D.I,63; S.V,187 and passim. --°dassin finding fault Dh.76 (expl^d in detail at DhA.II,107). --anavajja & sāvajja, the relation of which to vajja is doubtful, see avajja. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (cp. Sk. vādya, grd. of vad) 【中】【形】1.应被说(to be said)。saccavajja(=sacca-vacana)﹐真理的语言。See also mosa-vajja. 2.应被发声(to be sounded, i. e. musical instrument (vajjabheri))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vajjana: {'def': '【中】避免，躲开。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vajjati] avoidance, shunning Vism.5 (opp. sevana); DhA.III,417. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】避免，躲开。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vajjanīya: {'def': '(‹vajjati1),【形】适合被避免的，适合被避开的。 (to be avoided, to be shunned; improper)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vajjati¹] to be avoided, to be shunned; improper Miln.166 (i. e. bad or uneven parts of the wood), 224. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajjati: {'def': '² Pass of vad, see vadati. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(Pass of vad), 已说(see vadati)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [vṛj, Vedic vṛṇakti & varjati to turn; in etym. related to vajati. Dhtp 547: “vajjane”] to turn etc.; only as Pass. form vajjati [in form=Ved. vṛjyate] to be avoided, to be excluded from (Abl.) Miln.227; KhA 160 (°itabba, in pop. etym. of Vajjī). -- Caus. vajjeti (*varjayati) to avoid, to abstain from, renounce Sdhp.10, 11, 200. Cp. pari°, vi°. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajjavant: {'def': '(adj.) [vajja¹+vant] sinful S.III,194. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajjeti: {'def': '(vajj避免+e), 避免。【过】vajjesi。【义】vajjetabba。【独】vajjetvā。【不】vajjetuṁ。pāpamittā vajjetabbā﹐避恶友。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vaj + e), 避免，戒除，弃绝。【过】 ~esi。【潜】vajjetabba。【独】 vajjetvā。【不】 vajjetuŋ。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vajjha: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of vadhati] to be killed, slaughtered or executed; object of execution; meriting death Vin.IV,226; Sn.580 (go vajjho viya); J.II,402 (cora); VI,483 (=vajjhappatta cora C.); Vism.314; KhA 27. --avajjha not to be slain, scathless Sn.288 (brāhmaṇa); Miln.221=J.V,49; Miln.257 (°kavaca invulnerable armour).

--ghāta a slaughterer, executioner Th.2, 242 (cp. ThA.204). --cora a robber (i. e. criminal) waiting to be executed PvA.153. --paṭaha-bheri the execution drum PvA.4. --bhāvapatta condemned to death J.I,439. --sūkariyo (pl.) sows which had no young, barren sows (read vañjha°!) J.II,406. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(grd.of vadhati),【形】被杀的，被处罚的(to be killed, slaughtered or executed; object of execution; meriting death)。vajjhappatta,【形】被宣告有罪的。vajjhaghāta﹐刽子手。vajjhapaṭaha-bheri,【阴】死刑鼓。vajjha,【反】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】适合被杀的，适合被处罚的。 ~ppatta, 【形】被宣告有罪的。 ~bheri, 【阴】死刑鼓。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vajjhaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°)=vajjha DhsA.239. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajjheti: {'def': '[denom. fr. vajjha] to destroy, kill J.VI,527 (siro vajjhayitvāna). Kern, Toev. s. v. vaddh° proposes reading vaddhayitvāna (of a root vardh to cut), cutting off is perhaps better. The expression is hapax legomenon. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajjhā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. vadhyā] execution; only in cpd. (as vajjha°) °ppatta condemned to death, about to be executed Vin.IV,226; J.II,119, 264; VI,483. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vajjita: {'def': '(vajjeti 的【过分】)。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐[vajjeti避免] 的【过分】已避免。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vajjiya: {'def': '【独】避免了，避开了。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vajjī: {'def': '【阳】跋耆 (Vajji) 氏族的男人。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '（古国名）瓦基，（古音译：）跋耆，跋闍，跋祇', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阳】跋耆 (Vajji) 氏族的男人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vajuḷa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. vañjula. Given as vañjula at Abhp 553] N. of several plants, a tree (the ratan: Halāyudha 2, 46) J.V,420. See also vaṅgati. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaka: {'def': '¹ [Vedic vṛka, Idg. *ǔḷqǔo=Lat. lupus, Gr. lu/kos, Lith. vilkas, Goth. wulfs=E. wolf etc.] wolf, only in poetry Sn.201; J.I,336; II,450; V,241, 302. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】狼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】狼。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (indecl.): a root vak is given at Dhtp 7 & Dhtm 8 in meaning “ādāne,” i. e. grasping, together with a root kuk as synonym. It may refer to vaka¹ wolf, whereas kuk would explain koka wolf. The notion of voraciousness is prevalent in the characterization of the wolf (see all passages of vaka¹, e. g. J.V,302). (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vakka: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Vedic vakra; the usual P. form is vaṅka] crooked J.I,216. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】肾。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [Vedic vṛkka] the kidney Sn.195; Kh III,; Miln.26; DhsA.140. In detail described as one of the 32 ākāras at Vism.255, 356; VbhA.60, 239, 356.

--pañcaka the series of five (constituents of the body) beginning with the kidney. These are vakka, hadaya, yakana, kilomaka, pihaka: VbhA.249. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】肾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vakkala: {'def': '【中】树皮衣，树皮。vakkalī,【形】穿树皮衣的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】树皮衣，树皮。 ~lī, 【形】穿树皮衣的。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. BSk. valkala (e. g. Jtm 210): see vāka] 1. the bark of a tree J.II,13 (°antara); III,522. -- 2. a bark garment (worn by ascetics): see vakkali. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vakkalaka: {'def': '(“bark-like,” or “tuft”?) is at KhA 50 as the Vism.reading, where KhA reads daṇḍa. The P.T.S. ed. of Vism.(p. 255) reads wrongly cakkalaka. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vakkali: {'def': '[in compⁿ for in] wearing a garment of bark, an ascetic, lit. “barker” J.II,274 (°sadda the sound of the bark-garment-wearer). See also Np. Vakkali. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vakkalika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vakkala] in danta° peeling bark with one’s teeth, designation of a cert. kind of ascetics DA.I,271. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vakkaṅga: {'def': '[vakkaṁ+ga] a term for bird, poetically for sakuṇa J.I,216 (tesaṁ ubhosu passesu pakkhā vaṅkā jātā ti vakkaṅgā C.). (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vakkhati: {'def': '(vadati‘说’的【未】), 他将会说。vakkhāmi, 我将会说。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'is fut. of vac: he will say, e. g. at Vin.II,190; IV,238. See vatti. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vadati 的【未】), 他将会说。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vakula: {'def': '【阳】小叶枪弹木（菲律宾和太平洋西南地区的一种巨大的乔木 (Mimusops parvifolia)，其果实可食，木材非常致密，纹理细腻，颜色红色或粉红色）。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. *Sk. vakula] a tree (Mimusops elengi) J.V,420. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】牛油果 (Mimusops elengi)，山榄科，常绿乔木，木材非常致密，纹理细腻，顔色红色或粉红色，果实可食用，景观路树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Valaya: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [Epic Sk. valaya, fr. Idg. *ǔel to turn; see Sk. roots vṛ to enclose, and val to turn, to which belong the foll.: varutra upper robe, ūrmi wave, fold, valita bent, vālayati to make roll, valli creeper, vaṭa rope, vāṇa cane. Cp. also Lat. volvo to roll, Gr. e]lu/w to wind, e]λic round, e]λutron cover; Goth. walwjan to roll on, Ohg. welzan & walzan=Ags. wealtan (E. waltz); Ags. wylm wave, and many others, q. v. in Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. volvo. -- The Dhtp (274) gives root val in meaning saṁvaraṇa, i. e. obstruct, cover. See further vuṇāti] a bracelet Vin.II,106; J.II,197 (dantakāre valay’--ādīni karonte disvā); III,377; VI,64, 65; DA.I,50; DhA.I,226 (danta° ivory bangle); PvA.157 (saṅkha°); Mhvs 11, 14 (°aṅguli-veṭhakā). (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】脚镯，手镯，环。 ~ākāra, 【形】圆形的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】脚镯(bangle)，手镯(bracelet)，环(loop)。valayākāra,【形】圆形的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Valañja: {'def': '(-°) [see valañjeti] 1. track, line, trace, in pada° track, footprint J.I,8; II,153 (v. l. lañca & lañcha); IV,221 (valañcha T.), 383; DhA.II,38. -- 2. that which is spent or secreted, i. e. outflow, fæces, excrement, in sarīra° fæces J.I,70, 80, 421 (°ṁ muñcati to ease oneself); III,486; DhA.II,55. -- 2. design, use; only neg. avalañja useless, superfluous Vin.IV,266; VvA.46 (°ṁ akaṁsu rendered useless); DhA.IV,116. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】(在【合】中) 1.车辙(track)，线条(line)，痕迹(trace, in padavalañja track, footprint)。2.被隐秘的(that which is spent or secreted)。3.valañjana,【中】凭藉，使用，当作，用减轻身体。valañjanaka,【形】适合被用或花费的。valañjaṁ muñcati, 释放自己(to ease oneself)。【反】avalañja, 无用的(useless, superfluous)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 (在【合】中) 车辙，痕迹，使用，被隐秘的。 ~na, 【中】凭借，使用，当作，用减轻身体。 ~naka, 【形】适合被用或花费的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Valañjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. valañjeti] 1. resorting, acting as, behaviour VvA.248. -- 2. giving off, evacuation, easing the body J.I,161 (°vacca-kuṭi privy); DhA.III,270 (sarīra°). (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valañjanaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. valañjana] being marked off, being traced, belonging to, behaving, living (anto° in the inner precincts, bahi° outside the bounds) J.I,382, 385, 398. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valañjeti: {'def': '(valaj +e), 追踪，沿路走，使用，花费，求助。【过】valañjesi。【过分】valañjjita。【现分】valañjenta。【独】valañjetvā。【义】valañjetabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[customarily expl^d as ava+lañj (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 66¹), the root lañj being given as a Sk. root in meaning “to fry,” “to be strong,” and a variety of others (see Mon. Williams s. v. lañj). But the root & its derivations are only found in lexicographical and grammatical works, therefore it is doubtful whether it is genuine. lañja is given as “pada,” i. e. track, place, foot, and also “tail.” We are inclined to see in lañj a by-form of lañch, which is a variant of lakṣ “to mark” etc. (cp. lañcha, lañchaka, °ana, °ita). Thus the meaning would range from originally “trace,” mark off, enclose, to: “being enclosed,” assigned or belonging to, i. e. moving (in), frequenting etc., as given in C. expl^ns. There seems to be a Singhalese word at the root of it, as it is certainly dialectical. -- The Dhtm (522) laconically defines valañj as “valañjane”] 1. to trace, track, travel (a road); practise, achieve, resort to Miln.359; VvA.58. -- 2. to use, use up, spend J.I,102; III,342; VI,369, 382, 521. -- ppr. Pass. (a-)valañjiyamāna (not any longer) in use J.I,111. -- pp. valañjita. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(valaj + e), 追踪，沿路走，使用，花费，求助。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】 ~jenta。【独】 ~jetvā。【潜】 ~jetabba。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Valañjita: {'def': '[pp. of valañjeti; cp. BSk. valañjita used, MVastu III,276] traced, tracked, practised, travelled J.III,542 (magga). (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valañjiyamāna: {'def': '【形】使用过的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】使用过的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Valeti: {'def': '[cp. Sk. vāleti, Caus. of val to turn: see valaya] 1. to twist, turn, in gīvaṁ to wring (a fowl’s neck) J.I,436; III,178 (gīvaṁ valitvā: read °etvā). -- 2. to twist or wind round, to put (a garment) on, to dress J.I,452 (sāṭake valetuṁ; v. l. valañcetuṁ). -- pp. valita. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vali: {'def': '【阴】折层，皱纹。 ~ka, 【形】有折层的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】折层，皱纹。valika,【形】有折层的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Valī (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. vali; fr val. Spelling occasionally with ḷ] a line, fold, wrinkle, a streak, row; Vin.II,112 (read valiyo for valiṁ?); Th.2, 256; J.IV,109; Shhp 104. -- muttā-vali a string of pearls VvA.169. For vaṭṭanā-valī see vaṭṭanā. See also āvali. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vali] having folds J.I,499. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vali] having wrinkles M.I,88 (Acc. palitakesiṁ vilūnaṁ khalita-siraṁ valinaṁ)=III,180 (palitakesaṁ vilūnaṁ khalitaṁ-siraṁ valīnaṁ etc.) See valita for this passage. -- In compⁿ vali-mukha “wrinkled face,” i. e. monkey J.II,298. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valira: {'def': '【形】斜眼的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】斜眼的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Valita: {'def': '【过分】已起皱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已起皱。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of val: see valeti] wrinkled A.I,138 (Acc. khaṇḍadantaṁ palita-kesaṁ vilūnaṁ khalitaṁ siro-valitaṁ tilak’āhata-gattaṁ: cp. valin with passage M.I,88= III,180, one of the two evidehtly misread); PvA.56, 153. In compⁿ with taca contracted to valittaca (for valitattaca) “with wrinkled skin” DhA.II,190 (phalitakesa+); with abstr. valittacatā the fact of having a wrinkled skin M.I,49 (pālicca+; cp. MA 215); A.II,196 (khaṇḍicca pālicca+). (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valittaca: {'def': '【形】皮皱，皮肤皱巴巴的。valittacata, 皮皱状。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】皮肤皱巴巴的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Valiya: {'def': 'at M.I,446 is not clear. It is comb^d with vaṇṇiya (q. v.). See also note on p. 567; v. l. pāṇiya; C. silent. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vallabha: {'def': '【形】喜欢的事物。vallabhatta,【中】中意的情况。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vallabha & BSk. vallabhaka a sea monster Divy 231] a favourite J.IV,404; VI,38, 371; rāja° a king’s favourite, an overseer J.I,342; Mhvs 37, 10; VbhA.501. -- f. vallabhā (a) beloved (woman), a favourite J.III,40; VvA.92, 135, 181. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】喜欢的事物。 ~tta, 【中】中意的情况。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vallabhatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. vallabha] being a favourite Dāvs.V,7. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vallakī: {'def': '【阴】印度琵琶。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】印度琵琶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) cp. Epic Sk. vallakī, BSk. vallikī Divy 108; MVastu I.227] the Indian lute Abhp 138. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vallarī: {'def': '【阴】串，群。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Class. Sk. vallarī, Halāyudha II.30] a branching footstalk, a compound pedicle Abhp 550. The word is found in BSk. in meaning of “musical instrument” at Divy 315 and passim. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】串，群。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Valli: {'def': '【阴】蔓草。 ~hāraka, 【阳】收集蔓草者。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】蔓草。vallihāraka,【阳】收集蔓草者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vallibha: {'def': '【阳】南瓜（见 Tipusa）。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. late Sk. valibha wrinkled] the plant kumbhaṇḍa i. e. a kind of gourd Abhp 597 (no other ref.?). (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】南瓜(pumpkin﹐见 Tipusa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vallikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. vālikā?] 1. an ornament for the ear Vin.II,106 (cp. Bdhgh’s explⁿ on p. 316). -- 2. a jungle rope Vin.II,122. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vallura: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Class. Sk. vallūra] dried flesh S.II,98; J.II,245. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vallī: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. vallī; for etym. see valaya] 1. a climbing plant, a creeper Vin.III,144; J.V,37; VI,536; VvA.147, 335 (here as a root?). -- santānaka° a long, spreading creeper VvA.94, 162. -- 2. a reed or rush used as a string or rope for binding or tying (esp. in building), bast (?) M.I,190 (Neumann, “Binse”); J.III,52 (satta rohita macche uddharitvā valliyā āvuṇitvā netvā etc.), 333 (in similar connection); DhA.III,118. -- 3. in kaṇṇa° the lobe of the ear Mhvs 25, 94. -- The compⁿ form of vallī is valli°.

--koṭī the tips of a creeper J.VI,548. --pakka the fruit of a creeper Vv 33³⁰. --phala=°pakka J.IV,445. --santāna spreadings or shoots of a creeper KhA 48. --hāraka carrying a (garland of) creeper Vism.523=VbhA.131 (in comparison illustrating the paṭicca-samuppāda). (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vallūra: {'def': '【中】肉乾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】肉干。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Valāhaka: {'def': '【阳】雨云(rain cloud)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[valāha+ka; of dial. origin; cp. Epic Sk. balāhaka] 1. a cloud, dark cloud, thundercloud S.I,212= Th.2, 55; A.II,102; V,22; Th.1, 760; Pug.42, 43; Vv 68¹; J.III,245; 270 (ghana°); Vism.285 (°paṭala); Miln.274; DhsA.317; VvA.12 (=abbhā). -- 2. N. of mythical horses S.III,145.

--kāyikā (devā) groups of cloud gods (viz. sīta°, uṇha°, abbha°, vāta°, vassa°) S.III,254. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】雨云。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Valāhassa: {'def': '[valāha+assa] cloud-horse J.II,129 (the Valāhassajātaka, pp. 127 sq.); cp. BSk. Bālāh’āśva (-rājā) Divy 120 sq. (see Index Divy). (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valīkaṁ: {'def': '[cp. Sk. vyalīkaṁ] read for valikaṁ at Th.2, 403, in meaning “wrong, fault”; ThA.266 expl^d as “vyālikaṁ dosaṁ.” So Kern, Toev. s. v. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Valīmukha: {'def': '【阳】猴子，多皱纹的脸。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】猴子，多皱纹的脸。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vamana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vam] an emetic D.I,12; A.V,219; cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 452. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vamanīya: {'def': '[grd. of vamati; cp. Sk. vāmanīya; ā often interchanges with a before 1 & m, like Caus. vameti & vāmeti] one who has to take an emetic Miln.169. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vamathu: {'def': '【阳】 vamana, 【中】呕吐，排出的食物。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】vamana,【中】呕吐，排出的食物，呕吐药。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vam] vomiting; discharged food PvA.173 (°bhatta; +ucchiṭṭha°). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vamati: {'def': '[vam, Idg. *ǔemo, cp. Lat. vomo, vomitus=vamathu; Gr. e)mέw (E. emetic); Oicel. vaema seasickness. -- The defⁿ at Dhtp 221 & Dhtm 315 is “uggiraṇa”] to vomit, eject, throw out, discharge Sn.198=J.I,146; J.V,255 (fut. vamissati); Pv IV.3⁵⁴ (=uḍḍayati chaḍḍayati PvA.256).-Caus. vameti Miln.169. -- pp. vanta. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vam + a), 吐出，喷出，放出。【过】 vami。【过分】 vanta, vamita。【独】 vamitvā。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vam吐出+a), 吐出，喷出，放出。【过】vami。【过分】vanta, vamita。【独】vamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vambhana: {'def': '【中】vambhanā,【阴】藐视，轻视。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 vambhanā, 【阴】藐视，轻视。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vambhanā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. vambheti] contempt, despite Vin.IV,6; M.I,402 (att’ukkaṁsana: para-vambhana), Nd² 505; Vism.29; VbhA.484; Pgdp 100. -- Spelt vamhanā at J.I,454 (vamhana-vacana) & at DhsA.396 (khuṁsana°). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vambhanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of vambheti] to be despised, wretched, miserable PvA.175, 176. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vambhayita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of vambheti] being despised or reviled M.I,172; Sn.905; Nd¹ 319 (=nindita, garahita, upavādita). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vambheti: {'def': '(& Vamheti) [Caus. of vambh, a root of uncertain origin (connected with vam?). There is a form vambha given by Sk. lexicographers as a dial. word for vaṁśa. Could it be a contraction fr. vyambheti=vi+denom. fr. ambho 2, part. of contempt? -- The Dhtp (602) defines vambh as “garahāyaṁ”] to treat with contempt, despise, revile, scold; usually either comb^d with khuṁseti or opposed to ukkaṁseti, e. g. Vin.II,18; IV,4; M.I,200 (=Sn.132 avajānāti), 402 sq.; D.I,90; A.II,27 sq.; Th.1, 621; DA.I,256 (=hīḷeti); DhA.IV,38; VvA.348. -- pp. vambhayita. -- vamheti is found at J.I,191, 356; cp. vamhana. -- Note. The spelling bh interchanges with that of h (vamheti), as ambho shows var. amho. Trenckner (introd. to M 1. p. 1) gives vambheti (as BB reading) the preference over vamheti (as SS reading). Morris’note on vambheti in J.P.T.S. 1884, 96 does not throw any light on its etymology. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vambh + e), 轻视，不尊敬。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~bhita。【现分】 ~bhenta。【独】 ~bhetvā。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vambh+e), 轻视，不尊敬。【过】vambhesi。【过分】vambhita。【现分】vambhenta。【独】vambhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vambhin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vambh] despising, treating with contempt, disparaging M.I,95 (para°, opp. to att’ukkaṁ- saka). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vambhī: {'def': '【阳】以轻视对待的人。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】以轻视对待的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vamha: {'def': '[for vambha: see vambheti] bragging, boasting, despising J.I,319 (°vacana). (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vamma: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic varman, fr. vṛ to cover, enclose] armour J.II,22. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】甲胄。 ~mī, 【阳】穿用的甲胄。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】甲胄。vammī,【阳】穿用的甲胄。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vammeti: {'def': '(vam + e), 穿上甲胄。【过】 ~esi。【独】 vammetvā。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vam+e), 穿上甲胄。【过】vammesi。【独】vammetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. vamma] to dress in armour, to armour J.I,180; II,94 (maṅgala-hatthiṁ). -- pp. vammita. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vammika: {'def': '【阳】蚁丘、蚁塚、蚁垤(ㄉㄧㄝˊ)、音译︰拔弥、婆蜜(ant-hill，蚁丘是突出於地表的蚂蚁都市，里面住满了蚂蚁与其幼期个体。蚁丘最常见於气温与湿度皆极端的栖息地，而建造蚁丘的蚂蚁种类，往往也是最擅长进行气候调节的蚂蚁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vamma]=vammin Vin.I,342. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蚁冢。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vammin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vamma; Vedic varmin] wearing armour, armoured J.IV,353 (=keṭaka-phalaka-hattha C.); V,259, 373; VI,25; Miln.331. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vammita: {'def': '[pp. of vammeti, cp. Sk. varmita] armoured, clad in armour J.I,179 (assa); II,315 (hatthi); III,8; V,301, 322; DA.I,40. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vammeti的【过分】) 穿上甲胄。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vammīka: {'def': '& vammika (m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic valmīka; Idg. *ǔorm(āi); cp. Av. maoiris, Sk. vamraḥ, Gr. muρmhz, Lat. formica, Cymr. mor; all of same origin & meaning] ant-hill: (a) °ika: M.I,142 sq.; J.III,85; IV,30 (°bila the ant’s hole); V,163. -- (b) °ika: J.I,432; IV,30; Vism.183 (described), 304 (°muddani), 446; DhA.II,51; III,208; IV,154. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vana: {'def': '² (nt.) [van; vanati & vanoti to desire=Av. vanaiti Lat. venus, Ohg. wini friend (: E. winsome, attractive) wunsc=E. wish, giwon=E. wont; also “to win.” The spelling sometimes is vaṇ: see vaṇi. -- The defⁿ at Dhtp 523 is “yācane” (i. e. from begging), at Dhtm 736 “yācāyaṁ”] lust, desire. In exegetical literature mixed up with vana¹ (see definitions of vana¹). -- The word to the Pāli Buddhist forms a connection between vana and nibbāna, which is felt as a quâsi derivation fr. nibbana= nis+vana: see nibbana & cp. nibbāna II. B 1. -- S.I,180 (so ‘haṁ vane nibbanatho visallo); Sn.1131 (nibbana); Dh.334; Th.1, 691 (vanā nibbanaṁ āgataṁ). -- A denom. fr. vana² is vanāyati (like vanīyati fr. vaṇi). (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】树木，森林。 ~kammika, 【阳】林业工人。 ~gahana, 【中】丛林繁茂处。 ~gumba, 【阳】树丛。 ~cara, ~caraka, ~cārī, 【形】林务官，森林人。 ~devatā, 【阴】森林神。 ~ppati, ~spati, 【阳】大无花果树〔直译：林王〕（见 Pāṭalī）。 ~pattha, 【中】在森林中的偏僻地方。~vāsī, 【形】林居的。 ~saṇḍa, 【阳】丛林繁茂处。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Ved. vana. -- The P. (edifying) etymology clearly takes vana as belonging to van, and, dogmatically, equals it with vana² as an allegorical expression (“jungle”) to taṇhā (e. g. DhsA.364 on Dhs.1059; DhA.III,424 on Dh.283). -- The Dhtp (174) & Dhtm (254) define it “sambhattiyaṁ,” i. e. as meaning companionship] the forest; wood; as a place of pleasure & sport (“wood”), as well as of danger & frightfulness (“jungle”), also as resort of ascetics, noted for its loneliness (“forest”). Of (fanciful) def^ns of vana may be mentioned: SnA 24 (vanute vanotī ti vanaṁ); KhA 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṁ); DhsA.364 (taṁ taṁ ārammaṇaṁ vanati bhajati allīyatī ti vanaṁ, yācati vā ti vanaṁ [i. e. vana²]. vanatho ti vyañjanena padaṁ vaḍḍhitaṁ . . . balava-taṇhāy’etaṁ nāma); DhA.III,424 (mahantā rukkhā vanaṁ nāma, khuddakā tasmiṁ vane ṭhitattā vanathā nāma etc., with further distinguishing detail, concerning the allegorical meanings). -- D.II,256 (bhikkhūṇaṁ samitiṁ vanaṁ); A.I,35, 37; Dh.283 (also as vana²); Sn.272, 562 (sīho nadati vane), 1015 (id.), 684 (Isivhaya v.); Sn.p. 18 (Jetavana), p. 115 (Icchānaṅgala); Th.2, 147 (Añjanavana; a wood near Sāketa, with a vihāra); J.V,37 (here meaning beds of lotuses); Miln.219 (vanaṁ sodheti to clear a jungle); Dhs.1059 (“jungle”=taṇhā); Pv.II,6⁵ (arañña°-gocara); Vism.424 (Nandana° etc.); DhA.IV,53 (taṇhā° the jungle of lust). Characterized as amba° mango grove D.II,126 and passim; ambāṭaka° plum grove Vin.II,17; udumbara of figs DhA.I,284; tapo° forest of ascetics ThA.136; DhA.IV,53; nāga° elephant forest M.I,175; brahā wild forest A.I,152; III,44; Vv 63³; J.V,215; mahā° great forest Th.2, 373 (rahitaṁ & bhiṁsanakaṁ). -- vanataraṁ (with compar. suffix) thicker jungle, denser forest Miln.269 (vanato vanataraṁ pavisāma). -- On similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 133. Cp. vi°.

--anta the border of the forest, the forest itself Sn.708, 709; Pv.II,3¹⁰ (=vana C.). --kammika one who works in the woods J.IV,210 (°purisa); V,427, 429. --gahana jungle thicket Vism.647 (in simile). --gumba a dense cluster of trees Vv 81⁷ (cp. VvA.315). --caraka a forester SnA 51 (in simile). --cetya a shrine in the wood J.V,255. --timira forest darkness; in metaphor °matt-akkhin at J.IV,285=V.284, which Kern (Toev. s. v.) changes into °patt-akkhin, i. e. with eyes like the leaves of the forest darkness. Kern compares Sk. vanajapattr’ākṣī Mbh I.171, 43, and vanaja-locanā Avad. Kalp. 3, 137. The Cy. expl^ns are “vana-timira-puppha-samān’akkhī,” and “giri-kaṇṇika-samāna-nettā”; thus taking it as name of the plant Clitoria ternatea. --dahaka (& °dahana) burning the forest (aggi) KhA 21 (in simile). --devatā forest deva S.IV,302. --ppagumba a forest grove VbhA.196. --ppati (& vanaspati) [cp. Vedic vanaspati, Prk. vaṇapphai] “lord of the forest,” a forest tree; as vanappati only at Vin.III,47; otherwise vanaspati, e. g. S.IV,302 (osadhī+tiṇa+v.; opposed to herbs, as in R.V,); A.I,152; J.I,329; IV,233 (tiṇa-latā-vanaspatiyo); DhA.I,3. --pattha a forest jungle D.I,71; III,38, 49, 195; M.I,16, 104; Vin.II,146; A.I,60; III,138 (arañña°); Pug.59, 68; DA.I,210. --pantha a jungle road A.I,241. --bhaṅga gleanings of the wood, i. e. presents of wild fruit & flowers A.IV,197. --mūla a wild root D.I,166 (+phala); A.I,241 (id.); Miln.278. --rati delight in the forest DhA.II,100. --vaṇṇanā praise of the jungle DhA.II,100. --vāsin forest-dweller SnA 56 (Mahā-tissatthera). --saṇḍa jungle-thicket, dense jungle D.I,87, 117; S.III,109 (tibba v. avijjāya adhivacana); A.III,30; J.I,82, 170; DhA.I,313; II,100. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】树木，森林。vanakammika,【阳】林业工人。vanagahana,【中】丛林繁茂处。vanagumba,【阳】树丛。vanacara, vanacaraka, vanacārī,【形】林务官，森林人。vanadevatā,【阴】森林神。vanappati, vanaspati,【阳】大无花果树〔直译：林王〕(见 Pāṭalī)。vanapattha,【中】在森林中的偏僻地方。vanavāsin,【形】林居的。vanasaṇḍa,【阳】丛林繁茂处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vanabhaṅga: {'def': '﹐【阳】啼泣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vanaka: {'def': '(-) (adj.) [fr. vana¹] belonging to the forest, forestlike; adj. in cpd. ku° (kubbanaka, q. v.) brushwood Sn.1134. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vanatha: {'def': '【阳】渴望，欲望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vana+tha; same in BSk. e. g. MVastu I.204] underwood, brushwood, thicket. Does not occur in lit. meaning, except in exegesis of Dh.283 at DhA.III,424; q. v. under vana¹. Another defⁿ is given at SnA 24: “taṇhā pariyuṭṭhāna-vasena vanaṁ tanotī ti vanatho, taṇh’ānusayass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ.” -- The fig. meaning is “lust, desire,” see e. g. S.I,186; Th.1, 338; Dh.344; Sn.16 (°ja); Dhs.1059 (as epithet of taṇhā); J.II,205 (vanathaṁ na kayirā); Nett 81, 82. -- nibbanatha free from desire S.I,180; DhsA.364. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】渴望，欲望。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vanati: {'def': 'Vanute, Vanoti (van; 梵vanoti & vanute)渴望，希望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Vanute, Vanoti [van; Sk. vanoti & vanute. See also vana², vaṇi, vaṇeti] to desire, love, wish, aim at, ask for SnA 24 (vanute & vanoti); DhsA.364 (vanati, bhajati, allīyati). Caus. vanayati KhA 111. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vandaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vand] disposed to veneration; f. °ikā Th.2, 337. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】顶礼的人，尊敬的人。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】顶礼的人，尊敬的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vandana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】敬礼，敬意。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. vand, cp. Vedic vandana),【中】Vandanā,【阴】敬礼，敬意，顶礼(salutation, respect, paying homage; veneration, adoration)。音译：伴谈、和南。义林章四本曰：「若云伴谈，或云伴题，此云稽首，亦云礼拜，讹名和南。」西域记二曰：「致敬之式，其仪九等：一发言慰问，二俯首示敬，三举手高揖，四合掌平拱，五屈膝，六长跪，七手膝踞地，八五轮俱屈，九五体投地。」cf. ：Namakkāra (梵Namaskāra那谟悉羯罗)，礼拜。Vin.(Pari.V,206.；CS:p.358)︰Navakatarenupāli, bhikkhunā vuḍḍhatarassa bhikkhuno pāde vandantena ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā, añjaliṁ paggahetvā ubhohi pāṇitalehi pādāni parisambāhantena, pemañca gāravañca upaṭṭhāpetvā pādā vanditabbā.(较年轻的比丘，优婆离！顶礼诸较年长的比丘时，应外衣偏袒一肩，合掌，以两掌完全触摸双足，应释出爱心及恭敬心而顶礼。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & Vandanā (f.) [fr. vand, cp. Vedic vandana] salutation, respect, paying homage; veneration, adoration A.I,294 (ā); II,203 (+pūjā); J.I,88; Pug.19, 24; Mhvs 15, 18; Miln.377; PvA.I,53; SnA 492; ThA.256; Sdhp.221, 540. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vandati: {'def': '(vand + a), 行礼，表示敬意，尊敬，崇拜。【过】 vandi。【过分】vandita。【现分】 vandanta, ~māna。【潜】 ~ditabba。【独】 vanditvā,vandiya。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vand弯腰+a), 行礼，表示敬意，尊敬，崇拜，顶礼。【过】vandi。【过分】vandita。【现分】vandanta, vandamāna。【义】vanditabba。【独】vanditvā, vandiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[vand, originally identical with vad; the defⁿ at Dhtp (135 & 588) is “abhivādana & thuti”] to greet respectfully, salute, to pay homage, to honour, respect, to revere, venerate, adore Sn.366, 547, 573, 1028; Pv.II,1⁶; Mhvs 15, 14 (+pūjeti); Miln.14; SnA 191; PvA.53 (sirasā with the head, a very respectful way of greeting), 67; VvA.71. imper. vanda Vv 21¹ (=abhivādaya VvA.105); pl. vandantu Sn.573; ppr. vandamāna Sn.598; aor. vandi Sn.252; J.I,88; PvA.38, 61, 81, 141, 275; inf. vandituṁ PvA.77; grd. vandiya (neg. a°) Vin.II,162. -- Caus. II. vandāpeti to cause somebody to pay homage J.I,88; III,11. -- pp. vandita. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vandita: {'def': '[pp. of vandati] saluted, revered, honoured, paid homage to; as nt. homage, respect, veneration Sn.702 (akkuṭṭha+); Th.2, 388 (id.); J.I,88. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vanditar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. vandita] one who venerates or adores, a worshipper J.VI,207 (vandit’assa=vanditā bhaveyya C.). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vandāpana: {'def': '【中】令人尊崇。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】令人尊崇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vandāpeti; Caus. of vandati] causing to do homage J.I,67. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vandāpeti: {'def': '(vandati 的【使】)。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dāpita。【独】 ~petvā。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vandati 的【使】)。【过】vandāpesi。【过分】vandāpita。【独】vandāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaneja: {'def': '[vane (Loc. of vana¹)+ja] born in the woods J.II,446. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vanika: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 属于森林的。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '=vanaka; only in cpd. nāga° one belonging to the elephant forest, i e. an elephant-hunter M.I,175; III,132. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中)森林的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vanin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [either fr. Sk. vani (=P. vaṇi) in meaning “begging,” or poetical abbreviation of vaṇibbin] poor, begging; one who asks (for alms) or begs, a mendicant J.VI,232 (=vanibbaka C.). Vanibbaka see vaṇibbaka. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vanta: {'def': '(vamati 的【过分】), 已呕吐，已弃绝。 ~kasāva, 【形】放下所有过失的人。 ~mala, 【形】无瑕疵的。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of vamati] 1. vomited, or one who has vomited Miln.214; PvA.80. As nt. vomit at Vin.I,303. -- 2. (fig.) given up, thrown up, left behind, renounced M.I,37 (+catta, mutta & pahīna). Cp. BSk. vāntī-bhāva, syn. with prahāna AvŚ II.188.

--âda refuse-feeder, crow J.II,439. --āsa one who has given up all wishes, an Arahant Dh.97 (=sabbā āsā iminā vantā DhA.I,187). --âsika eating what has been vomited, a certain class of Petas Miln.294. --kasāva one who has left behind all fault Dh.10 (=chaḍḍita° DhA.I,82). --gamana at Vism.210=DA.I,34 read either as v’antagamana or c’anta°. --mala stainless Dh.261. --lokāmisa renouncing worldly profit Dh.378. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vamati 的【过分】), 已呕吐，已弃绝。vantakasāva,【形】放下所有过失的人。vantamala,【形】已呕吐秽物的。sabbāvantehi pādatalehi, 於脚掌完全放下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vanāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. vana², cp, vanāyati] to desire, wish, covet, to hanker after M.I,260; S.III,190. See also allīyati. (Page 600)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vanīyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. vani=P. vaṇi] to desire J.VI,264 C.: (pattheti), 270 (hadayaṁ vanīyati, v. l. dhanīyati: cp. allīyati). -- See also vanati & vaṇeti. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vapakassati: {'def': 'see vavakassati. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vapana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vap] sowing SnA 137; DhA.III,220 (°kassaka); PvA.8. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】播种。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】播种。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vapati: {'def': '² [vap, probably identical with vapati¹] to shear, mow, to cut, shave: only in pp. of Caus. vāpita² (q. v.). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vap播种+a), 播种，掖种，剃。【过】vapi。【过分】vapita, vutta。【现分】vapanta。【独】vapitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [vap, Vedic vapate. Defⁿ at Dhtp 192; bījanikkhepe] to sow Sn.p. 13 (kasati+); J.I,150 (nivāpaṁ vapitvā); PvA.139. -- Pass. vappate S.I,227 (yādisaṁ v. bījaṁ tādisaṁ harate phalaṁ), and vuppati [Vedic upyate] Th.1, 530. -- pp. vutta. -- Caus. I. vāpeti: see pp. vāpita¹. -- Caus. II. vapāpeti to cause to be sown Vin.III,131 (khettaṁ); J.IV,276 (sāliṁ). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vap + a), 播种，剃。【过】 vapi。【过分】 vapita, vutta。【现分】vapanta。【独】 vapitvā。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vapayāti: {'def': '[vi+apa+yā] to go away, to disappear, only at Vin. I.2=Kvu 186 (kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbā; cp. id. p. MVastu II.416 vyapananti, to be read as vyapayanti). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vapita: {'def': '² [pp. of vāpeti] mown DhsA.238. (Page 608)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vappa: {'def': '【阳】播种，瓦巴月（月名，大约十月至十一月之间）。 ~kāla, 【阳】播种时节。 ~maṅgala, 【中】耕种节日。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [cp. Epic. & Class. Sk. bāṣpa] a tear, tears Vin.I,345 (vappaṁ puñchitvā wiping the tears). (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】播种，瓦巴月(月名，十月至十一月，农历9月16至10月15)。vappakāla,【阳】播种时节。vappamaṅgala,【中】耕种节日。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (m. or nt.) [orig. grd. fr. vap=Sk. vāpya] to be sown, sowing; or soil to be sown on, in paṁsu° sowing on light soil & kalala° on heavy soil SnA 137. -- Note. The defⁿ of a root vapp at Dhtm 541 with “vāraṇe” refers to P. vappa bank of a river (Abhp 1133)=Sk. vapra, which is not found in our texts.

--kamma the act or occupation of sowing J.I,340 (+kasi-kamma). --kāla sowing time Sn.p. 13; S.I,172 (=vapanakāla, bīja-nikkhepa-kāla SnA 137). --maṅgala ploughing festival J.I,57; DhA.II,113; SnA 141. (Page 601)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vapu: {'def': '【中】身体。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】身体。(p278)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vara: {'def': '【形】优良的，贵族的。【阳】恩惠，好意。 ~ṅganā, 【阴】高贵的淑女。 ~da, 【形】布施优良供品的人。 ~dāna, 【中】恩惠或特权的允许。 ~pañña, 【形】有优良知识的。 ~lakkhaṇa, 【中】优良的相（在身体上）。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (m. & nt.) [fr. vṛ to wish] wish, boon, favour Miln.110, 139. Usually in phrases ilke varaṁ dadāti to grant a wish or a boon J.IV,10; VvA.260; PvA.20. varaṁ gaṇhāti to take a wish or a vow J.V,382; varaṁ vuṇāti (varati) id. J.III,493 (varaṁ varassu, imper.); Pv.II,9^{40, 42}; Miln.227. --varaṁ yācati to ask a favour J.III,315 (varāni yācāmi). (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [fr. vṛ to wish; Vedic vara] excellent, splendid, best, noble. As attribute it either precedes or follows the noun which it characterizes, e. g. °pañña of supreme wisdom Sn.391, 1128 (=agga-pañña Nd² 557); °bhatta excellent food (opp. lāmaka°) J.I,123; °lañcaka excellent gift (?) (Trenckner, Miln.p. 424): see under lañcaka. ‹-› dhamma° the best norm Sn.233; nagara° the noble city Vv 16⁶ (=uttama°, Rājagahaṁ sandhāya vuttaṁ VvA.82); ratana° the best of gems Sn.683; rāja° famous king Vv 32¹ (=Sakka VvA.134); or inserted between noun and apposition (or predicate), e. g. ākiṇṇa-vara-lakkhaṇa full of the best marks Sn.408; narī-vara-gaṇa a crowd of most lovely women Sn.301; esp. frequent in combⁿ with predicate gata: “gone on to the best of,” i. e. riding the most stately (horse or elephant), or walking on the royal (palace) etc., e. g. upari-pāsādavara-gata PvA.105; sindha-piṭṭhi-vara-gata J.I,179; hatthi-khandha vara-gata PvA.75, 216, 279. -- nt. varaṁ in compar. or superl. function: better than (Instr.); the best, the most excellent thing A.IV,128 (katamaṁ nu kho varaṁ: yaṁ . . . yaṁ); Dh.178 (ādhipaccena sotāpattiphalaṁ v.), 322 (varaṁ assatarā dantā . . . attadanto tato varaṁ).

--aṅganā a noble or beautiful woman Mhvs 33, 84. --ādāyin acquiring the best S.IV,250; A.III,80. --āroha (1) state elephant Vv 5¹ (=varo aggo seṭṭho āroho ti varāroho VvA.35); (2) (f.) a noble lady J.VI,562 (Maddī varārohā rājaputtī). (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(‹vr,希望),【阳】【中】希望(wish)，恩惠(boon, favour)。varaṁ dadāti,施恩惠( to grant a wish or a boon)。varaṁ yācati,请求施恩惠( to ask a favour)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(‹(var)vr, 希望；Vedic vara),【形】优良的、优质的、贵族的(excellent, splendid, best, noble)。【阳】恩惠，好意，优者(=佛陀)。varaṅganā,【阴】高贵的淑女。varada,【形】布施优良供品的人(施优者)。varadāna,【中】恩惠或特权的允许。varapañña(=agga-pañña),【形】有优良知识的(supreme wisdom)。varabhatta, 【中】上好食物(excellent food；【反】lāmakavara)。varalakkhaṇa,【中】优良的相(在身体上)。dhammavara, 【阳】优质的法(the best norm)。 nagaravara, 【阳】高贵的城市(the noble city)。Naravara,【阳】人中优者(=佛陀)。ratanavara, 【阳】贵重的宝物(the best of gems)。rājavara, 【阳】著名的国王(famous king)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Varaka: {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. vṛ] wishing or asking (in marriage) Th.2, 406. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】一种谷粒。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. *Sk. varaka] the bean Phaseolus trilobus J.II,75 (where equal to kalāya); Miln.267; DhA.I,311. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Varatta: {'def': '(nt.) & Varattā (f.) [cp. Vedic varatrā, given also in meaning “elephant’s girth” at Halāyudha II.66] a strap, thong, strip of leather S.I,63; A.II,33; Sn.622; Dh.398 (fig. for taṇhā); J.II,153; V,45. As “harness” at J.I,175; as straps on a ship’s mast (to hold the sails) Miln.378. -- Cp. vārattika.

--khaṇḍa strip of leather, a strap M.I,244=II.193= III,259=S.IV,56=A.III,380. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】。Varattā(cp. Vedic varatrā),【阴】皮带，绳(a strap, thong, strip of leather)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Varattā: {'def': '【阴】皮带，绳。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Varaṇa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. varaṇa rampart, causeway, wall] the tree Crataeva roxburghii J.I,222, 317 (°rukkha), 319=DhA.III,409 (°kaṭṭhabhañja); J.VI,535. *Varati [vṛ] & der. (“to choose” as well as “to obstruct”) see vuṇāti. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】一种树 (Crataeva roxburghii)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】鱼木（白花菜科 (Crataeva religiosa)）。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Varāha: {'def': '【阳】猪，公猪。varāhī,【阴】母猪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】猪，公猪。 ~hī, 【阴】母猪。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic varāha & varāhu, freq. in Rigveda] a boar, wild hog Dh.325=Th.1, 17; J.V,406=VI,277; Miln.364; Sdhp.378. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Varāka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. varāka] wretched, miserable S.I,231; J.IV,285; Vism.315; VvA.101; PvA.120 (syn. for kapaṇa), 175 (id.). (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可怜的，悲惨的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可怜的，悲惨的人。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Varārohā: {'def': '【阴】贵族的女人。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】贵族的女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vasa: {'def': '【阳】【中】影响力，权威，控制。vasaga, vasaṅgata,【形】在他人的权威之下。vasavattaka, vasavattī,【形】使用权威的，支配。vasavattana,【中】控制，权威。vasānuga, vasānuvattī,【形】服从的。vasamanvagū﹐随控制(anvagū：(anugacchati之第三人称、复数、过去式)跟随)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】控制，影响力，权威。 ~ga, ~ṅgata, 【形】在他人的权威之下。~vattaka, ~vattī, 【形】使用权威的，支配。 ~vattana, 【中】控制，权威。 ~ānuga, ~ānuvattī, 【形】服从的。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic vaśa; vaś to be eager, to desire] power, authority, control, influence S.I,43, 240 (kodho vo vasam āyātu: shall be in your power; vasa=āṇāpavattana K.S. I.320); M.I,214 (bhikkhu cittaṁ vasaṁ vatteti, no ca cittassa vasena vattati: he brings the heart under his control, but is not under the influence of the heart); Sn.297, 315, 578, 586, 968; Sdhp.264. -- The Instr. vasena is used as an adv. in meaning “on account of, because” e. g. mahaggha-vasena mahâraha “costly on account of its great worth” PvA.77; cp. J.I,94; PvA.36 (putta°); Mhvs 33, 92 (paṭisanthāra°). -- Freq. in phrase vase (Loc.) vattati to be in somebody’s power J.V,316 (te vase vattati), cp. M.I,214 (cittassa vasena vattati) & 231 (vatteti te tasmiṁ vaso have you power over that?); trs. vase vatteti to get under control, to get into one’s power J.IV,415 (attano vase vattetvā); V,316 (rājāno attano v. v.); DhA.II,14 (rājānaṁ attano v. v.), cp. M.I,214 (vasan vatteti) & PvA.89 (vasaṁ vattento). -- Note. The compⁿ form in connection with kṛ and bhū is vasī° (q. v.).

--ânuga being in somebody’s power, dependent, subjected, obedient Sn.332, 1095; J.III,224 (=vasavattin C.); Th.2, 375 (=kiṅkāra-paṭissāvin ThA.252); Sdhp.249. --ânuvattin id.; f. °inī obedient, obliging (to one’s husband) Vv 31³. --uttama highest authority, greatest ideal Sn.274. --gata being in someone’s power J.V,453 (narīnaṁ); cp. vasī-kata. --vattaka wielding power Sdhp.483 (°ika); a° having no free will PvA.64. --vattana wielding power, (having) authority Miln.356. --vattin -- 1. (act., i. e. vatteti) having highest power, domineering, autocrat, (all-)mighty; fig. having self‹-› mastery, controlling one’s senses D.I,247; II,261; A.II,24; It.122; Th.2. 37; Pv.II,3³³; Miln.253; DA.I,111, 114, 121; SnA 133 (°bhavana). -- 2. (pass.; i. e. vattati) being in one’s power, dependent, subject J.III,224; V,316; ThA.226 (read vattino for °vattito!). (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasabha: {'def': '[the Sanskritic-Pāli form (*vṛṣabha) of the proper Pāli usabha (q. v. for etym.). Only in later (Com.) style under Sk. influence] a bull Miln.115 (rāja°); SnA 40 (relation between usabha, vasabha & nisabha); VvA.83 (id.). (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasala: {'def': '[Vedic vṛṣala, Dimin. of vṛṣan, lit. “little man”] an outcaste; a low person, wretch; adj. vile, foul Vin II.221; Sn.116--136; J.IV,388; SnA 183, -- f. vasalī outcaste, wretched woman S.I,160; J.IV,121, 375; DhA.I,189; III,119; IV,162; VvA.260.

--ādhama=°dhamma Sn.135. --dhamma vile conduct J.II,180. --vāda foul talk Ud.28; SnA 347. --sutta the suttanta on outcasts Sn.116 sq. (p, 21 sq.), commented on at SnA 174 sq., 289. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic vrsala, Dimin. of vrsan, lit. “little man”),【阳】被驱逐的人，出生低贱的人(an outcaste; a low person, wretch)。【形】低贱的(vile, foul)。【阴】vasalī女贱民(outcaste, wretched woman)。低贱行为(vasalādhama=vasaladhamma (vile conduct)。vasalavāda, 低贱的语言(foul talk)。vasalasutta贱民经(the suttanta on outcasts)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】被驱逐的人，出生低贱的人。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vasalaka: {'def': '[vasala+ka in more disparaging sense]=vasala Sn.p. 21. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[vasala+ka in more disparaging sense] 贱民(=vasala)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vasana: {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. vasati²] dwelling (-place), abode; usually in cpds. like °gāma the village where (he) lived J.II,153; °ṭṭhāna residence, dwelling place PvA.12, 42, 92; DhA.I,323 and passim. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. vasati¹] clothing, clothes Sn.971; Th.2, 374; D.III,118 (odāta°), 124 (id.); Nd¹ 495 (the six cīvarāni); PvA.49. -- vasanāni clothing Mhvs 22, 30. -- vasana (-°) as adj. “clothed,” e. g. odāta° wearing white robes Vin.I,187; kāsāya° clad in yellow robes Mhvs 18, 10; pilotika° in rags J.IV,380; suci° in bright garments Sn.679; Pv.I,10⁸. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】住处，生活，衣服。 ~ka, 【形】居住在…处的。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】住宅。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】住处，生活，衣服。vasanaka,【形】居住在…处的。vasanaṭṭhāna,【中】住宅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vasanaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vasana²] living (in) J.II,435 (nibaddha°, i. e. of continuous abode). (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasanta: {'def': '[Vedic vasanta; Idg. *ǔēr, cp. Av. varehar spring, Gr. e)/ar, Lat. vēr, Oicel. vār spring, Lith. vasarā summer] spring J.I,86; V,206; KhA 192 (bāla°=Citra); DA.I,132 (°vana); PvA.135. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vasantakāla),【阳】春天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(~kāla), 【阳】春天。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vasati: {'def': '1 (vas1住+a), 穿(clothe. pp. vuttha1. Caus. vāseti: see ni°. See also vāsana1 & vāsana1. )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (vas2住+a), 居住，停留(to live, dwell, stay, abide; to spend time)。【过】vasi。【过分】vuttha, vusita。【现分】vasanta, vasamāna。【独】vasitvā。【义】vasitabba。【叹】vasatha。Pot. Vaseyya & vase. -- aor. vasi (vasī vasi). -- ger. vasitvā; grd. vasitabba & vatthabba ; inf. vatthuṁ & vasituṁ. Fut. vasissati [=Sk. vasisyati]; and (older) vacchati [=Sk. vatsyati; 1st sg. vacchāmi; & vacchaṁ. -- Pass. vussati [Sk. usyate]. -- pp. vasita, vusita [=vi+usita], vuttha [perhaps=vi+usṭa], q. v. -- Caus. I. vāseti to cause to live, stay or dwell; to make live; to preserve (opp. nāseti at S.IV,248) (inf. vāsetuṁ); see also vāseti2. -- Caus. II. vasāpeti (cp. adhivāsāpeti) to make live or spend, to cause to dwell, to detain J.I.290; II.27; PvA.20 (vassaṁ). -- pp. vāsita', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [vas¹; to Idg. *ǔes, cp. Gr. e)/nnumi to clothe, Sk. vasman cover, Goth. wasjan clothe, wasti dress; Lat. vestis=E. vest etc.; Dhtp 628 (& Dhtm 870): acchādane] to clothe. pp. vuttha¹. Caus. vāseti: see ni°. See also vāsana¹ & vāsana¹. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ (f.) [fr. vas², cp. Vedic vasati] a dwelling, abode, residence J.VI,292 (rāja°=rāja-paricariyā C.); Miln.372 (rājavasatiṁ vase); Dāvs.IV,27 (saka°). (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3 (fr. vas2, cp. Vedic vasati), 【阴】居住，停留(a dwelling, abode, residence J.VI.292 (rāja°=rāja-paricariyā C.); Miln.372 (rājavasatiṁ vase); Dāvs IV.27 (saka°).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vas + a), 居住，遵守，停留。【过】 vasi。【过分】 vuttha, vusita。【现分】 vasanta, vasamāna。【独】 vasitvā。【潜】 vasitabba。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [vas²; Idg. *ǔes to stay, abide; cp. Av. var∂haiti; Lat. Vesta the goddess of the hearth=Gr. e(sti/a hearth; Goth. wisan to stay, remain, be (=Ohg. wesan, E. was, were); Oicel. vist to stay, Oir. foss rest. -- Dhtm 470: kanti-nivāsesu] to live, dwell, stay, abide; to spend time (esp. with vassaṁ the rainy season); trs. to keep, observe, live, practise Sn.469 sq., 1088 (=saṁvasati āvasati parivasati Nd² 558); PvA.3, 12, 78 (imper. vasatha). ‹-› uposathaṁ vasaṁ (ppr.) keeping the Sunday J.VI,232; brahmacariyaṁ v. to live a chaste life M.I,515 (cp. same expression Ait. Br. 5, 13; Śat. Br. 12, 2, 2; 13, 8. 22). -- ppr. vasanto PvA.75, 76; ppr. med. vasamāna J.I,21, 236, 291; PvA.117; Pot. vaseyya M.I,515; Pv.II,9⁷ (ghare), & vase Miln.372. -- aor. vasi Sn.977; J.IV,317 (piya-saṁvāsaṁ); PvA.111; Mhvs 1, 13 (vasī vasi); 5, 229. -- ger. vasitvā J.I,278; IV,317; PvA.13; grd. vasitabba Sn.678; PvA.42; & vatthabba Mhvs 3, 12; inf. vatthuṁ Th.2, 414, & vasituṁ PvA.12, 112. Fut. vasissati [=Sk. vasiṣyati] Mhvs 14, 26; PvA.12; and (older) vacchati [=Sk. vatsyati] Vin.I,60; Th.2, 294; J.IV,217; 1^st sg. vacchāmi J.V,467 (na te v. santike); VI,523, 524, & vacchaṁ Th.2, 414. -- Pass. vussati [Sk. uṣyate] M.I,147 (brahmacariyaṁ v.). -- pp. vasita, vusita [=vi+uṣita], vuttha [perhaps=vi+uṣṭa], q. v. -- Caus. I. vāseti to cause to live, stay or dwell; to make live; to preserve (opp. nāseti at S.IV,248) Vin.III,140; S.IV,248; Miln.211; PvA.160 (inf. vāsetuṁ); see also vāseti². -- Caus. II. vasāpeti (cp. adhivāsāpeti) to make live or spend, to cause to dwell, to detain J.I,290; II,27; PvA.20 (vassaṁ). -- pp. vāsita. -- See also adhi°, ā°, ni°, pari°. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasika: {'def': '(adj.) (--°) [fr. vasa, cp. Sk. vaśika] being in the power of, subject to, as in kodha° a victim of anger J.III,135; taṇhā under the influence of craving J.IV,3; mātugāma° fond of women J.III,277. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasima: {'def': '=vasin It.32 (Acc. vasimaṁ; v. l. vasīmaṁ). (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasin: {'def': '(‹vasa), 【形】有权力的，操纵的，自在的(having power (over), mastering, esp. one’s senses; a master (over) )。(=ciṇṇavasitattā vasī)。Vism 154.(五自在)。vasīkata,【形】受制於…的，在个人权力之下的。vasībhāva,【阳】掌握。vasībhūta,【形】已成为主人的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vasa] having power (over), mastering, esp. one’s senses; a master (over) Vin.III,93; D.I,18 (=ciṇṇavasitattā vasī DA.I,112); III,29; Sn.372; Vism.154 (fivefold); Mhvs 1, 13 (vasī vasi); Dāvs.I,16. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasippatta: {'def': '【形】已经掌握得好的人。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】已经掌握得好的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vasita: {'def': '[pp. of vasati²] dwelled, lived, spent Mhvs 20, 14. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. vasita] one who abides, stays or lives (in), a dweller; fig. one who has a (regular) habit A.II,107= Pug.43, cp. PugA 225. -- vasitā is given as “habit” at Cpd. 58 sq., 207. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasituŋ: {'def': '【不】居住。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vasituṁ: {'def': '【不】居住。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vasitā: {'def': '【阴】掌握，聪明。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】掌握，聪明。五自在：1.入定自在(samāpajjanavasitā)能够迅速地证入各种禅那的能力(一弹指或十弹指的时间，有些禅修中心以五分钟为计)。2.决意自在(adhiṭṭhānavasitā住定自在)能够迅速地住在定中。3.出定自在(vuṭṭhānavasitā)是能够迅速地从禅定中出来的能力。4.省察自在(paccavekkhaṇāvasitā)是能够在出定之后省察(观察心(脏)中的禅支)刚才所证入的禅那的能力。5.转向自在(āvajjana-vasitā)是能够迅速地以意门转向心(manodvārāvajjanena)转向似相，而似相就能够迅速地生起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vasi°: {'def': 'is the shortened form of vasī° (=vasa) in comb^ns °ppatta one who has attained power, mastering: only in phrase ceto-vasippatta A.II,6; III,340; Miln.82; cp. BSk. vaśiprāpta Divy 210, 546; -- and °ppatti mastership, mastery Vism.190 (appanā+). (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vassa: {'def': '【阳】 1. 年。 2. 雨。 ~kāla, 【阳】雨季。 ~gga, 【中】最多戒腊。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '佛教僧团每年雨季时结夏安居三个月的期间，每结夏安居一次，戒腊即增加一岁。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '雨;雨期;雨期安居;年', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic varṣa (nt.) rain. For etym. see vassati¹] 1. rain, shower J.IV,284; VI,486 (khaṇika sudden rain); Miln.307; Mhvs 21, 31; DhA.III,163 (pokkhara° portentous); SnA 224 (mahā° deluge of rain); PvA.55 (vāta° wind & rain). -- fig. shower, downpour, fall M.I,130=Vin.II,25 (kahāpaṇa°); DhA.II,83 (kusuma°). -- Esp. the rainy season, lasting roughly from June to October (Āsāḷha-Kattika), often called “Lent,” though the term does not strictly correspond. Usually in pl. vassā (A.IV,138), also termed vassā-ratta “time of rains” (J.IV,74; V,38). Cp. BSk. varṣā, e. g: Divy 401, 509. -- Keeping Lent (i. e. spending the rainy season) is expressed by vassaṁ vasati Vin.III,10; Mhvs 16, 8; or by vassa-vāsaṁ (vass’āvāsaṁ) vasati (see below), vassaṁ upeti S.V,152, vassaṁ upagacchati S.V,152; PvA.42. One who has kept Lent or finished the residence of the rains is a vuttha-vassa J.I,82; Mhvs 17, 1; or vassaṁ vuttha Vin.III,11; S.I,199; V,405; PvA.43. Cp. BSk. varṣ’oṣita Divy 92, 489. -- Vassa-residence is vassa-vāsa (see below). -- vassaṁ vasāpeti (Caus.) to induce someone to spend the rainy season PvA.20. -- anto-vassaṁ during Lent; cp. antovass’eka-divasaṁ one day during Lent Mhvs 18, 2; antara-vassaṁ id. S.IV,63. -- 2. (nt.) a year A.IV,252 (mānusakāni paññāsa vassāni); Sn.289, 446, 1073. satta° (adj.) seven years old Mhvs 5, 61; satta-aṭṭha° 7 or 8 years old PvA.67. -- See cpd. °sata. -- 3. semen virile, virility: see cpds. °kamma & °vara.

--agga shelter from the rain, a shed (agga=agāra) J.I,123; DhA.III,105=VvA.75. --āvāsa vassa-residence A.III,67. --āvāsika belonging to the spending of the rainy season, said of food (bhatta) given for that purpose J.VI,71; DhA.I,129 (as one of the 4 kinds: salāka°, pakkhika°, navacanda°, vass’--āvāsika°), 298; IV,129 (°lābha a gift for the r. s.). --upagamana entering on the vassa-residence PvA.42. --upanāyikā (f.) the approach of the rainy season, commencement of Vassa residence [BSk. varṣopanāyikā Divy 18, 489; AvŚ I.182, where Ep. of the full moon of Āsāḷha]. Two such terms for taking up the residence: purimikā & pacchimikā A.I,51; i. e. the day after the full moon of Ā. or a month after that date. See upanāyika. -- vass’ûpanāyika-divasa the first day of Lent Vism.92; DhA.IV,118; °ûpanāyikaṁ khandhakaṁ the section of the Vinaya dealing with the entrance upon Lent (i. e. Vin.I,137 sq.) Mhvs 16, 9. --odaka rain-water Vism.260=VbhA.243. --kamma causing virility D.I,12 (=vasso ti puriso, vosso ti paṇḍako iti; vossassa vassa-karaṇaṁ vassa-kammaṁ, vassassa vossa-karaṇaṁ vossa-kammaṁ DA.I,97). --kāla time for rain J.IV,55. --dasa (& °dasaka) a decade of years: see enum^d at J.IV,397. --pūgāni innumerable years J.VI,532, cp. Sn.1073. --vara a eunuch J.VI,502. --valāhaka a rain cloud A.III,243 (°devā). --vassana shedding of rain, raining DhA.II,83. --vāsa Vassa residence S.V,326; PvA.20. --vuṭṭhi rainfall SnA 34, cp. 224. --sata a century Sn.589, 804; A.IV,138; Pv.II,1¹⁵; PvA.3, 60, 69. --satika centenarian Miln.301. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵varsa‹vris年?雨),【阳】1.年。2.雨，雨季(五月十六至九月十五)。vassakāla,【阳】雨季。vassagga,【中】最多戒腊。vassāvāsa﹐雨安居，夏安居。deve vassante﹐於天降雨时。antovassaṁ﹐雨安居期间。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vassana: {'def': '2 (fr. vassati2),【中】(羊,小牛等)咩咩叫、抱怨(bleating)。【中】avassana (J IV.251.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1,【中】下雨(日语：雨垂れ,amadare)，(鸟、兽等)叫，啼，嗥，鸣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. vassati²] bleating; neg. a° J.IV,251. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. vassati¹] raining, shedding (water) DhA.II,83 (vassa°). (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】下雨，（鸟、兽等）叫，啼，嗥，鸣。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vassati: {'def': '1(vass下雨+a), 下雨(to shower, pour(down))。【过】vassi。【过分】vassita, (在下雨的情况) vuṭṭha。【现分】vassanta。【独】vassitvā。vassam vuṭṭho﹐受夏坐。vassatu, imper.; vassi, aor.);(devo vassanto Nom. sg.). Caus. II. vassāpeti to cause to rain J V.201 (Sakko devaṁ v. let the sky shed rain). -- pp. vaṭṭa, vaṭṭha, vuṭṭha. Another pp. of the Caus. *vasseti is vassita.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [vāś to bellow, Vedic vāśyate; Dhtm 471: “saddane”] to utter a cry (of animals), to bellow, bark, to bleat, to crow etc. S.II,230; J.I,436 (of a cock); II,37, 153, 307; III,127; VI,497 (ppr. vassamāna=vāsamāna C.). -- pp. vassita². (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vas + a), 下雨，（鸟、兽等）叫。【过】 vassi。【过分】 vassita, (在下雨的情况) vuṭṭha。【现分】 vassanta。【独】 vassitvā。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [vṛṣ, varṣati, vṛṣate; Idg. *ǔers to wet, cp. Vedic vṛṣa bull, varṣa rain, vṛṣabha (P. usabha), Av. varšna virile, Lat. verres boar; Gr. a)ρrhn virile, e)ρsh dew; with which root is connected *eres to flow: Sk. arṣati, ṛṣabha bull, Lat. ros dew=Sk. rasa essence etc. ‹-› Dhtm 471 gives “secana” as defⁿ] to rain (intrs.), fig. to shower, pour(down) Vin.I,32 (mahāmegho vassi); S.III,141 (deve vassante); V,396 (id.); Sn.30 (devassa vassato, Gen. sg. ppr.); PvA.6, 139, 287; Mhvs 21, 33; DhA.II,83 (vassatu, imper.; vassi, aor.); 265 (devo vassanto Nom. sg.). -- Cp. kālena kālaṁ devo vṛṣyate Divy 71. -- Caus. II. vassāpeti to cause to rain J.V,201 (Sakko devaṁ v. let the sky shed rain). -- pp. vaṭṭa, vaṭṭha, vuṭṭha. Another pp. of the Caus. *vasseti is vassita. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(梵vāw, to bellow吼叫), 叫、吼叫(to utter a cry (of animals), to bellow, bark, to bleat, to crow etc. S II.230; J I.436 (of a cock)); (ppr. vassamāna= vāsamāna C.). pp. vassita2.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vassika: {'def': '【形】属于雨季的。 (在【合】中) …岁。 ~sāṭikā, 【阴】比丘在雨季用的雨衣。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】雨季的。(在【合】中) …岁。vassikasāṭikā,【阴】比丘在雨季用的雨衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vassa] 1. (cp. vassa¹) for the rainy season D.II,21 (palace); cp. AvŚ I.269 varṣaka (id.). -- 2. (-°) of years, in gaṇa° for many years Sn.279; SnA 339; tero° more than one year (old): see under tero; satta° seven years old PvA.53. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vassikā: {'def': '【阴】茉莉（见 Mallikā）。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) & Vassika (nt.)=vassikī, i. e. Jasminum Sambac; cp. BSk. varṣika Lal. Vist. 366, 431; Divy 628; AvŚ I.163. (a) f. (the plant) Dh.377 (=sumanā DhA.IV,112); Miln.251. (b) nt. (the flower, said to be the most fragrant of all flowers) A.V,22; S.V,44; DhA.IV,112 (°puppha). (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=vassika【中】=vassikī；梵vārsikā),【阴】茉莉花(= sumanā；i.e.Jasminum Sambac；great-flowered jasmine﹐见 Mallikā)。vassika(vassikī)【中】茉莉，婆师华，夏生花。ye keci pupphagandhā, vassikaṁ tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati.(一切华香中，茉莉花香为其最上。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vassikī: {'def': '(f.) the great-flowered jasmine, Jasminum Sambac (cp. vassikā) Dh.55=J.III,291=Miln.333; Miln.181, 338; DhA.I,422. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vassin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. vassati¹] raining; in padesa° shedding local showers It.64. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vassita: {'def': '¹ [pp. of *vasseti, Caus. of vassati¹] sprinkled with, wet with, endowed with, i. e. full of J.IV,494 (balena vassita). (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vassati 的【过分】), 已弄湿。【中】(鸟、兽等的)叫，啼，嗥，鸣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vassati 的【过分】), 已弄湿。【中】（鸟、兽等的）叫，啼，嗥，鸣。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [pp. of vassati²] a cry J.I,432; IV,217, 225. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vassitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. vassita¹] a shedder of rain A.II,102= Pug.42. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vassāna: {'def': '[Gen. pl. formation fr. vassa, like gimhāna fr. gimha (q. v.). Kern, Toev. s. v. sees in it a contraction of varṣāyaṇa. Cp. Trenckner, Miln.p. 428] (belonging, to) the rainy season Vin.IV,286; A.IV,138; J.II,445; V,177. (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】雨季。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】雨季。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vassāpanaka: {'def': '【形】使下雨的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】使下雨的。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vassāpeti; Caus. of vassati¹] shedding, pouring out J.I,253 (dhana°). (Page 606)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vassāpeti: {'def': '(vassati 的【使】), 使下雨。【过】vassāpesi。【过分】vassāpita。【独】vassāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vassati 的【使】), 使下雨。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】~petvā。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vasu: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic vasu good, cp. Gr. e]uζ good, Oir. fīu worthy, Goth. iusiza better] wealth; only in cpds. °deva the god of wealth, i. e. Kṛṣṇa (Kaṇha) Miln.191 (as °devā followers of K.); J.V,326 (here in T. as ādicco vāsudevo pabhaṅkaro, expl^d in C. as vasudevo vasujotano, i. e. an Ep. of the sun); Vism.233 (Vāsudevo baladevo). --°dharā (f.) (as vasun-dharā) the bearer of wealth, i. e. the earth S.I,100; A.III,34; J.V,425; Vism.205, 366; DA.I,61. --°dhā id. J.I,25; Ap 53; Vism.125. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】财富。vasudhā, vasundharā, vasumatī，【阴】大地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】财富。 ~dhā, ~ndharā, ~matī，【阴】大地。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vasumant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vasu] having wealth, rich J.VI,192. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasā: {'def': '1 (Vedic vawā; cp. vāwitā),【阴】成牛(a cow (neither in calf nor giving suck))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】脂肪，油脂。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2,【阴】脂肪，油脂(fat, tallow, grease)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [Vedic vaśā; cp. vāśitā; Lat. vacca cow] a cow (neither in calf nor giving suck) Sn.26, 27; SnA 49 (=adamita-vuddha-vacchakā). (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (f.) [cp. Vedic vasā] fat, tallow, grease Sn.196; Kh III,; Pv.II,2³; J.III,356; V,489; PvA.80; VbhA.67. In detail at Vism.263, 361; VbhA.246. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vasāpeti: {'def': '(vasati 的【使】), 使活，使居住，扣留。【过】vasāpesi。【过分】vasāpita。【独】vasāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vasati 的【使】), 使活，使居住，扣留。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】 ~petvā。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vasī: {'def': '【形】操纵的，有权力的。 ~kata, 【形】受制于…的，在个人权力之下的。 ~bhāva, 【阳】掌握。 ~bhūta, 【形】已成为主人的。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vasī°: {'def': 'is the composition form of vasa in combⁿ with roots kṛ and bhū, e. g. °kata made dependent, brought into somebody’s power, subject(ed) Th.2, 295 (=vasavattino katvā, pl.); Sn.154; cp. BSk. vaśīkṛta Jtm 213. See also vasagata. -- °katvā having overcome or subjected Sn.561 (=attano vase vattetvā SnA 455). Metricausâ as vasiṁ karitvā at Sn.444. -- °bhāva state of having power, mastery Nd² 466 (balesu); Pug.14 (in same passage, but reading phalesu), expl^d at PugA 189 (with v. l. SS balesu!) as “ciṇṇa-vasī-bhāva”; Kvu 608 (implies balesu); Miln.170. Cp. BSk. bala-vaśī-bhāva MVastu III,379. See also ciṇṇa. -- °bhūta having become a master (over), mastering S.I,132; Miln.319; cp. MVastu I.47 & 399 vaśībhūta. -- The same change of vasa° to vasī° we find in combⁿ vasippatta (vasī+ppatta), q. v. under vasi°. (Page 605)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vata: {'def': '【中】圣行，禁戒。 ~pada, 【中】道德。 ~vantu, 【形】守戒的人。~samādāna, 【中】持戒。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (indecl.) [Vedic bata, post-Vedic vata] part of exclamation: surely, certainly, indeed, alas! Vin.III,39 (puris’usabho vat’âyaṁ “for sure he is a human bull”); Th.2, 316 (abbhutaṁ vata vācaṁ bhāsasi); Sn.178, 191, 358; Vv 47¹³; Pv.I,8⁵; J.IV,355; PvA.13, 61, 75, 121. Often comb^d with other emphatic particles, like aho vata Pv.II,9⁴⁵ (=sādhu vata PvA.131); lābhā vata no it is surely a gain that Sn.31; DhA.II,95; vata bho J.I,81. (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】的确地，确定地，真正地，真是的，唉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】的确地，确定地，真正地，唉。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic vrata vow. fr. vṛt, meaning later “milk” (see Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index II.341)] 1. a religious duty, observance, rite, practice, custom S.I,143, 201; IV,180; A.IV,461 (sīla, vata, tapas, brahmacariya); V,18; Sn.792, 898; Vv 84²⁴; J.III,75; VvA.9; PvA.60. --subbata of good practice Vv 34⁶. Cp. patibbata, sīlabbata. -- 2. manner of (behaving like) a certain animal (as a practice of ascetics), e. g. aja° like a goat J.IV,318; go° like a cow M.I,387; J.IV,318; vagguli° bat practice J.I,493; III,235; IV,299; hatthi° elephant behaviour Nd¹ 92 (here as vatta; see under vatta¹).

--pada an item of good practice, virtue (otherwise called guṇa at Miln.90) J.I,202 (where 7 are enum^d, viz. devotion to one’s mother & father, reverence towards elder people, speaking the truth, gentle speech, open speech, unselfishness); Miln.90 (where 8 are given in detail, differing from the above). See also vatta¹ 2. where other sets of 7 & 8 are quoted. --samādāna taking up a (good) practice, observance of a vow J.I,157. (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】宗教义务，禁戒，誓约。vatapada,【中】誓约。vatavantu,【形】守戒的人。vatasamādāna,【中】持戒。S.11.11.：satta vatapadāni((帝释天王的)七道德)：S.11.11.：satta vatapadāni(七誓约)：1Yāvajīvaṁ mātāpettibharo assaṁ, 2yāvajīvaṁ kule jeṭṭhāpacāyī assaṁ, 3yāvajīvaṁ saṇhavāco assaṁ, 4yāvajīvaṁ apisuṇavāco assaṁ, 5yāvajīvaṁ vigatamalamaccherena cetasā agāraṁ ajjhāvaseyyaṁ muttacāgo payatapāṇi vossaggarato yācayogo dānasaṁvibhāgarato, 6yāvajīvaṁ saccavāco assaṁ, 7yāvajīvaṁ akkodhano assaṁ--sacepi me kodho uppajjeyya, khippameva naṁ paṭivineyyan”ti.(1.愿终生孝养父母。2.愿终生礼敬长辈。3.愿终生语柔和。4.愿终生不诽谤。5.愿终生守住离悭垢；(1)开放施，(2)舒手施，(3)乐弃舍，(4)有求必应，(5)乐分配施。(6)愿终生说真实语。(7)愿终生不生气，若生气则速制伏。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vatavant: {'def': '(adj.) [vata²+vant] observant of religious duties, devout Sn.624 (=dhuta-vatena samannāgata SnA 467); Dh.400 (with same explⁿ at DhA.IV,165 as as SnA 467). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vati: {'def': '² (f.) [fr. vṛ, cp. Sk. vṛti] a choice, boon DhA.I,190 (pubbe Sāmā nāma vatiyā pana kāritattā Sāmāvatī nāma jātā). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vatikā, 【阴】围墙，栅栏。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [later Sk. vṛti, fr. vṛ] a fence J.I,153; III,272; V,472; Vism.186 (vatī, v. l. vati); SnA 98 (v. l. for gutti), 148 (v. l. for °vatikā). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vatikā,【阴】围墙，栅栏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vatika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [vata²+ika] having the habit (of), acting like M.I,387 (kukkura°). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 有…的习惯，像…的行为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 有…的习惯，像…的行为。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vatikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vati¹] a fence SnA 148 (kaṇṭaka° & rukkha°). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vatta: {'def': '² (nt.) [cp. Sk. vaktra & P. vattar] the mouth (lit. “speaker”) Pgdp 55 (sūci-vatto mah’odaro peto). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [vyatta, Sk. vyātta, of vi+ā+dā] opened wide Vin.III,37; J.V,268 (vatte mukhe). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】责任，服务，职责。 ~paṭivatta,【中】各种的责任。 ~sampanna,【形】忠实的。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [orig. pp. of vattati] 1. that which is done, which goes on or is customary, i. e. duty, service, custom, function Vin.II,31; Sn.294, 393 (gahaṭṭha°); Vism.188 (cetiy’aṅgaṇa° etc.); DhA.I,92 (ācariya°); VbhA.354 (gata-paccāgata°); VvA.47 (gāma°). -- 2. (for vata²) observance, vow, virtue D.III,9 (the 7 vattapadāni, diff. from those enum^d under vata-pada); Nd¹ 66 (sīlañ ca vattañ ca), 92 (hatthi° etc.: see vata² 2), 104 (°suddhi), 106 (id.), 188 (giving 8 dhutaṅgas as vattas).

--paṭivatta all kinds of practices or duties J.I,67; II,103; III,339; IV,298; Miln.416 (sucarita°); DhA.I,13 sq.; II,277; IV,28. --bbata the usual custom DhA.IV,44; C on S.I,36 § 2 and on S.II,18 § 4 sq. --sampanna one who keeps all observances VbhA.297 (where the foll. vattāni are enum^d: 82 khuddaka-vattāni. 14 mahā°, cetiyaṅgaṇa°, bodhiyaṅgaṇa°, pānīyamāḷa°, uposathāgāra°, āgantuka°, gamika°). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】责任，服务，职责，行仪。vattapaṭivatta,【中】各种的责任。vattasampanna,【形】忠实的。na-vattabba, 不可说(not to be classified，即不可分类成过去、现在或未来法。)。vattakkhandhakaṁ(职责篇) (Vin.Cv.II,207~235；Sp.Cv.VI,1280~6)︰1.āgantukavattakathā(客住者的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1280.)，2.āvāsikavattakathā(原住者(旧住者)的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1282.)，3.gamikavattakathā(远行者的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1285.)，4.anumodanavattakathā(随喜的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1283.)，5.bhattaggavattakathā(食堂的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1283.)，6.piṇḍacārikavattakathā(乞食者的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1285.)，7.āraññikavattakathā(林野住者的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1285.)，8.senāsanavattakathā(坐卧处的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1285.)，9.jantāgharavattādikathā(浴室的职责) (Sp.Cv.VI,1286.)。10.vaccakuṭivatta (厕所的职责)，11.upajjhāyavatta(对戒师的职责)，12. saddhivihārikavatta(对弟子的职责) (Cv.II,227.)，13. ācariyavatta(对老师的职责)，14.antevāsikavatta(对学生的职责) (Cv.II,231.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '⁴ at J.V,443 is corrupt for vaṇṭha cripple. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattabba: {'def': '(= vaditabba),【义】适合被说。vattabbataṁ, 适合被说性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(= vaditabba), 【潜】适合被告诉。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vattaka: {'def': 'vattetu,【阳】运用，保持。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'vattetu, 【阳】运用，保持。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vatta¹] doing, exercising, influencing; in vasa° having power, neg. avasa° having no free will, involuntary PvA.64. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattamāna: {'def': '【形】已存在的。【阳】现在的时期。 ~nā, 【阴】〔语法〕现在时态。 ~naka, 【形】已存在的，继续的。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】已存在的。【阳】现在的时期。vattamānā,【阴】〔语法〕现在时态。vattamānaka,【形】已存在的，继续的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [ppr. med. of vattati] being in existence, going on, happening at the time; nt. process, progress, (as °-) in progress SnA 4 (°uppanna); PvA.55. --°vacana the present tense SnA 16, 23. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattamānaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] going on, being, existing; °bhave in the present existence or period Miln.291. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattana: {'def': '【中】vattanā,【阴】操行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vattati] moving on, upkeep, existence, continuance Sn.698 (cakka° continuance of royal power); Mhvs 3, 38. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 Vattanā, 【阴】操行。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vattanī: {'def': '【阴】道路，路径。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】道路，路径。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& °i) (f.) [cp. Sk. vartanī, fr. vṛt] a track, a road J.I,196, 395, 429; III,200. --kaṇha° leaving a black trail, Ep. of the fire J.III,140. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattar: {'def': '[n. ag. of vatti, vac] one who speaks, a sayer, speaker M.I,470; S.I,63; II,182; VI,94, 198; D.I,139; A.IV,32; V,79 sq., 226 sq.; Th.1, 334 (read ariya-vattā for ° vatā); J.I,134; SnA 272; PvA.15. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattati: {'def': '(vat + a), 存在，发生，产生，继续。【过】 vatti。【独】 vattitvā。【现分】 vattanta, ~tamāna。【不】 vattituŋ。【潜】 vattitabba。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Vaṭṭati,(vat(梵 vrt)使转动+a；Vedic vartate), 存在，发生，产生，继续。【过】vatti。【独】vattitvā。【现分】vattanta, vattamāna。【不】vattituṁ。【义】vattabba(vatthabba at Vin.II,8), vattitabbaṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic vartate; vṛt. A differentiated P. form is vaṭṭati. -- Cp. Av. var∂t to turn, Sk. vartana turning, vartulā=Lat. vertellum=E. whorl (Ger. wirtel) & vertil; Gr. r(atάnh; Goth. waírpan=Ger. werden (to become, E. “turn”); Goth. --waírps=E. --wards; Obulg. vrěteno spindle; and many others (e. g. Lat. vertex, vortex), q. v. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. verto] to move, go on, proceed; to happen, take place, to be; to be in existence; to fare, to do Sn.p. 13 (parivesanā vattati distribution of food was in progress); Sn.654 (kammanā vattati loko keeps up, goes on); Pv.II,9⁴⁴ (vatteyya); Miln.338 (na ciraṁ vattate bhavo). -- grd. vattabba to be proceeded, or simply “to be” Vin.II,8 (so read for vatth°): nissāya te v. “thou must remain under the superintendence of others” (Vin. Texts, II.344). -- Often equal to atthi or (pl.) santi, i. e. is (are), e. g. J.VI,504; SnA 100 (bāḷhā vedanā vattanti); PvA.40. -- ppr. med. vattamāna see sep. -- pp. vatta. -- Caus. vatteti to make go on, to keep up, practise, pursue Sn.404 (etaṁ vattayaṁ pursuing this); freq. in phrases vasaṁ vatteti to exercise power, e. g. PvA.89; and cakkaṁ vatteti to wield royal power, to govern (cp. expression cakkavattin & see pavatteti) Sn.554, 684 (vattessati), 693 (dhamma-cakkaṁ); J.III,412. -- grd. vattitabba to be practised Vin.II,32. -- pp. vattita. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vatteti: {'def': '(vattati 的【使】), 使继续，使进行。【过】 vattesi。【过分】 vattita。【潜】 ~tenta。【独】 vattetvā, 【潜】 ~tetabba。【不】 ~tetuŋ。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vattati 的【使】), 使继续，使进行。【过】vattesi。【过分】vattita。【现分】vattenta。【独】vattetvā,【义】vattetabba。【不】vattetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vattha: {'def': '【中】布料，衣服。 ~guyha, 【中】被衣藏着的，即：阴部。 ~ntara,【中】布料的种类。 ~yuga, 【中】一对衣服。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² as pp. of vasati¹ occurs only in cpd. nivattha. The two passages in PvA.where vattha is printed as pp. (vatthāni vattha) are to be read as vattha-nivattha (PvA.46, 62). (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Vedic vastra, fr. vas, vaste to clothe; Idg. *ǔes, enlargement of *eu (: Lat. ex-uo); cp. Lat. vestis “vest(-ment),” Gr. e(/nnumi to clothe, ei(μa dress; Goth. wasjan to clothe; wasti dress) 1. cloth; clothing, garment, raiment; also collectively: clothes; M.I,36 sq.; A.I,132, 209, 286; II,85, 241; III,27 (odātaṁ), 50 (kāsikaṁ), 386 (kāsāyaṁ); IV,60, 186, 210; V,61 sq. (ubhatobhāga-vimaṭṭhaṁ=M.II,13, reading vimaddha; with the expression cp. ubhato-bhāga-vimutta); Sn.295, 304; KhA 237 (°ṁ pariyodāyati, simile); PvA.43, 50, 70; Sdhp.217. --alla° fresh, clean clothes DhA.IV,220; ahata° new clothes J.I,50; Dāvs II.39; dibba° heavenly, i. e. exquisite dresses PvA.23, 46, 53. -- pl. vatthāni garments, clothes Sn.64, 287, 924; Pug.57 (kāsāyāni); DhA.I,219 (their uses, from a new dress down to a bit of rag). -- 2. hangings, tapestry J.IV,304. -- On vattha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 132.

--guyha “that which is concealed by a cloth,” i. e. the pudendum D.I,106; Sn.1022; DA.I,275 (=aṅgajātaṁ; Bhagavato ti vāraṇass’eva kosohitaṁ vatthaguyhaṁ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṁ paduma-gabbha-samānaṁ). --yuga a pair of garments J.IV,172; Dāvs.I,34. --lakkhaṇa fortune telling from clothes SnA 362. --sannidhi storing up of clothes D.I,6; Nd¹ 372; DA.I,82. --sutta the Suttanta on clothes (i. e. with the parable of the clothes: vatth’upama-sutta) M.I,36 sq., quoted at Vism.377 and SnA 119. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】布料，衣服。vatthaguyha,【中】被衣藏著的，即：阴部。vatthantara,【中】布料的种类。vatthayuga,【中】一对衣服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vatthabba: {'def': 'at Vin.II,8 is to be spelt vattabba (see vattati). (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vatthi: {'def': '(梵vasti),【阳】【阴】膀胱。vatthikamma,【中】灌肠。vatthikosa,(包封男性的器官)包皮(古译：阴藏膜)。peḷassa vatthino, 膀胱(peḷā f. 容器)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】膀胱，灌肠，（包封男性的器官）鞘。 ~kamma, 【中】灌肠。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & f.) [Vedic vasti in meaning 1; the other meanings later] 1. the bladder Vin.III,117; J.I,146; Sn.195; Vism.144=DhsA.117; Vism.264, 345 (mutta°), 362; DA.I,161; VbhA.248. -- 2. the pudendum: see °kosa. -- 3. a clyster (-bag): see °kamma.

--kamma(ṁ karoti) to use a clyster Vin.I,216. --kosa a membranous sheath enveloping the sexual organ of a male DA.I,275 (°kosena paṭicchanna vatthaguyha: so read for °kesena); VvA.252 (°mukha orifice of the pudendum of an elephant). (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vatthu: {'def': '² [Vedic vāstu; fr. vas] site, ground, field, plot Vin.III,50 (ārāma° & vihāra°), 90 (id.); Sn.209, 473 (sakhetta°, cp. vatthu¹ 4), 769 (khetta+), 858 (id.); Th.1, 957 (khetta+vatthu, cp. Brethren p. 337¹ & Vin. Texts III,389 sq.); Miln.279 (khetta° a plot of arable land); DA.I,78 (contrasted with khetta, see khetta 1 and cp. vatthu¹ 1); PvA.88 (gehassa the back yard of the house); haunted by fairies (parigaṇhanti) D.II,87.

--kamma “act concerning sites,” i. e. preparing the ground for building D.I,12 (trslⁿ: fixing on lucky sites for dwellings), cp. DA.I,98: akaṭa-vatthumhi gehapatiṭṭhāpanaṁ. --devatā the gods protecting the grounds, field-gods, house-gods Pv.I,4¹ (=ghara-vatthuṁ adhivatthā devatā PvA.17). --parikiraṇa offerings over the site of a house (“consecrating sites” trslⁿ) D.I,12 (cp. DA.I,98=balikamma-karaṇaṁ). --vijjā the science of (building-) sites, the art of determining a suitable (i. e. lucky) site for a house D.I,9 (see explⁿ at DA.I,93); S.III,239; Nd¹ 372; Vism.269 (in comparison); KhA 237. See also Dial II.92 & Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152. (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹vas),【中】位置，田地，小块土地，物体，事物，故事，依处(阿毘达摩用语)。vatthuka,【形】(在【合】中) 有其地在，被发现在。vatthukata,【形】以…为基础的，彻底地熟练的。vatthukāma﹐事欲。vatthugāthā,【阴】介绍的偈。vatthudevatā,【阴】地神，地基主(the gods protecting the grounds, field-gods, house-gods)。vatthuvijjā,【阴】(建筑)地点的科学，堪舆学(即：风水学。he science of (building-) sites, the art of determining a suitable (i. e. lucky) site for a house)。vatthuvisadakiriyā,【阴】原则的清洁。Vibhv.p.103.：Vasanti etesu cittacetasikā tannissayattāti vatthūni.(这些心、心所住在那依靠处，为‘依处’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Class. Sk. vastu, fr. vas¹] lit. “ground,” hence 1. (lit.) object, real thing, property, thing, substance (cp. vatthu²!) A.II,209 (khetta°, where khetta in lit. sense, cp. No. 2). Here belongs the defⁿ of kāma as twofold: vatthu-kāma and kilesa-kāma, or desire for realities, objective kāma, and desire as property of stained character, i. e. subjective kāma, e. g. Nd¹ 1; SnA 99, 112; DhsA.62. -- On vatthu as general philos. term cp. Dhs. trslⁿ ²§§ 455, 679, 1229, also introd. p. 86; Cpd. 15, 31, 174¹. -- 2. (appl^d meaning) object, item Vin.I,121 (antima-vatthuṁ ajjhāpannaka guilty of an extreme offence?); V,138 (the 10 āghāta-vatthūni, as at Vbh.86); D.III,252 (seven niddesa°), 255 (eight kusīta°), 258 (eight dāna°); S.II,41, 56 sq.; Vbh.71 (cakkhu° etc.), 306 sq., 353; Nett 114 (ten); SnA 172; DhA.IV,2 (akkosa°); PvA.8, 20 (dāna°), 26 (left out in id. p. KhA 209), 29, 65 (alabbhaneyya°), 96 (id.), 119, 121 (iṭṭha°), 177, 220. Cp. °bhūta. -- 3. occasion for, reason, ground A.II,158 (+khetta [in fig. sense!], āyatana & adhikaraṇa); IV,334; D.I,13 sq. (aṭṭhādasahi vatthūhi etc.); J.II,5 (avatthumhi chandaṁ mâkari do not set your heart on what is unreasonable); vatthunā (Instr.) because PvA.118; vatthuto (Abl.) on account of PvA.241. ‹-› 4. basis, foundation, seat, (objective) substratum, substance, element J.I,146 (kāyo paridevānaṁ v.); VbhA.404 (+ārammaṇa). See most of the cpds. -- 5. subjectmatter, subject, story, account SnA 4; DhA.II,66; PvA.77, 92, 263, 269. Cp. °gāthā & titles like Petavatthu, Vimānavatthu.

--kata made a foundation or basis of, practised thoroughly J.II,61; V,14 and passim (+bhāvita etc.). In phrase tālâvatthukata (=tāla avatthu kata) vatthu means foundation, basis, ground to feed and live on, thus “a palm deprived of its foundation”: see refs. under tāla. --gāthā the stanzas of the story, the introductory (explanatory, essential to its understanding) stanzas, something like “prologue” SnA 483, 575 (preceding Sn.699 & 976). --dasaka tenfold substance or material basis VbhA.22. --bhūta being an object, i. e. subject to J.V,210. --rūpa substance or substratum of matter, material form Vism.561, 564; VbhA.22, 172. --visadakiriyā clearing of the foundation or fundamentals, purification of the elements VbhA.283=DhsA.76 (°kiriyatā; trslⁿ Expos. 101 “cleansing of things or substance”); Vism.128; VbhA.276. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】位置，土地，田地，小块土地，物体，事物，物质，故事。 ~ka,【形】 (在【合】中) 有其地在，被发现在。 ~kata, 【形】以…为基础的，彻底地熟练的。 ~gāthā, 【阴】介绍的偈。 ~devatā, 【阴】神出没的地方。 ~vijjā, 【阴】（建筑）地点的科学（即：风水学）。 ~visadakiriyā,【阴】原则的清洁。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vatthuka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vatthu¹] 1. having a site or foundation or ground, in ucca° (high) and nīca° (low) Vin.II,117, 120; Mhvs 33, 87. -- 2. having its ground in, founded on, being of such & such a nature or composition S.IV,67 (vācā°); Ps.I,130 (micchādiṭṭhi°, correct in Index J.P.T.S. 1908!); Vbh.319 (uppanna°; +ārammaṇa), 392 (micchādiṭṭhi°); VbhA.403 (uppanna° etc.). (Page 599)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vatti: {'def': '[Vedic vakti, vac] to speak, say, call; pres. not found (for which vadati); fut. 1^st sg. vakkhāmi J.I,346; 3^rd vakkhati S.I,142; J.I,356; II,40; VI,352; VbhA.51; 1^st pl. vakkhāma S.IV,72; M.III,207; Vism.170, 446; 3^rd vakkhanti Vin.II,1; pte. fut. vakkhamāna PvA.18. -- aor. 1^st sg. avacaṁ J.III,280; DhA.III,194, & avocaṁ Th.2, 124; Vv 79⁷; S.I,10; DhA.III,285; 2^nd avaca Th.2, 415, avoca Dh.133, & avacāsi Vv 35⁷; 53⁹; 3^rd avaca J.I,294; Pv.II,3¹⁹; PvA.65 (mā a.); avoca Th.2, 494; S.I,150; Sn.p. 78; J.II,160; PvA.6, 31, 49, & avacāsi J.VI,525; 1^st pl. avacumha & avocumha M.II,91; III,15; 2^nd avacuttha Vin.I,75 (mā a.); II,297; J.II,48; DhA.I,73; IV,228, & avocuttha J.I,176; Miln.9; 3^rd pl. avacuṁ J.V,260, & avocuṁ M.II,147. -- inf. vattuṁ Sn.431; J.VI,351; Vism.522=VbhA.130 (vattukāma); SnA 414; DA.I,109; DhA.I,329; II,5. -- ger. vatvā SnA 398; PvA.68, 73, & vatvāna Sn.p. 78. ‹-› grd. vattabba Miln.276 (kiṁ vattabbaṁ what is there to be said about it? i. e. it goes without saying); SnA 123, 174, 178; PvA.12, 27, 92. -- ppr. med. vuccamāna Vin.I,60; III,221; PvA.13. -- Pass. vuccati D.I,168, 245; Dh.63; Mhvs 9, 9; 34, 81 (vuccate, v. l. uccate); J.I,129 (vuccare, 3^rd pl.); PvA.24, 34, 63, 76; -- pp. vutta (q. v.). -- Caus. vāceti to make speak, i. e. to read out; to cause to read; also to teach, to instruct Sn.1018, 1020; J.I,452 (read); PvA.97. -- pp. vācita (q. v.). ‹-› Desid. vavakkhati (see Geiger, P.Gr. § 184=Sk. vivakṣati) to wish to call D.II,256. Vattika=vatika Nd¹ 89 (having the habit of horses, elephants etc.). (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattikā: {'def': '【阴】皮带，灯芯。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】皮带，灯芯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vattin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. vṛt] engaged in, having power over, making, doing; only in cpds. cakka° & vasa° (q. v.). (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattita: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vatteti] that which goes on, round (of existence), revolution Miln.226. (Page 598)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vattitabba: {'def': '【潜】应该继续，应该实行，应该观察。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【义】应该继续，应该实行，应该观察。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vattu: {'def': '【阳】说者，讲者，说话的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】说者，讲者，说话的人。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vattuŋ: {'def': '(vadati 的【不】)。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vattuṁ: {'def': '(vadati 的【不】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vattī: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 持续者，实行者，使继续者。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 持续者，实行者，使继续者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vatva: {'def': '(vadati 的【独】), 告诉了，说了。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vatvā: {'def': '(vadati‘说’的【独】), 告诉了，说了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vavakassati: {'def': '[v+ava+kṛṣ, would correspond to Sk. vyavakṛṣyate, Pass.] to be drawn away, to be distracted or alienated (from); so is to be read at all passages, where it is either comb^d with avakassati or stands by itself. The readings are: Vin.II,204 (apakāsanti avapakāsanti) =A.V,74 (avakassanti vavakassanti); A.III,145 (bhikkhu n’âlaṁ saṅghamhā ‘vapakāsituṁ: read vavakāsituṁ or °kassituṁ), 393 (vapakassat’eva Satthārā, vapakassati garuṭṭhāniyehi). See also apakāsati, avakassati, avapakāsati. -- pp. vavakaṭṭha. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi+ava下+‹krs(拉)的【使】),【形】远离的、引离的。(vapakāsituṁ：read vavakāsituṁ or vavakassituṁ)。【过分】vavakaṭṭha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vavakaṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of vavakassati] drawn away, alienated; withdrawn, secluded DhA.II,103 (°kāya). (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vavakkhati: {'def': 'see vatti. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vavassagga: {'def': '[vi+ava+srj; Sk. vyavasarga] “letting go,” i. e. starting on something, endeavouring, resolution A.I,36; J.VI,188 (handā ti vavassagg’atthe nipāto); DA.I,237 (here handa is expl^d as vavasāy’atthe nipato). ‹-› Kern, Toev. s. v. wrongly “consent.” (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vavatthapeti: {'def': '(vi+ava下+ṭhā站+āpe), 安顿，定义，固定，指定。【过】vavatthapesi。【过分】vavatthāpita。【独】vavatthapetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& °ṭṭhāpeti [Caus. of vi+ava+ sthā] to determine, fix, settle, define, designate, point out J.IV,17 (disaṁ °tthapetvā getting his bearings); Vbh.193 sq.; Vism.182; SnA 67; KhA 11, 42, 89; VvA.220. -- ppr. Pass. vavatthāpiyamāna DhA.I,21, 35. -- pp. vavatthita & vavatthāpita. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vi + ava + ṭhā + āpe), 安顿，定义，固定，指定。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~thāpita。【独】 ~petvā。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vavattheti: {'def': '(vi+ava下+ṭhā+e), 分析，定义。【过】vavatthesi。【过分】vavatthita。【独】vavatthetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vi + ave + ṭhā + e), 分析，定义。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 vavatthita。【独】 ~thetvā。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[unusual pres. (Med.-Pass.) formation fr. vi+ ava+ sthā, formed perhaps after vavatthita] to be determined or analysed Ps.I,53, 76, 84. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vavatthita: {'def': '[pp. of vi+ava+ sthā, cp. vavatthapeti & late Sk. vyavasthita “determination”] 1. entered on, arranged, fixed, determined, settled M.III,25; DhsA.36. -- 2. separated (opp. sambhinna) Vin.II,67 sq. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vavatthāna: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+ava+ sthā; cp. late Sk. vyavasthāna which occurs in Ep. Sk. in meaning “stay”] determination, resolution, arrangement, fixing, analysis Ps.I,53; Vin.IV,289; Vism.111, 236 (=nimitta), 347 (defⁿ); Miln.136; KhA 23. (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vavatthāpana: {'def': '【中】定义，决心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】定义，决心。(p280)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vavatthāpita: {'def': '[pp. of vavatthāpeti] arranged, settled, established Miln.345 (su°). (Page 604)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaya: {'def': '² [Sk. vyaya, vi+i; occasionally as vyaya in Pāli as well] 1. loss, want, expense (opp. āya) A.IV,282 (bhogānaṁ); Sn.739; PvA.130. --avyayena safely D.I,72. ‹-› 2. decay (opp. uppāda) D.II,157=J.I,392 (aniccā vata saṅkhārā uppāda-vaya-dhammino); S.IV,28; A.I,152, 299.

--karaṇa expense, expenditure J.IV,355; Vin.II,321 (Sam. Pās on C. V, VI,4, 6, explaining veyyāsika or veyyāyika of Vin.II,157). (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (& vayo) (nt.) [Vedic vayas vitality, age; to be distinguished from another vayas meaning “fowl.” The latter is probably meant at Dhtp 232 (& Dhtm 332) with defⁿ “gamane.” The etym. of vayo (age) is connected with Sk. vīra=Lat. vir. man, hero, vīs strength; Gr. i)ζ sinew, i)/fios strong; Sk. vīḍayati to make fast, also veśati; whereas vayas (fowl) corresponds with Sk. vayasa (bird) & viḥ to Gr. ai)etόs eagle, oi)wnόs bird of prey, Lat. avis bird] age, especially young age, prime, youth; meaning “old age” when characterized as such or contrasted to youth (the ord. term for old age being jarā). Three “ages” or “periods of life” are usually distinguished, viz. paṭhama° youth, majjhima° middle age, pacchima° old age, e. g. at J.I,79; Vism.619; DhA.III,133. -- vayo anuppatta one who has attained old age, old D.I,48 (=pacchima-vayaṁ anuppatta DA.I,143); Sn.pp. 50, 92. -- Cp. Dh.260; J.I,138 (vayo-harā kesā); Vism.619 (the 3 vayas with subdivisions into dasakas or decades of life); Mhvs 2, 26 (ekūnatiṁso vayasā 29 years of age); PvA.5 (paṭhama-vaye when quite young), 36 (id.; just grown up). In cpds. vaya°.

--kalyāṇa charm of youth DhA.I,387. --ppatta come of age, fit to marry (at 16) VvA.120; PvA.3, 112; ThA.266. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sk.vayas),【阳】【中】(mano-group)衰老，损失，衰退，开支。vayakaraṇa,【中】开支。vayakalyāṇa,【中】年轻的魅力。vayaṭṭha,【形】成熟的。vayappatta,【形】成年的，适合结婚的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano-组) 衰老，损失，衰退，开支。 ~karaṇa, 【中】开支。 ~kalyāṇa, 【中】年轻的魅力。 ~ṭṭha, 【形】成熟的。 ~ppatta, 【形】成年的，适合结婚的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vayassa: {'def': '【阳】朋友。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'ada【阳】朋友。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. vayasya] a friend J.II,31; III,140; V,157. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vayaṁ: {'def': 'is the Sk. form of the Nom. pl. of pers. pron. ahaṁ, represented in Pāli by mayaṁ (q. v.). The form vayaṁ only in grammarians, mentioned also by Müller, P.Gr. p. 87 as occurring in Dh.(?). The enclitic form for Acc. Gen. & Dat. is no, found e. g. at Pv.I,5³ (gloss for vo; C. amhākaṁ); J.II,153, 352; DhA.I,101; PvA.20, 73. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vayha: {'def': '(nt.) & Vayhā (f.) [grd. formation fr. vah; cp. Sk. vahya (nt.)] a vehicle, portable bed, litter Vin.IV,339 (enum^d under yāna together with ratha sakaṭa sandamānikā sivikā & pāṭaṅkī); J.VI,500 (f.), with sivikā & ratha. (Page 602)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】交通工具，垃圾。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】交通工具，抬轿，垃圾。Vayhā,【阴】(grd. formation fr. vah; cp. Sk. vahya (nt.)] a vehicle, portable bed, litter)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vayohara: {'def': '【形】夺取生命的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】夺取生命的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vayovuddha: {'def': '【形】年老的。(p279)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】年老的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vañcaka: {'def': '【阳】欺骗，欺诈。 ~cana, 【中】 ~canā, 【阴】欺骗，诡计。 ~canika, 【形】欺骗的。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹vañcana),【阳】欺骗(deceiving)，骗子(a cheat)。vañcana,【中】vañcanā,【阴】欺骗，诡计。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vañcana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vañc, cp. Epic Sk. vañcana] deception, delusion, cheating, fraud, illusion D.I,5; III,176; A.II,209; Sn.242; Pv III,9⁵; Pug.19; J.IV,435; DhsA.363 (for māyā Dhs.1059); DA.I,79; DhA.III,403; PvA.193. --vañcana in lit. meaning of vañcati 1 is found in avañcana not tottering J.I,214. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vañcanika: {'def': '(‹vañcana)﹐【形】欺骗的(deceiving)。【阳】骗子(a cheat)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vañcana] deceiving; a cheat D.III,183; Th.1, 940; Miln.290. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vañcaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vañcana, cp. MVastu II.145: vañcanīya] deceiving, deluding Th.2, 490. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vañcati: {'def': '[vañc: see etym. under vaṅka. -- The Dhtp distinguishes two roots vañc, viz. “gamane” (46) and “palambhane” (543), thus giving the lit. & the fig. meanings] 1. to walk about J.I,214 (inf. °ituṁ=pādacāra-gamanena gantuṁ C.). -- 2. Caus. vañceti to cheat, deceive, delude, elude D.I,50; Sn.100, 129, 356; J.III,420 (aor. avañci=vañcesi C.); VI,403 (°etu-kāma); Pv III,4²; Miln.396; Mhvs 25, 69 (tomaraṁ avañcayi). ‹-› pp. vañcita. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vañceti: {'def': '(vañc + e), 欺骗，行骗。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~cita。【现分】 ~centa。【独】 ~cetvā。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vañc欺骗+e), 欺骗，行骗。【过】vañesi。【过分】vañcita。【现分】vañcenta。【独】vañcetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vañcita: {'def': '[pp. of vañceti] deceived, cheated J.I,287 (vañcit’ammi=vañcitā amhi). (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vañjha: {'def': '【形】不育的。vañjhā,【阴】不育的女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic & later Sk. bandhya] barren, sterile D.I,14, 56; M.I,271; S.II,29 (a°); IV,169; V,202 (a°); Pv III,4⁵ (a°=anipphala C.); J.II,406 (°sūkariyo: so read for vajjha°); Miln.95; Vism.508 (°bhāva); DhA.I,45 (°itthi); DA.I,105; PvA.31, 82; VvA.149; Sdhp.345 (a°). (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不育的。 ~jhā, 【阴】不育的女人。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vañjula: {'def': 'see vajuḷa. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaŋsa: {'def': '【阳】 1. 种族，世系，家庭。 2. 印度箣竹（主要分布于东西两半球的热带和亚热带的一种大木本植物 (Bambusa arundinacea)，有中空的茎，直径达五或六英寸，并且坚硬而结实，用来做家具、炊具和建筑结构架；小竹竿也可用〔如做手杖和长笛〕，幼苗可当食物）。 3. 竹笛。 ~kāḷīra,【阳】竹笋。 ~ja, 【形】出生在某氏族或种族中。 ~vaṇṇa, 【阳】天青石，青金石，天青石色。 ~āgata, 【形】从父亲传到儿子的。~ānupālaka, 【形】保存世系的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaŋsati: {'def': '【形】属于氏族或种族的。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaḍḍha: {'def': 'vaḍḍhaka, 【形】增大的，增加的。 ~na, 【中】生长，增加，扩大。 ~naka, 【形】增加的，任职的，服役的。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'vaḍḍhaka,【形】增大的，增加的。vaḍḍhana,【中】生长，增加，扩大。vaḍḍhanaka,【形】增加的，任职的，服役的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vṛdh] wealth, riches J.III,131 (vaḍḍhaṁ vaḍḍhataṁ, imper.). Or should we read vaṭṭa? ‹-› Vaḍḍha is used as Np. at KhA 119, perhaps in meaning “prosperous.” (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḍḍhaka: {'def': '[fr. vaḍḍheti] 1. augmenting, increasing, i. e. looking after the welfare of somebody or something, one who superintends J.I,2 (rāsi° the steward of an estate). -- 2. a maker of, in special sense (cīvara° robecutter, perhaps fr. vardh to cut: see vaddheti) a tailor J.I,220. (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḍḍhaki: {'def': '(&Vaḍḍhakī) [cp. Epic & Class. Sk. vardhaki & vardhakin; perhaps from vardh to cut: see vaddheti] a carpenter, builder, architect, mason. On their craft and guilds see Fick, Sociale Gliederung 181 sq.; Mrs. Rh. D. Cambridge Hist. Ind. I.206. -- The word is specially characteristic of the Jātakas and other popular (later) literature J.I,32, 201, 247; II,170; VI,332 sq., 432; Ap. 51; DhA.I,269; IV,207; Vism.94; PvA.141; Mhbv 154. --iṭṭha° a stonemason Mhvs 35, 102; nagara° the city architect Miln.331, 345; brāhmaṇa° a brahmin carpenter J.IV,207; mahā° chief carpenter, master builder Vism.463. In metaphor taṇhā the artificer lust DhA.III,128.

--gāma a carpenter village J.II,18, 405; IV,159. (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḍḍhakī: {'def': '【阳】木匠。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】木匠(carpenter)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaḍḍhamāna: {'def': '(nt.) at Dpvs XI.33 is probably equivalent to vaḍḍhana (6) in special sense at Mhvs 23, 33, and designates a (pair of) special (ly costly) garment(s). One might think of meaning vaḍḍheti [BSk. vardhate] “to bid higher (at a sale),” as in Divy 403; AvŚ I.36, and explain as “that which causes higher bidding,” i. e. very precious. The passage is doubtful. It may simply mean “costly” (belonging to nandiyāvaṭṭaṁ); or is it to be read as vaṭṭamāna? (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḍḍhamānaka: {'def': '(adj.) [ppr. of vaḍḍheti+ka] growing, increasing, getting bigger; only in phrase vaḍḍhamānaka-cchāyāya (Loc.) with growing shade, as the shadows lengthened, when evening drew near DhA.I,96, 416; II,79; Mhvs 19, 40. (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḍḍhana: {'def': '(nt. & adj.) [fr. vaḍḍheti; see also vaddhana] 1. increasing, augmenting, fostering; increase, enlargement, prolongation M.I,518 (hāyana° decrease & increase); J.III,422 (kula°, spelling ddh); Mhvs 35, 73 (āyussa); DhsA.406; PvA.31; Miln.320 (bala° strengthincreasing); Dhtp 109; Sdhp.361. -- 2. indulgence in, attachment; serving, practising Sn.1084 (takka°); J.I,146 (kaṭasi°, q. v. & cp. vaḍḍheti 6); Vism.111 (°âvaḍḍhana), 152, 320. Here belong the phrases raja° & loka°. -- 3. arrangement J.VI,11 (paṭhavi-vaḍḍhanaka-kamma the act of attending to, i. e. smoothing the ground). -- 4. serving for, enhancing, favouring Pv III,3⁶ (rati-nandi°). -- 5. potsherd [connected with vardh? See vaddheti] J.III,226 (C. kaṭhalika; uncertain). -- 6. a kind of garment, as puṇṇa° (full of costliness? but perhaps not connected with vaḍḍh° at all) Mhvs 23, 33 & 37 (where C. expl^s: anagghāni evaṁnāmikāni vattha-yugāni). Cp. vaḍḍhamāna. (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḍḍhanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vaḍḍhana, cp. vaḍḍheti 4] serving, in f. °ikā a serving (of food), a dish (bhatta°) DhA 188 (so read for vaḍḍhinikā). (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḍḍhati: {'def': '(vaḍḍh+a), 生长，兴隆，种植。【过】vaḍḍhi。【过分】vaḍḍhita。【现分】vaḍḍhanta, vaḍḍhamāna。【独】vaḍḍhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic vardhati, vṛdh, cp. Av. v∂r∂daiti to increase. To this root belongs P. uddha “high up” (=Gr. orqόs straight). Def^d at Dhtp 109 simply as “vaḍḍhane”] primary meaning “to increase” (trs. & intrs.); hence: to keep on, to prosper, to multiply, to grow S.I,15 (read vaḍḍh° for vaṭṭ°); II,206 (vaṇṇena); IV,73, 250; A.V,249 (paññāya); Sn.329 (paññā ca sutañ ca); J.III,131 (porāṇaṁ vaḍḍhaṁ vaḍḍhataṁ, imper. med. 3^rd sg.); V,66 (sadā so vaḍḍhate rājā sukka-pakkhe va candimā); Pv.I,1² (dātā puññena v.); Pug.71; Miln.9; Mhvs 7, 68 (putta-dhītāhi vaḍḍhitvā having numerous sons & daughters); 22, 73 (ubho vaḍḍhiṁsu dārakā, grew up); SnA 319; PvA.94. -- ppr. vaḍḍhamāna (1) thriving KhA 119 (read as Vaḍḍh°, Np.); -- (2) increasing J.I,199 (putta-dhītāhi); Mhvs 23, 34 (°chāyāyaṁ as the shadows increased). -- See also pari°. -- pp. vaḍḍha, vaddha, vuḍḍha, vuddha, buḍḍha. -- Caus. I. vaḍḍheti, in many shades of meaning, all based upon the notion of progressive motion. Thus to be translated in any of the foll. senses: to increase, to make move on (cp. vv. ll. vaṭṭeti), to bring on to, to further; to take an interest in, to indulge in, practise; to be busy with, cause to prosper; to arrange; to make for; and in a general sense “to make” (cp. derivation vaḍḍhaka “maker,” i. e. tailor; vaḍḍhaki id., i. e. carpenter; vaḍḍhana, etc.). The latter development into “make” is late. -- 1. to increase, to raise Sn.275 (rajaṁ); DA.I,115; Mhvs 29, 66 (maṅgalaṁ to raise the chant); PvA.168 (+brūheti). -- 2. to cultivate (vipassanaṁ insight) J.I,117 (aor. °esi); PvA.14. -- 3. to rear, to bring up Mhvs 35, 103 (aor. vaḍḍhesi). -- 4. (with ref. to food) to get ready, arrange, serve in (Loc.) J.III,445 (pātiyā on the dish); IV,67 (karoṭiyaṁ), 391. -- 5. to exalt J.I,338 (akulīne vaḍḍhessati). -- 6. to participate in, to practise, attend to, to serve (Acc.) S.II,109 (tanhaṁ); A.II,54 (kaṭasiṁ to serve the cemetery, i. e. to die again and again: see refs. under kaṭasi); Vism.111 (kasiṇaṁ), 152. -- 7. to make move on, to set into motion (for vaṭṭeti?), in tasaraṁ v. SnA 265, 266. -- 8. to take up Mhvs 26, 10 (kuntaṁ). -- pp. vaḍḍhita. -- Caus. II. vaḍḍhāpeti: 1. to cause to be enlarged Mhvs 35, 119. ‹-› 2. to cause to be brought up or reared J.I,455. -- 3. to have attended to Vin.II,134 (massuṁ). -- 4. to cause to be made up (of food) J.IV,68. (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vaḍḍh + a), 生长，兴隆。【过】 vaḍḍhi。【过分】 ~ḍhita。【现分】 ~ḍhanta, ~ḍhamāna。【独】 ~ḍhitvā。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaḍḍheti: {'def': '(vaḍḍh + e), 增加，培养，养育，教育，准备好（食物），任职，开动。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ḍhita。【现分】 ~ḍhenta。【独】 ~ḍhetvā。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vaḍḍh +e), 增加，培养，养育，教育，准备好(食物)，任职，开动。【过】vaḍḍhesi。【过分】vaḍḍhita。【现分】vaḍḍhenta。【独】vaḍḍhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaḍḍhi: {'def': '【阴】增加，生长，利润，福利，利息。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. vṛdh, Vedic vṛddhi refreshment etc., which is differentiated in Pāli into vuddhi & vaḍḍhi] 1. increase, growth (cp. Cpd. 251 sq.) S.IV,250 (ariya°); J.II,426 (=phāti); Miln.109 (guṇa°); DhsA.327; DhA.III,335 (avaḍḍhi=parihāni). -- 2. welfare, good fortune, happiness J.V,101; VI,330. -- 3. (as t. t.) profit, interest (on money, esp. loans) Th.2, 444 (=iṇa-vaḍḍhi ThA.271); DA.I,212, 270; VbhA.256 (in simile); SnA 179 (°gahaṇa). (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】增加，生长，利润，福利，利息。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaḍḍhika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vaḍḍhi] leading to increase, augmenting, prosperous Miln.351 (ekanta°, equal to aparihāniya). (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḍḍhita: {'def': '[pp. of vaḍḍheti] 1. increased, augmented; raised, enlarged; big Th.1, 72 (su-su°); DA.I,115; DhsA.188, 364; J.V,340 (°kāya). -- 2. grown up DhA.I,126. ‹-› 3. brought up, reared J.I,455. -- 4. served, indulged, supplied: see kaṭasi° (S.II,178 e. g.). (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḷa: {'def': 'at Vism.312 is to be read vāḷa (snake), in phrase vāḷehi upadduta “molested by snakes.” (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḷabhā: {'def': '[=vaḷavā?] is not clear; it occurs only in the expression (is it found in the Canon?) vaḷabhā-mukha a submarine fire or a purgatory Abhp 889. The Epic Sk. form is vaḍavā-mukha (Halāyudha I.70; III,1). (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḷabhī: {'def': '(f.) [cp. late (dial.) Sk. vaḍabhī] a roof; only in cpd. °ratha a large covered van (cp. yogga¹) M.I,175 (sabba-setena vaḷabhī-rathena Sāvatthiyā niyyāti divā divaṁ); II,208 (id.), but vaḷavābhi-rathena); J.VI,266 (vaḷabhiyo=bhaṇḍa-sakaṭiyo C.). The expression reminds of vaḷavā-ratha. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḷabāmukha: {'def': '【中】海底火。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】海底火。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaḷavā: {'def': '(梵【阳】Vaḍavā、Vaḍabā；梵【阴】Vāḍavā、Vāḍabā), 【阳】马(horse)。sabbasetena vaḷavābhirathena, 一切皆白的马车。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】母马。(p281)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic vaḍavā] a mare, a common horse D.I,5; Pug.58; Mhvs 10, 54; J.I,180; VI,343; DhA.I,399; IV,4 (assatarā vaḷavāya gadrabhena jātā).

--ratha a carriage drawn by a mare D.I,89, 105, 106. The expression reminds of vaḷabhī-ratha. (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḷīmant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vali] having wrinkles Th.2, 269 (pl. valīmatā). (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaḷīna: {'def': 'at J.VI,90 is not clear (in phrase jaṭaṁ vaḷīnaṁ paṅkagataṁ). The C. reads valinaṁ, paraphrased by ākulaṁ. Fausböll suggests malinaṁ. Should we accept reading valinaṁ? It would then be Acc. sg. of valin (q. v.). (Page 603)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṁsa: {'def': '【阳】1.种族，世系，家庭。2.印度箣竹(主要分布於东西两半球的热带和亚热带的一种大木本植物 (Bambusa arundinacea)，有中空的茎，直径达五或六英寸，并且坚硬而结实，用来做家具、炊具和建筑结构架；小竹竿也可用〔如做手杖和长笛〕，幼苗可当食物)。3.竹笛。vaṁsakāḷīra,【阳】竹笋。vaṁsaja,【形】出生在某氏族或种族中。vaṁsavaṇṇa,【阳】天青石、青金石(lapis lazuli)，天青石色。vaṁsāgata,【形】从父亲传到儿子的。vaṁsānupālaka,【形】保存世系的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic vaṁśa reed, bamboo (R.V,)] 1. a bamboo Sn.38 (vaṁso visālo va; vaṁso expl^d at Nd² 556 as “veḷugumba,” at SnA 76 as “veḷu”), ibid. (°kaḷīra); J.VI,57; Vism.255 (°kaḷīra); KhA 50 (id.). -- 2. race, lineage, family A.II,27 (ariya° of noble family); S.V,168 (caṇḍāla°); J.I,89, 139; IV,390 (caṇḍāla°); V,251 (uju°); Mhvs 4, 5 (pitu-ghātaka-vaṁso a parricidal race). -- 3. tradition, hereditary custom, usage, reputation Miln.148 (ācariya°), 190 (Tathāgatānaṁ); KhA 12 (Buddha°); Dpvs 18, 3 (saddhamma°-kovidā therā). --vaṁsaṁ nāseti to break family tradition J.V,383; vaṁsaṁ ucchindati id. J.V,383; or upacchindati J.IV,63; opp. patiṭṭhāpeti to establish the reputation J.V,386. -- 4. dynasty Mhvs 36, 61 (kassa v. ṭhassati).-- 5. a bamboo flute, fife Miln.31; VvA.210. -- 6. a certain game, at D.I,6 in enumⁿ of pastimes and tricks (caṇḍālavaṁsa-dhopana), a passage which shows an old corruption. Bdhgh at DA.I,84 takes each word separately and expl^s vaṁsa as “veṇuṁ ussāpetvā kīḷanaṁ” (i. e. a game consisting in raising a bamboo; is it climbing a pole? Cp. vaṁsa-ghatikā “a kind of game” Divy 475), against Dial. I.9 “acrobatic feats by Caṇḍālas.” Cp. J.IV,390 in same passage. Franke (Dīgha trslⁿ) has “bamboo-tricks”; his conjecture as “vaṁsa-dhamanaṁ,” playing the bamboo pipe (cp. Miln.31: “vaṁsadhamaka”), as oldest reading is to be pointed out. ‹-› On vaṁsa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 134.

--āgata come down fr. father to son, hereditary Mhvs 23, 85. --ânupālaka guarding tradition Sdhp.474 (ariya°). --ânurakkhaka preserving the lineage, carrying on the tradition J.IV,444; Vism.99 (+paveṇi-pālaka); DhA.III,386. --coraka N. of a certain kind of reed (cp. coraka: plant used for perfume) J.V,406 (C. for veḷuka). --ja belonging to a race Mhvs 1, 1 (suddha°). --ñña born of good family A.II,27. --dhara upholding tradition Miln.164. --dharaṇa id. Miln.226. --nalaka bamboo reed KhA 52, 59 (with note Sn.Index p. 870: naḷaka). --nāḷa id. Miln.102. --rāga the colour of bamboo, a term for the veḷuriya gem J.IV,141. --vaṇṇa the veḷuriya gem Abhp 491. (Page 590)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṁsati: {'def': '【形】氏族或种族的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṁsika: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. vaṁsa] descended from, belonging to a family (of) S.V,168 (caṇḍāla°). (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṃsa: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Vatsa] 跋蹉 [十六大国の一, 首都は Kosambī].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Vaṅga: {'def': 'at DA.I,223 is syn. with kaṇa and means some kind of fault or flaw. It is probably a wrong spelling for vaṅka. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】拔沙(今在孟加拉国Bangladesh)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】孟加拉国。(p275)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṅgati: {'def': '[cp. *Sk. vaṅgati, to which belongs vañjula. Idg. *ǔag to bend; cp. Lat. vagor to roam, vagus=vague; Ohg. wankon to waver] to go, walk, waver; found only in Dhtp (No. 29) as root vaṅg in meaning “gamana.” Perhaps confused with valg; see vaggati. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṅgīsa: {'def': 'n. [〃] ワンギーサ, 鵬耆舍 [仏弟子中, 弁才第一, 詩人].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Vaṅka: {'def': '【形】弯曲的，不诚实的。【中】钩，鱼钩。 ~ghasta, 【形】吞了钩的。 ~tā, 【阴】弯曲。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】扭曲的，不诚实的。【中】鈎，鱼鈎。vaṅkaghasta,【形】吞了鈎的。vaṅkatā,【阴】弯曲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [cp. Vedic vaṅka & vakra bending; also Ved. vaṅku moving, fluttering, walking slant; vañcati to waver, walk crooked. Cp. Lat. con-vexus “convex,” Ags. wōh “wrong,” Goth. wāhs; Ohg. wanga cheek, and others. -- The Dhtp 5 gives “koṭilya” as meaning of vaṅk. Another Pāli form is vakka (q. v.). The Prk. forms are both vakka & vaṅka: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 74], I. (adj.). -- 1. crooked, bent, curved M.I,31 (+jimha); S.IV,118 (read v-daṇḍā); Vin.II,116 (suttā vaṅkā honti); J.I,9 (of kāja); IV,362 (°daṇḍa), PvA.51. With ref. to a kind of vīṇā at VvA.281. -- 2. (fig.) crooked, deceitful, dishonest J.III,313 (of crows: kākānaṁ nāmaṁ C.); VI,524; Pv IV.1³⁴ (a°); Sn.270 (probably to be read dhaṅka as SnA 303, =kāka). -- 3. doubtful, deceitful, deceptive, i. e. haunted Vv 84³, cp. VvA.334. -- II. (m.) -- 1. a bend, nook, curve (of ponds) J.II,189; VI,333 (sahassa°). -- 2. a hook J.V,269. -- 3. a fishhook D.II,266; Th.1, 749; J.VI,437. -- On vaṅka in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

--aṅgula a crooked finger A.III,6. --âtivaṅkin having curves upon curves (in its horns), with very crooked antlers J.I,160 (said of a deer). --gata running in bends or crooked (of a river) J.I,289. --ghasta (a fish) having swallowed the hook D.II,266; J.VI,113. --chidda a crooked hole DA.I,112. --dāṭha having a bent fang (of a boar) J.II,405. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṅkaka: {'def': '翻筋斗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vaṅka] a sort of toy: Rh. D. “toyplough” (Dial. I.10); Kern “miniature fish-hook” (Toev. s. v.). Rh. D. derives it fr. Sk. vṛka (see P. vaka¹). Bdhgh at DA.I,86 takes it as “toy-plough.” See D.I,6; Vin.II,10 (v. l. vaṅgaka & vaṅkata); III,180 (v.l. caṅgaka); A.V,203 (T. vaṅka; v. l. vaṅkaka); Miln.229. At ThA.15 vaṅkaka is used in general meaning of “something crooked” (to explain Th.2, 11 khujja), which is specified at Th.1, 43 as sickle, plough and spade. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṅkatā: {'def': '(f.) & Vaṅkatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. vaṅka] crookedness A 1 112 (tt); Dhs.1339; VbhA.494. (Page 591)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṅkeyya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vaṅka] “of a crooked kind,” crooked-like; nt. twisting, crookedness, dishonesty M.I,340; A.IV,189; V,167. (Page 592)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇa: {'def': '【中】伤口，痛处。 ~colaka, 【中】纱布。 ~paṭikamma, 【中】创伤的治愈。 ~bandhana, 【中】伤口的绷带。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt. & m.) [cp. Vedic vraṇa; Serbian rana; Obulg. var̄e, both “wound”] a wound, sore Vin.I,205 (m.), 218 (vaṇo rūḷho); III,36 (m; aṅgajāte), 117 (aṅgajāte); S.IV,177 (vaṇaṁ ālimpeti); A.V,347 sq., 350 sq.; 359; Nd² 540; PugA 212 (purāṇa-vaṇa-sadisa-citto); DhA.II,165 (°ṁ bandhati to bandage); VvA.77; PvA.80; Sdhp.395. On vaṇa in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 132.

--ālepana putting ointment on a sore SnA 58 (in sim.). --coḷaka a rag for dressing a wound Vism.342; VbhA.361. --paṭikamma restoration or healing of a wound DhA.II,164. --paṭicchādana dressing of a wound DhA.I,375. --paṭṭa id., bandage SnA 100. --bandhana id. Vin.I,205. --mukha the opening of a sore A.IV,386 (nava °āni); VvA.77 (id.). (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】伤口，痛处。vaṇacolaka,【中】纱布。vaṇapaṭikamma,【中】创伤的治愈。vaṇabandhana,【中】伤口的绷带。vaṇamukha﹐【中】疮口。九个疮口(nava vaṇamukhāni)，两眼、两耳、两鼻孔、口、大小便道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṇeti: {'def': '(Caus. of van (see etym. under vana2), cp. vaṇi (vani). It may be derived directly fr. vr, vrṇāti=P. vuṇāti, as shown by vaṇimhase. A DeNom. fr. vani is vanīyati)希望，请求(to wish, desire, ask, beg J.V.27 (spelt vaṇṇeti; C. expls as vāreti icchati); pres. med. 1st pl. vaṇimhase (=Sk. vrṇīmahe) J.II.137 (=icchāma C.). As vanayati at KhA 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṁ).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of van (see etym. under vana²), cp. vaṇi (vani). It may be derived directly fr. vṛ, vṛṇāti=P. vuṇāti, as shown by vaṇimhase. A denom. fr. vani is vanīyati] to wish, desire, ask, beg J.V,27 (spelt vaṇṇeti; C. expl^s as vāreti icchati); pres. med. 1^st pl. vaṇimhase (=Sk. vṛṇīmahe) J.II,137 (=icchāma C.). As vanayati at KhA 111 (vanayatī ti vanaṁ). (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇi: {'def': '(f.) [fr. van to desire] wish, request Ud.53; J.IV,404 (=yācana C.); cp. J.P.T.S. 1891, 18 See vana² & cp. vaṇeti. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇibbaka: {'def': '[vaṇibba+ka. The form *vaṇibba, according to Geiger, P.Gr. § 46¹, distorted fr. vaṇiya, thus “travelling merchant, wayfarer.” Spelling wavers between vaṇibb° & vanibb°. The BSk. form is vanīpaka, e. g. at AvŚ I.248; II,37; Divy 83; occurring also as vaṇīyaka at Divy 83] a wayfarer, beggar, pauper Sn.100 (ṇ); J.IV,403, 406 (n); V,172 (=bhojaputta C.; n); VI,232 (n); DA.I,298 (ṇ); PvA.78 (n), 112 (n); VvA.5 (n). Often comb^d with similar terms in phrase kapaṇ’addhika [iddhika] vaṇibbaka-yācakā indigents, tramps, wayfarers & beggars, e. g. D.I,137 (ṇ); Miln.204 (ṇ); DhA.I,105 (ṇ). Other spurious forms are vaṇidīpaka PvA.120; vanīpaka Cp. I.4⁹. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】贫民。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】贫民。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṇibbin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. *vaṇibba] begging, a beggar, tramp J.III,312; IV,410 (=yācanto C.). Spelling at both places n. See also vanin. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇijjā: {'def': '【阴】贸易，交易。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】贸易，交易，买卖(台语：生意sing1li2)。Satthavaṇijjā, sattavaṇijjā, maṁsavaṇijjā, majjavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā-- Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā”ti.(买卖武器，买卖人口(satta已执著者)，买卖肉，贩卖醉品，买卖毒。诸比丘！此等五买卖不应被优婆塞作。)( A.5.177./III,208.) Satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṁ kāretvā tassa vikkayo.(买卖武器：他制作武器之后，售卖。) Sattavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo.(买卖人口：(买卖人) Maṁsavaṇijjāti sūkaramigādayo posetvā tesaṁ vikkayo.(买卖肉：据有猪、野兽(等)，饲养之后，他售卖。) Majjavaṇijjāti yaṁkiñci majjaṁ kāretvā tassa vikkayo. (买卖酒：他制作任何酒之后，售卖) Visavaṇijjāti visaṁ kāretvā tassa vikkayo.(买卖毒：他制作毒之后，售卖) Iti sabbampi imaṁ vaṇijjaṁ neva attanā kātuṁ, na pare samādapetvā kāretuṁ vaṭṭati. (如此一切买卖，非自己制作，非教唆他人制作的话，则不在此限。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic vaṇijyā, fr. vaṇij° (vaṇik) merchant, cp. vāṇija & vaṇibbaka] trade, trading M.II,198; Sn.404 (payojaye dhammikaṁ so vaṇijjaṁ); A.II,81 sq.; Pv.I,5⁶ (no trade among the Petas); J.I,169; PvA.47 (tela°); Sdhp.332, 390. -- Five trades must not be carried on by lay followers of the Buddha, viz. sattha° trade in swords, satta° in living beings, maṁsa° in meat, majja° in intoxicants, visa° in poisons A.III,208, quoted at DA.I,235 and SnA 379. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇippatha: {'def': '【阳】正在进行贸易的国家。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】正在进行贸易的国家。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṇippattha: {'def': '[vaṇik+patha, in meaning patha 2] trading, trade Vin.I,229=D.II,87=Ud.88 (with ref. to Pāṭaliputta). (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇita: {'def': '【过分】已受伤。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已受伤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of *vaṇeti, denom. fr. vaṇa] wounded, bruised Pv.II,2⁴; J.I,150; Sdhp.395. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇīyati: {'def': 'see vanīyati. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇa: {'def': '【阳】颜色，外表，肤色，种类，印度的世袭阶级，音色，质量。 ~ka,【中】染料。 ~kasiṇa, 【中】（修禅用的）颜色器具。 ~da, ~dada, 【形】给颜色的，给美丽的。 ~dhātu, 【阴】外表的情况，颜色。 ~pokkharatā,【阴】肤色的美丽。 ~vantu, 【形】富有色彩的。 ~vādī, 【阳】谈论个人的德行。 ~sampanna, 【形】赋有美丽的，赋有颜色的。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】顔色，外表，肤色，种类，印度的世袭阶级，音色，特质。vaṇṇaka,【中】染料(paint, rouge)。vaṇṇakasiṇa,【中】(修禅用的)顔色器具。vaṇṇada, vaṇṇadada,【形】给顔色的，给美丽的。vaṇṇadhātu,【阴】外表的情况，顔色。vaṇṇapokkharatā,【阴】肤色的美丽。Vaṇṇarūpa(varṇarūpa),【中】显色(青、黄、赤、白、影、光、明、暗、云、烟、尘、雾)。vaṇṇavantu,【形】富有色彩的。vaṇṇavādī,【阳】谈论个人的德行。vaṇṇasampanna,【形】赋有美丽的，赋有顔色的。cattāro vaṇṇā, 四种姓(印度社会制度上之四大种姓阶级)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic varṇa, of vṛ: see vuṇāti. Customary definition as “vaṇṇane” at Dhtp 572] appearance etc. (lit. “cover, coating”). There is a considerable fluctuation of meaning, especially between meanings 2, 3, 4. One may group as follows. -- 1. colour Sn.447 (meda°); S.V,216 (chavi° of the skin); A.III,324 (saṅkha°); Th.1, 13 (nīl’abbha°); Vv 45¹⁰ (danta°=ivory white); Pv IV.3⁹; DhA.II,3 (aruṇa°); SnA 319 (chavi°); VvA.2 (vicitta°); PvA.215. Six colours are usually enum^d as vaṇṇā, viz. nīla pīta lohitaka odāta mañjeṭṭha pabhassara Ps.I,126; cp. the 6 colours under rūpa at Dhs.617 (where kāḷaka for pabbassara); J.I,12 (chabbaṇṇa-buddha-rasmiyo). Groups of five see under pañca 3 (cp. J.I,222). --dubbaṇṇa of bad colour, ugly S.I,94; A.V,61; Ud.76; Sn.426; It.99; Pug.33; VvA.9; PvA.32, 68. Opp. suvaṇṇa of beautiful colour, lovely A.V,61; It.99. Also as term for “silver.” -- As t. t. in descriptions or analyses (perhaps better in meaning “appearance”) in Abl. vaṇṇato by colour, with saṇṭhānato and others: Vism.184 (“kāḷa vā odāta vā maṅguracchavi vā”), 243=VbhA.225; Nett 27. -- 2. appearance S.I,115 (kassaka-vaṇṇaṁ abhinimminitvā); J.I,84 (id. with māṇavaka°); Pv.II,1¹⁰ (=chavi-vaṇṇa PvA.71); III,3² (kanakassa sannibha); VvA.16; cp. °dhātu. -- 3. lustre, splendour (cp. next meaning) D.III,143 (suvaṇṇa°, or=1); Pv.II,9⁶² (na koci devo vaṇṇena sambuddhaṁ atirocati); III,9¹ (suriya°); Vv 29¹ (=sarīr’obhāsa VvA.122); PvA.10 (suvaṇṇa°), 44. -- 4. beauty (cp. vaṇṇavant) D.II,220 (abhikkanta°); M.I,142 (id.); D.III,68 (āyu+); Pv.II,9¹⁰ (=rūpa-sampatti PvA.117). Sometimes comb^d with other ideals, as (in set of 5): āyu, sukha, yasa, sagga A.III,47; or āyu, yasa, sukha, ādhipacca J.IV,275, or (4): āyu, sukha, bala A.III,63. -- 5. expression, look, specified as mukha°, e. g. S.III,2, 235; IV,275 sq.; A.V,342; Pv III,9¹; PvA.122. ‹-› 6. colour of skin, appearance of body, complexion M.II,32 (parama), 84 (seṭṭha); A.III,33 (dibba); IV,396 (id.); Sn.610 (doubtful, more likely because of its combⁿ with sara to below 8!), 686 (anoma°); Vism.422 (evaṁ°=odato vā sāmo vā). Cp. °pokkharatā. ‹-› In special sense applied as distinguishing mark of race or species, thus also constituting a mark of class (caste) distinction & translatable as “(social) grade, rank, caste” (see on term Dial. I.27, 99 sq.; cp. Vedic ārya varṇa and dāsa varṇa RV II.12, 9; III,34, 9: see Zimmer, Altind. Leben 113 and in greater detail Macdonell & Keith, Vedic Index II.247 sq.). The customary enumⁿ is of 4 such grades, viz. khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā Vin.II,239; A.IV,202; M.II,128, but cp. Dial. I.99 sq. -- See also Vin.IV,243 (here applied as general term of “grade” to the alms-bowls: tayo pattassa vaṇṇā, viz. ukkaṭṭha, majjhima, omaka; cp. below 7); D.I,13, 91; J.VI,334; Miln.225 (khattiya°, brāhmaṇa°). -- 7. kind, sort Miln.128 (nānā°), cp. Vin.IV,243, as mentioned under 6. -- 8. timbre (i. e. appearance) of voice, contrasted to sara intonation, accent; may occasionally be taken as “vowel.” See A.I,229 (+sara); IV,307 (id.); Sn.610 (id., but may mean “colour of skin”: see 6), 1132 (giraṁ vaṇṇ’upasaṁhitaṁ, better than meaning “comment”); Miln.340 (+sara). ‹-› 9. constitution, likeness, property; adj. (-°) “like”: aggi° like fire Pv III,6⁶ (=aggi-sadisa PvA.203). -- 10. (“good impression”) praise DhA.I,115 (magga°); usually comb^d and contrasted with avaṇṇa blame, e. g. D.I,1, 117, 174; A.I,89; II,3; III,264; IV,179, 345; DA.I,37. -- 11. reason (“outward appearance”) S.I,206 (=kāraṇa K.S. I.320); Vv 84⁶ (=kāraṇa VvA.336); Pv IV.1⁶ (id. PvA.220); IV,1⁴⁸.

--āroha (large) extent of beauty Sn.420. --kasiṇa the colour circle in the practice of meditation VbhA.251. --kāraka (avaṇṇe) one who makes something (unsightly) appear beautiful J.V,270. --da giving colour, i. e. beauty Sn.297. --dada giving beauty A.II,64. --dasaka the ten (years) of complexion or beauty (the 3^rd decade in the life of man) Vism.619; J.IV,497. --dāsī “slave of beauty,” courtezan, prostitute J.I,156 sq., 385; II,367, 380; III,463; VI,300; DhA.I,395; IV,88. --dhātu composition or condition of appearance, specific form, material form, natural beauty S.I,131; Pv.I,3¹; PvA.137 (=chavivaṇṇa); DhsA.15. --patha see vaṇṇu°. --pokkharatā beauty of complexion D.I,114, 115; A.I,38; II,203; Pug.66; VbhA.486 (def^d); DhA.III,389; PvA.46. --bhū place of praise J.I,84 (for °bhūmi: see bhū²). --bhūta being of a (natural) species PvA.97. --vādin saying praise, praising D.I,179, 206; A.II,27; V,164 sq.; Vin.II,197. --sampanna endowed with beauty A.I,244 sq., 288; II,250 sq. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇadāsī: {'def': '【阴】妓女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】妓女。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṇṇaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vaṇṇa] paint, rouge D.II,142; Th.1,960; Dpvs VI,70. (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vaṇṇeti] 1. explanation, commentary, exposition KhA 11, 145, 227; SnA 65 (pada°); PvA.2. --pāḷi° explanation of the text (as regards meaning of words), purely textual analysis (opp. vinicchayakathā) VbhA.291. -- 2. praise DhA.II,100 (vana°). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. formation fr. vaṇṇeti] to be described; a° indescribable J.V,282. (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. vaṇṇa] having colour, complexion A.I,246 (dubbaṇṇatā bad c.); VvA.9. (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vaṇṇa] beautiful A.IV,240 (cātummahārājikā devā dīgh’āyukā vaṇṇavanto; v. l. °vantā); Pug.34; Pv III,2¹² (=rūpasampanna PvA.184); DhA.I,383. (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇeti: {'def': '[denom. fr. vaṇṇa] 1. to describe, explain, comment on J.I,2, 222; KhA 168; SnA 23, 160, 368. ‹-› 2. to praise, applaud, extol J.I,59, 84; PvA.131 (+pasaṁsati). -- pp. vaṇṇita. (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vaṇṇ + e), 描述，解说，评论，称赞，颂杨。【过】 ~esi。【过分】vaṇṇita。【现分】 ~ṇenta。【潜】 ~ṇetabba。【独】 ~ṇetvā。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vaṇṇ+e)(denom. fr. vaṇṇa), 1.描述，解说，评论(to describe, explain, comment on)。2.称赞，颂扬(to praise, applaud, extol)。【过】vaṇṇesi。【过分】vaṇṇita。【现分】vaṇṇenta。【义】vaṇṇetabba。【独】vaṇṇetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṇṇin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. vaṇṇa] 1. having colour Th.1, 1190 (accharā nānattavaṇṇiyo “in divers hues”). -- 2. belonging to a caste, in cātu° (suddhi) (purity of) the fourfold castes M.II,132. -- 3. having beauty Sn.551 (uttama°). -- 4. having the appearance of A.II,106= Pug.44 (āma°, pakka°); J.V,322 (vijju°). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇita: {'def': '(vaṇṇeti 的【过分】)已称赞。vaṇṇitova suvaṇṇito﹐赞美有加(vaṇṇito’va = vaṇṇito eva; vaṇṇito, pp. m.Nom. sg.「被赞美」修饰上句之paṇḍito (为其动词) // su-vaṇṇito, 很赞美。su- 加强语气)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vaṇṇeti 的【过分】)。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of vaṇṇeti] 1. explained, commented on SnA 368. -- 2. praised, extolled Pug.69; J.I,9; Miln.278 (+thuta & pasattha); PvA.116 (=pasaṁsita), 241; VvA.156 (=pasaṁsita). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇiya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vaṇṇeti] colouring; having or giving colour, complexion M.I,446 (in phrase assaṁ assa-damako vaṇṇiyañ ca valiyañ ca anuppavecchati, trsl^d by Neumann as “lässt der Rossebändiger noch die letzte Strählung und Striegelung angedeihen”; still doubtful); A.III,54 (dubbaṇṇiyaṁ bad complexion); It.76 (dub° evil colour). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṇu: {'def': '【阴】沙。vaṇṇupatha,【阳】荒沙地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. late Sk. varṇu, N. of a river (-district)] is given at Abhp 663 in meaning of “sand.” Occurs only in cpd. vaṇṇupatha a sandy place, quicksand, swamp J.I,109; Vv 84³ (=vālu-kantāra VvA.334); Pv IV.3² (=petena nimmitaṁ mudu-bhūmi-magga PvA.250, so read for vaṇṇapatha); shortened to vaṇṇu at Vv 84¹¹ (where MSS vaṇṇa). (Page 597)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】沙。 ~patha, 【阳】荒沙地。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṇṇā: {'def': '【阴】解释，注释，称赞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】解释，注释，称赞。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṇṇī: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 有…的外表。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 有…的外表。(p277)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṇṇīya: {'def': '【形】适合被注释或称赞的。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】适合被注释或称赞的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṇṭa: {'def': 'vaṇṭaka(Epic Sk. vrnta),【中】茎(a stalk)。vaṇṭika,【形】有茎的。vaṇṭachinna, 把茎切除(with its stalk cut)。avaṇṭa, 女人胸部(of thana, the breast of a woman), 不在茎上(not on a stalk (i. e. well-formed, plump) J.V.155. )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'vaṇṭaka, 【中】茎。 ~ṭika, 【形】有茎的。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Epic Sk. vṛnta] a stalk S.III,155=D.I,73 (°chinna with its stalk cut); J.I,70; Ap 62; Vism.356 (in comparison); SnA 296; VbhA.60; DhA.II,42; IV,112; VvA.44. avaṇṭa (of thana, the breast of a woman) not on a stalk (i. e. well-formed, plump) J.V,155. So to be trsl^d here, although vaṇṭa as medical term is given in BR with meaning “nipple.” -- See also tālavaṇṭa (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṭaka: {'def': '(adj:) (-°) [vaṇṭa+ka] having a stalk; a° not fastened on stalks J.V,203. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṭati: {'def': '[dial. Sk. vaṇṭ] to partition, share; is given as root vaṇṭ at Dhtp 92, 561 and Dhtm 787 in meaning “vibhājana.” -- Another root vaṇṭ is found at Dhtm 108 with unmeaning explⁿ “vaṇṭ’atthe.” (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṇṭika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [vaṇṭa+ika] having a stalk; only in phrase ekato° & ubhato° having a stalk on one or on both sides (of a wreath) Vin.II,10; III,180; DhA.I,419. (Page 596)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭa: {'def': '(vaṭarukkha),【阳】印度榕树(见 Nigrodha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. vaṭa. A root vaṭ, not connected with this vaṭa is given at Dhtm 106 in meaning “veṭhana”: see vaṭaṁsa] the Indian fig tree J.I,259 (°rukkha); III,325; Mhvs 6, 16; DhA.I,167 (°rukkha); PvA.113. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'at Pug.45, 46 (tuccho pi hito pūro pi vaṭo) read ti pihito pūro vivaṭo. See vivaṭa. (Page 593)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(~rukkha), 【阳】印度榕树（见 Nigrodha）。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṭaka: {'def': '[cp. *Sk. vaṭaka, fr. vaṭa rope] a small ball or thickening, bulb, tuber; in muḷāla° the (edible) tuber of the lotus J.VI,563 (C. kaṇḍaka). (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭaŋsaka: {'def': '【阳】花冠。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṭaṁsa: {'def': '[for avaṭaṁsa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 66¹; cp. Sk. avataṁsa with t; Prk. vaaṁsa] a kind of head ornament, perhaps ear-ring or garland worn round the forehead Mhvs 11, 28 (C. expl^s as “kaṇṇapilandhanaṁ vaṭaṁsakan ti vuttaṁ hoti”). Usually as vaṭaṁsaka Vin.II,10; III,180; Th.1, 523; Vv 38⁵ (expl^d as “ratanamayā kaṇṇikā” (pl.) at VvA.174); J.VI,488; VvA.178, 189, 209. -- Note. The root vaṭ given as “veṭhana” at Dhtm 106 probably refers to vaṭaṁsa. (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭaṁsaka: {'def': '【阳】花冠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṭhara: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. BSk. vaṭhara MVastu II.65. A root vaṭh is given at Dhtm 133 in meaning “thūlattane bhave” i. e. bulkiness] bulky, gross Abhp 701. (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】庞大的，肥的。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】庞大的，肥的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṭuma: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic vartman, fr. vṛt] a road, path D.II,8; S.IV,52 (chinna°); J.III,412; Vism.123 (sa° & a°). Cp. ubbaṭuma & parivaṭuma. (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】道路，路径。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】道路，路径。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṭākara: {'def': '[probably distorted by metathesis from Sk. vaṭārakā. Fr. vaṭa rope. On etym. of the latter see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. volvo] a rope, cable J.III,478 (nāvā sa-vaṭākarā). (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭa: {'def': '【形】圆形的，圆的。【中】圆周，轮回，布施的开支，布施的供应品。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】圆形的，圆的。【中】圆周，轮回，布施的开支，布施的供应品，回转。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '轮回;轮转;相续法[PS:vatta 义务;服务;仪法;德行; vattati 存在;转起;发生;存续vattana 行为]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '² (“rained”): see abhivaṭṭa and vaṭṭha (vuṭṭha); otherwise only at DhA.II,265. (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.-nt.) [pp. of vṛt, Sk. vṛtta in meaning of “round” as well as “happened, become” etc. The two meanings have become differentiated in Pāli: vaṭṭa is not found in meaning of “happened.” All three Pāli meanings are specialized, just as the pres. vaṭṭati is specialized in meaning “behoves”] 1. round, circular; (nt.) circle PvA.185 (āyata+); KhA 50 (°nāli). See cpd. °aṅguli. -- 2. (fig.) “rolling on,” the “round” of existences, cycle of transmigrations, saṁsāra, evolution (=involution) (as forward or ascending circle of existences, without implying a teleological idea, in contrast to vivaṭṭa “rolling back” or devolution, i. e. a new (descending) cycle of existence in a new aeon with inverted [vi-] motion, so to speak) S.III,63; IV,53 (pariyādiṇṇa°), cp. M.III,118; Th.1, 417 (sabba°: “all constant rolling on” trslⁿ); SnA 351 (=upādāna); DhsA.238. -- There are 3 vaṭṭas, (te-bhūmaka vaṭṭa, see also tivaṭṭa) embracing existence in the stages of kamma-vaṭṭa, kilesa° and vipāka°, or circle of deed, sin & result (found only in Commentarial literature): KhA 189; SnA 510 (tebhūmaka°); DhA.I,289 (kilesa°); IV,69 (tebhūmaka°). See also Māra; and °dukkha, °vivaṭṭa below. -- 3. “what has been proffered,” expenditure, alms (as t. t.) J.VI,333 (dāna° alms-gift); DhA.II,29 (pāka° cooked food as alms); VvA.222 (id.); Mhvs 32, 61 (alms-pension); 34, 64 (salāka-vaṭṭabhatta). -- Cp. vi°.

--aṅguli a rounded (i. e. well-formed) finger; adj. having round fingers Vv 64¹³ (=anupubbato v., i. e. regularly formed, VvA.280); J.V,207, 215. --aṅgulika same as last J.V,204. --ânugata accompanied by (or affected with) saṁsāra J.I,91 (dhana). --ûpaccheda destruction of the cycle of rebirths A.II,34=It.88; A.III,35; Vism.293. --kathā discussion about saṁsāra Vism.525; DA.I,126; VbhA.133. --kāra a worker in brass. The meaning of vaṭṭa in this connection is not clear; the same vaṭṭa occurs in °loha (“round” metal?). Kern, Toev. s. v. compares it with Sk. vardhra leather strap, taking vaṭṭa as a corruption of vaḍḍha, but the connection brass›leather seems far-fetched. It is only found at Miln.331. --dukkha the “ill” of transmigration (a Commentary expression) Vism.315; DhA.IV,149; VvA.116. --paṭighātaka(ṁ) (vivaṭṭaṁ) (a devolution) destroying evolution, i. e. salvation from saṁsāra SnA 106. --bhaya fear of saṁsāra VbhA.256. --mūla the root of saṁsāra DhA.III,278. --vivaṭṭa (1) evolving and devolving; going round and back again, i. e. all round (a formation after the manner of reduplicative cpds. like cuṇṇa-vicuṇṇa in intensive-iterative meaning), °vasena in direct and inverse succession, all round, completely J.I,75. Cp. also vatta-paṭivatta. -- (2) saṁsāra in ascending and descending lines, evolution (“involution”) and devolution, or one round of trans‹-› migration and the other. It is dogmatically defined at Nett 113 as “vaṭṭaṁ saṁsāro vivaṭṭaṁ nibbānaṁ” (similarly, opposed to vaṭṭa at DA.I,126) which is however not the general meaning, the vivaṭṭa not necessarily meaning a nibbāna stage. See SnA 106 (quoted above); VvA.68. We have so far not found any passage where it might be interpreted in the comprehensive sense as meaning “the total round of existences, “ after the fashion of cpds. like bhavâbhava. --loha “round metal” (?), one of the 3 kittima-lohāni mentioned at VbhA.63 (kaṁsa°, vaṭṭa°, ārakūṭa); also at Miln.267 (with kāḷa°, tamba° & kaṁsa°, where in the trslⁿ Rh. D. does not give a def. explⁿ of the word). (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vṛt, or P. vaṭṭa] a cart, in haṭṭha° handcart Vin.II,276. (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭakā: {'def': '(f.) (& vaṭṭaka°) [cp. Sk. vartakā & Ved. vartikā] the quail M.III,159 sq.; J.I,172, 208 (vaṭṭaka-luddaka); III,312; DhA.III,175 (Loc. pl. vaṭṭakesu). -- The Vaṭṭaka-jātaka at J.I,208 sq. (cp. J.V,414). (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】鹌鹑。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Vaṭṭapotakā,【阴】鹌鹑(quail)。无尾鹌鹑(ian1-thun5)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṭṭana: {'def': '【中】回转。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】回转。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vṛt, vaṭṭati] turning round Dhtp 89 (in defⁿ of vaṭṭati). Cp. āvaṭṭana. (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭani: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic vartani circumference of a wheel, course] a ring, round, globe, ball Th.2, 395 (vaṭṭani-riva; expl^d at ThA.259 as “lākhāya guḷikā viya,” trslⁿ Sisters 154: “but a little ball”). (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vṛt] in °valī is a line or chain of balls (“rounds,” i. e. rings or spindles). Reading somewhat doubtful. It occurs at M.I,80, 81 (seyyathā v. evaṁ me piṭṭhi-kaṇṭako unnat’âvanato hoti; Neumann trsl^s “wie eine Kugelkette wurde mein Rückgrat mit den hervor-und zurücktretenden Wirbeln”) and at J.V,69 (spelt “vaṭṭhanā-vali-saṅkāsā piṭṭhi te ninnat’unnatā,” with C. explⁿ “piṭṭhika-ṭṭhāne āvuṇitvā ṭhāpitā vaṭṭhanā-vali-sadisā”). The J trslⁿ by Dutoit gives “einer Reihe von Spinnwirteln dein Rücken gleicht im Auf und Nieder”; the E. tsrlⁿ has “Thy back like spindles in a row, a long unequal curve doth show.” (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭati: {'def': '(vaṭṭ +a), 理应，被纠正，被适合，回转，折合，不在此限。Kiṁ laddhuṁ vaṭṭatīti?(折合赚多少？)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic vṛt. The representative of vattati (=Sk. vartate) in specialized meaning. The regular meaning of *vartate (with vaṭṭana), viz. “turning round,” is attached to vaṭṭati only in later Pāli & sometimes doubtful. It is found also in the Caus. vaṭṭeti. The defⁿ of vaṭṭ (literal meaning) at Dhtp 89 is “vaṭṭana,” and at Dhtm 107 “āvattana”] 1. to turn round, to move on: doubtful in “kattha vaṭṭaṁ na vaṭṭati” S.I,15; preferably with v. l. as vaḍḍhati. -- Caus. I. vaṭṭeti to turn or twist J.I,338 (rajjuṁ); to cause to move or go on (in weaving; tasaraṁ v. to speed the shuttle) SnA 265, 266. Should we read vaḍḍheti? Cp. āvaṭṭeti. -- Caus. II. vaṭṭāpeti to cause to turn J.I,422. -- 2. to be right or fit or proper, to behove; it ought to (with infin.); with Instr. of person who ought to do this or that, e. g. sīlācāra-sampannena bhavituṁ vaṭṭati J.I,188; kataññunā bhavituṁ v. J.I,122. -- See e. g. J.I,376; II,352, 406; Miln.9; Vism.184; DhA.II,38, 90, 168; SnA 414 (vattuṁ to say); VvA.63, 69, 75; PvA.38 (dātuṁ). The noun to vaṭṭati is vatta (not vaṭṭa!). (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vaṭṭ + a), 理应，被纠正，被适合，被适当，回转。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṭṭeti: {'def': '(vaṭṭ + e), 转，挪，制灯芯，卷起来，制成圆形。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 vaṭṭita。【独】 vaṭṭetvā。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vaṭṭ +e), 转，挪，制灯芯，卷起来，制成圆形。【过】vaṭṭesi。【过分】vaṭṭita。【独】vaṭṭetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vaṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of vassati, for the usual vuṭṭha] rained, in nava° newly rained upon DhA.I,19 (bhūmi). (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已被雨淋湿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已被雨淋湿。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vaṭṭi: {'def': 'vaṭṭikā,【阴】灯芯(wick)，卷形物，水等的涌出，边缘，边。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'vaṭṭikā, 【阴】灯芯，卷形物，水等的涌出，边缘，边。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [represents both Epic Sk. varti and vṛtti, differentiated derivations from vṛt, combining the meanings of “turning, rolling” and “encircling, round”] 1. a wick S.II,86=III,126=IV.213; J.I,243 (dīpa°); DhA 393; ThA.72 (Ap. V,45: Nom. pl. vaṭṭīni); Mhvs 32, 37; 34, 35. -- 2. enclosure, lining, film, skin Vism.258 (anta° entrails), 262 (udara°); J.I,260 (anta°, so read for °vaddhi). -- 3. edge, rim, brim, cireumference Vin II.120 (aggala° of the door), 148 (id.); S.III,141 (patta° of a vase or bowl); IV,168 (id.); DhA.II,124 (nemi°). Often as mukha-vaṭṭi outer rim, border, lining, e. g. cakkavāḷa° J.I,64, 72; DhA.I,319; III,209; patt° J.V,38; pāsāda° DhsA.107. -- 4. strip, fringe Vin.II,266 (dussa°); J.V,73 (camma°); Mhvs 11, 15. -- 5. a sheath, bag, pod J.III,366 (tiṇa°); Mhvs 26, 17 (marica° red pepper pod); DhA.IV,203 (reṇu°). -- 6. a lump, ball DhA.III,117 (pubba°, of matter). -- 7. rolling forth or along, a gush (of water), pour J.I,109 (or to vṛṣ?). (Page 594)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭikā: {'def': '(f.) [vaṭṭi+kā, cp. Class. Sk. vartikā] 1. a wick Mhvs 30, 94. -- 2. a brim Mhvs 18, 28. -- 3. a pod Mhvs 26, 16 (marica°). (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) in muṇḍa° porter (?) is not clear. It is a derⁿ fr. vaṭṭi in one or the other of its meanings. Found only at Vin.II,137, where it is expl^d by Bdhgh as “veṭṭhin.” It may belong to vaṭaṁsa or vaṭa (rope): cp. Dhtm 106 “veṭhana” for vaṭaṁsa. (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vaṭṭula: {'def': '【形】圆形的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】圆形的。(p276)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vṛt, cp. late Sk. vartula] circular Abhp 707. (Page 595)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ve: {'def': '(肯定的虚词)的确，真实地，当然。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (indecl.) [cp. Vedic vē, vai] part. of affirmation, emphasizing the preceding word: indeed, truly Vin.I,3 (etaṁ ve sukhaṁ); Dh.63 (sa ve bāḷo ti vuccati), 83 (sabbattha ve), 163 (yaṁ ve . . . taṁ ve); Sn.1050, 1075, 1082; DhA.III,155 (=yeva). See also have. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² may be enclitic form of tumhe, for the usual vo at Sn.333 (=tumhākaṁ SnA 339). See P.T.S. ed. of Sn; cp. v. l. ve for vo at Sn.560 (here as particle!). (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '（肯定的虚词）的确，真实地，当然。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vebhabya: {'def': '(=vebhavya) (‹vibhāvin)【中】审察，细究。【阴】vebhabyā(=vebhabyā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vebhassi: {'def': '(=vibhassikatā),【阴】流言(i. e. gossiping Vin.IV,241.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.)=vibhassikatā, i. e. gossiping Vin.IV,241. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vebhavya: {'def': '(& °ā) (nt. & f.) [fr. vibhāvin] thinking over, criticism Dhs.16; Ps.I,119; Pug.25; Nett 76. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vebhaṅga: {'def': '[fr. vibhaṅga] futility, failure J.IV,451 (opp. sampatti; expl^d as vipatti C.). (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vebhaṅgika: {'def': '(&Vebhaṅgiya) (adj.) see a°. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vebhaṅgiya: {'def': '【形】适合被分发的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】适合被分发的。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vebhūtika: {'def': '(& °ya) (adj.-nt.) [fr. vibhūti 1] causing disaster or ruin; nt. calumnious speech, bad language D.III,106 (°ya); Sn.158 (°ya); Vv 84⁴⁰ (°ka; expl^d as “sahitānaṁ vinābhāva-karaṇato vebhūtikaṁ,” i. e. pisuṇaṁ VvA.347). (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vecikicchin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vicikicchā] doubting, doubtful A.II,174 (kaṅkhin+); S.III,99 (id.); M.I,18; Sn.510. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vecitta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+citta²] confusion, disturbed state of mind Dhtp 460 (in defⁿ of root muh) (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Veda: {'def': '【阳】宗教性的情操，知识，吠陀经（印度最古的宗教文献和文学作品的总称）。 ~gū, 【阳】已达到最高知识的人。 ~jāta, 【形】装满欢喜的。 ~ntagū, ~pāragū, 【阳】擅长吠陀经知识的人。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】宗教性的情操，知识，吠陀经(印度最古的宗教文献和文学作品。四吠陀即指梨俱吠陀、沙摩吠陀、夜柔吠陀、阿闼婆吠陀(Iru-veda, Sāma-veda, Yajur-veda, Athabbana-veda)。vedagū,【阳】已达到最高知识的人。vedajāta,【形】装满欢喜的。vedantagū, vedapāragū,【阳】擅长吠陀经知识的人。vedallakathaṁ﹐知识论(《增支部注》(A.5.79：Vedallakathanti vedapaṭisaṁyuttaṁ ñāṇamissakakathaṁ.)。AA.3.58./II.p.261.︰Tiṇṇaṁ vedānanti irubbedayajubbedasāmabbedānaṁ. (三吠陀︰梨俱吠陀（Irubbeda；梵rgveda赞诵明论）、夜柔吠陀（Yajubbeda；梵Yajurveda祭祀明论）、娑摩吠陀（Samabbeda；梵Sāmaveda歌咏明论）。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vid, or more specifically ved as P. root] 1. (cp. vediyati & vedanā) (joyful) feeling, religious feeling, enthusiasm, awe, emotion, excitement (something like saṁvega) D.II,210 (°paṭilābha+somanassa-paṭilābha); M.I,465 (uḷāra); Sn.1027 (=pīti SnA 585); J.II,336; III,266. attha-veda+dhamma-veda enthusiasm for the truth (for the letter & the spirit) of Buddha’s teaching M.I,37; A.V,329 sq., 333, 349, 352; veda here interpreted as “somanassaṁ” at MA.I,173. -- See also cpd. °jāta. -- 2. (cp. vedeti & vijjā) (higher) knowledge (as “Buddhist” antithesis to the authority of the “Veda”), insight, revelation, wisdom: that which Bdhgh at MA.I,173 defines with “ñāṇa,” and illustrates with vedagū of Sn.1059; or refers to at DA.I,139 with defⁿ “vidanti etenā ti vedo.” Thus at Sn.529 & 792 (=vedā vuccanti catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṁ paññā Nd¹ 93), cp. SnA 403. -- As adj. veda Ep. of the Buddha “the knower” or the possessor of revelation, at M.I,386. See also vedagū. -- 3. the Veda(s), the brahmanic canon of authorized religious teaching (revelation) & practice; otherwise given as “gantha” i. e. “text” at MA.I,173, & illustrated with “tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū.” The latter formula is frequent in stock phrase describing the accomplishments of a Brahmin, e. g. at D.I,88; M.II,133; Sn.1019; A.I,163; DhA.III,361. In the older texts only the 3 Vedas (irubbeda=Rg; yaju° & sāma°) are referred to, whereas later (in the Commentaries) we find the 4 mentioned (athabbana added), e. g. the three at S.IV,118; J.I,168; II,47; III,537; Miln.10; Vism.384; the four at DA.I,247; Miln.178. -- Unspecified (sg.): SnA 462. As adj. veda “knowing the Vedas” SnA 463 (ti°), cp. tevijja. -- The Vedas in this connection are not often mentioned, they are almost identical with the Mantras (see manta) and are often (in Com.) mentioned either jointly with manta or promiscuously, e. g. Pv.II,6¹³ (the Vedas with the 6 aṅgas, i. e. vedāṅgas, called manta); SnA 293 (manta-pāragū+veda-pāragū), 322, 448.

--antagu “one who has reached the end of knowledge,” i. e. one who has obtained perfection in wisdom Vin.I,3; Sn.463. --gū one who has attained to highest knowledge (said of the Buddha). Thus different from “tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū,” which is brahmanic. The explⁿ of vedagū is “catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṁ” Nd² 612, & see above 2. -- S.I,141, 168; IV,83, 206; A II 6; IV,340; Sn.322, 458, 529, 749, 846, 947, 1049, 1060; Nd¹ 93, 204, 299, 431. A peculiar meaning of vedagū is that of “soul” (lit. attainer of wisdom) at Miln.54 & 71. --jāta thrilled, filled with enthusiasm, overcome with awe, excited A.II,63; Sn.995, 1023; Kvu 554=Vv 34²⁷ (=jāta-somanassa VvA.156); J.I,11; Miln.297. --pāragū one who excels in the knowledge of the Vedas, perfected in the Veda SnA 293; cp. above 3. --bandhu one who is familiar with the Vedas SnA 192. (Page 647)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '吠陀，吠驮，韦陀，毗陀，鞞陀', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Vedaka: {'def': '【阳】感受的人，遭受者。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】受者，感受的人，遭受者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. veda 3] knowing or studying the Vedas SnA 462 (brāhmaṇa). (Page 647)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedalla: {'def': '(nt.) [may be dialectical, obscure as to origin; Bdhgh refers it to Veda 1] Name of one of the 9 aṅgas (see nava) or divisions of the Canon according to matter A.II,7, 103, 178; III,88, 107, 361 sq.; IV,113; Vin.III,8; Pug.43; DhsA.26; DA.I,24; PvA.22. The DhsA.comprises under this aṅga the 2 suttas so-called in M. (43, 44), the Sammādiṭṭhi, Sakkapañha, Saṅkhārābhājaniya, Mahāpuṇṇama etc. Suttas, as catechetical DhsA.26=DA.I,24. -- Note. The 2^nd part of the word looks like a distortion fr. ariya (cp. mahalla›mah’ariya). Or might it be=vedaṅga? (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vedanā] having feeling, endowed with sensation Vbh.419 (a°+asaññaka). (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedanaṭṭa: {'def': '【形】遭受痛苦的。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】遭受痛苦的，痛恼者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vedanā: {'def': '受;(苦乐的)感受作用(PS: vedanā-nupassanā 受随念)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(‹vid经验),【阴】受，痛苦，感觉。vedanākkhandha,【阳】受蕴。《杂阿含468经》：「有三受，苦受、乐受、不苦不乐受。观於乐受，为断乐受贪使故，於我所修梵行，断苦受瞋恚使故，於我所修梵行，断不苦不乐受痴使故，於我所修梵行。」M.140./III,242.：Sukhavedaniyaṁ, bhikkhu, phassaṁ paṭicca uppajjati sukhā vedanā. So sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṁ vedanaṁ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti.(比丘！由於应感受乐之触而生乐受。他正在感受乐受时，了知「我感受乐受」)。vedanādikkhandhattayaṁ﹐受等三蕴(即受、想、行三蕴)。M.A.59./III,114.︰Ettha ca kāyikacetasikavasena dve veditabbā. Sukhādivasena tisso, indriyavasena sukhindriyādikā pañca, dvāravasena cakkhusamphassajādikā cha, upavicāravasena “cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā somanassaṭṭhāniyaṁ rūpaṁ upavicaratī”ti-ādikā aṭṭhārasa, cha gehassitāni somanassāni, cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni, cha gehassitāni domanassāni, cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni, cha gehassitā upekkhā, cha nekkhammasitāti evaṁ chattiṁsa, tā atīte chattiṁsa, anāgate chattiṁsa, paccuppanne chattiṁsāti evaṁ aṭṭhavedanāsataṁ veditabbaṁ.( 二受︰身与心之感受。三受︰处於乐(、苦、舍)。五受︰处於根，乐(、苦、悦、忧、舍)根。六受︰处於门，眼见色等所生。十八受︰处於近伺(察)，眼见色生悦等，近伺(察)色。三十六受︰六种在家生活有关之悦受，六种出离之悦受；六种在家生活有关之忧受，六种出离之忧受；六种在家生活有关之舍受，六种出离之舍受。百八受︰过去三十六受，未来三十六受，现在三十六受。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】受，痛苦，感觉。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】受蕴。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. ved°: see vedeti; cp. Epic Sk. vedanā] feeling, sensation (see on term, e. g. Cpd. 14 Mrs. Rh. D. B. Psy., ch. iv.) D.I,45; II,58 (cp. Dial. II.54), 66; III,58, 77, 221, 228, 238 (°upādāna); S.III,86 sq.; A.I,39, 122, 141; II,79, 198, 256; III,245 sq., 450; IV,301, 385; Kh III, (tisso v.); Sn.435, 529, 739, 1111; Nd¹ 109; Nd² 551 (tisso v.); Ps.I,6, 50 sq., 145 sq., 153 sq.; II,109 sq., 181 sq.; Vbh.135 sq., 294, 401, 403 sq.; Dhs.3, 1348; Nett 27, 65 sq.; 83, 123, 126; Tikp 246, 317 sq., 345 sq.; Vism.460 sq.; DA.I,125; VbhA.13 sq., 39 sq., 80, 178, 193, 221 (°ânupassanā, in detail), 263 sq., 382 (various). -- Three modes of feeling (usually understood whenever mention is made of “tisso vedanā”): sukhā (pleasant), dukkhā (painful) adukkha-m-asukhā (indifferent) D.III,275; S.II,53, 82; IV,207; A.III,400; It.46; Tikp 317 sq. -- or: kusalā, akusalā, avyākatā Vism.460. -- Five vedanās: sukhaṁ, dukkhaṁ, somanassaṁ, domanassaṁ, upekkhā Vism.461. Categories of 2 to 108 modes of Vedanā, S.IV,223 sq. --vedanā is one of the 5 khandhas (see khandha II.B). -- On relation of old and new sensations (purāṇa°›nava°) see e. g. A.II,40; III,388; IV,167; Vism.33; and see formula under yātrā. -- In the Paṭiccasamuppāda (q. v.) vedanā stands between phassa as condition and taṇhā as result; see e. g. Vism.567 sq. -- 2. (in special application) painful sensation, suffering, pain (i. e. dukkhavedanā) M.I,59; A.I,153 (sārīrikā bodily pain); II,116 (id.); III,143 (id.); Pv.I,10¹⁵; Miln.253 (kāyikā & cetasikā); VbhA.101 (maraṇ’antikā v. agonies of death). --vedan’aṭṭa afflicted by pain Vin.II,61; III,100; J.I,293. -- As adj. vedana suffering or to be suffered Pv III,10⁶ (=anubhūyamāna PvA.214). --vedana at J.III,349 is to be read as vetana. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedayita: {'def': '【中】受，感觉，经验。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of vedeti] felt, experienced S.I,112; II,65; III,46; A.II,198; IV,415; Vism.460. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】受，感觉，经验。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vedeha: {'def': '【形】韦提诃国 (Videha) 的。Vedehamuni﹐韦提诃牟尼。(S.16.11.、杂阿含1144经以此名称呼阿难尊者。) SA.16.10./II,175.︰Vedehamuninoti paṇḍitamunino. Paṇḍito hi ñāṇasaṅkhātena vedena īhati sabbakiccāni karoti, tasmā “vedeho”ti vuccati. Vedeho ca so muni cāti, vedehamuni.(鞞提诃牟尼︰智者牟尼。智者努力以智慧、知识做所应做的事，因此称为‘鞞提诃’。 ‘鞞提诃’ 结合‘牟尼’，为‘鞞提诃牟尼’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】属于韦提诃国 (Videha) 的。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[=Npl. Vedeha] lit. from the Videha country; wise (see connection between Vedeha & ved, vedeti at DA.I,139, resting on popular etymology) S.II,215 sq. (°muni, of Ānanda; expl^d as “vedeha-muni=paṇḍitamuni,” cp. K.S. I.321; trslⁿ K.S. II.145 “the learned sage”); Mhvs 3, 36 (same phrase; trslⁿ “the sage of the Videha country”); Ap 7 (id.). (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'a. Videha国の', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Vedehi-putta: {'def': 'm. 韋提希夫人(ヴェ一デーヒ一)の子=阿闍世 (アジャセ) 王 [マガダ国王, ビンビサ一ラの子].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Vedehī: {'def': 'f. 韋提希, ヴェ一デーヒ一 [Videha国の王女でマガダ国王頻毘娑羅の妃となり阿闍世を生む]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Vedehīputta: {'def': '【阳】韦提诃国公主的儿子。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】韦提诃国公主的儿子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vedeti: {'def': '(vid + e), 感受，感觉，感知。【过】 vedesi。【现分】 vedenta。【独】vedetvā。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic vedayati; denom. or Caus. fr. vid to know or feel] “to sense,” usually in denom. function (only one Caus. meaning: see aor. avedi); meaning twofold: either intellectually “to know” (cp. veda), or with ref. to general feeling “to experience” (cp. vedanā). ‹-› For the present tense two bases are to be distinguished, viz. ved°, used in both meanings; and vediy° (=*vedy°), a specific Pāli formation after the manner of the 4^th (y) class of Sk. verbs, used only in meaning of “experience.” Thus vedeti: (a) to know (as=Acc., equal to “to call”) Sn.211 sq. (taṁ muniṁ vedayanti); (b) to feel, to experience S.IV,68 (phuṭṭho vedeti, ceteti, sañ‹-› jānāti); M.I,37; Pv IV.1⁵⁰ (dukkhaṁ=anubhavati PvA.241). --vediyati: to feel, to experience a sensation or feeling (usually with vedanaṁ or pl. vedanā) M.I,59; II,70 (also Pot. vediyeyya); S.II,82; III,86 sq.; IV,207; A.I,141; II,198 (also ppr. vediyamāna); J.II,241; Miln.253. -- aor. avedi he knew, recognized J.III,420 (=aññāsi C.); he made known, i. e. informed J.IV,35 (=jānāpesi C.); vedi (recognized, knew) Sn.643, 647, 1148 (=aññāsi aphusi paṭivijjhi Nd² 613); & vedayi Sn.251 (=aññāsi SnA 293). -- Fut. vedissati (shall experience) Pv.I,10¹⁵ (dukkhaṁ vedanaṁ v.). -- grd. vediya (to be known) Sn.474 (para° diṭṭhi held as view by others; expl^d as “ñāpetabba” SnA 410); vedanīya: (a) to be known, intelligible, comprehensible D.I,12; (dhammā nipuṇā . . . paṇḍita-vedanīyā); II,36; M.I,487; II,220; (b) to be experienced S.IV,114 (sukha° & dukkha°); A.I,249 (diṭṭhadhamma°); IV,382; Pv.II,11⁷ (sukha°-kamma= sukha-vipāka PvA.150); III,3⁷ (kamma); IV,1²⁹ (of kamma-vipāka=anubhavana-yogga PvA.228); PvA.145 (kamma); & veditabba to be understood or known D.I,186; PvA.71, 92, 104. -- pp. vedita & vedayita. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐vedayati (vid知 +e；sk. vedayati),【被】感受，感觉，感知。【过】vedesi。【现分】vedenta。【过分】Vedita。【独】vedetvā。veditabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vedha: {'def': '【阳】vedhana,【中】刺穿，射击，刺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 vedhana, 【中】刺穿，射击，刺。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[adj.-n.) [fr. vidh=vyadh, cp. vyādha] 1. piercing, pricking, hitting A.II,114 sq. (where it is said of a horse receiving pricks on var. parts, viz. on its hair: loma°; its flesh: maṁsa°; its bone: aṭṭhi°). --avedha [to vyath!] not to be shaken or disturbed, imperturbable Sn.322 (=akampana-sabhāva SnA 331). -- 2. a wound J.II,274 sq. -- 3. a flaw Miln.119. -- Cp. ubbedha. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedhabba: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. vidhavā,=Epic Sk. vaidhavya] widowhood J.VI,508. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vidh to pierce] piercing J.IV,29; DA.I,221. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedhati: {'def': '[for *vethati=vyathati, of vyath] to tremble, quiver, quake, shake S.V,402; Th.1, 651; 2, 237 (°amāna); Sn.899, 902 (Pot. vedheyya); Nd¹ 312, 467; J.II,191 (kampati+); Miln.254 (+calati); VvA.76 (vedhamānena sarīrena); DhA.II,249 (Pass. vedhiyamāna trembling; v. l. pa°). Cp. vyadhati, ubbedhati & pavedhati. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vidh + a), 战栗，震动。【过】 vedhi。【过分】 vedhita。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(vidh+a), 战栗，震动。【过】vedhi。【过分】vedhita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vedhavera: {'def': '[for *Sk. vaidhaveya, fr. vidhavā] son of a widow; in two diff. passages of the Jātaka, both times characterized as sukka-cchavī vedhaverā “sons of widows, with white skins,” and at both places misunderstood (or unintelligibly expl^d) by the Cy., viz. J.IV,184 (+thulla-bāhū; C.: vidhavā apatikā tehi vidhavā sarantī ti [ti]vidha-verā ca vedhaverā); VI,508 (C.: vidhav’itthakā; v. l. vidhav-ittikāmā purisā). (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vidh=vyadh] piercing, shooting, hitting: see akkhaṇa°. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedhitā: {'def': '(f.) [pp. of vedheti, Caus. of vijjhati] shooting, hitting J.VI,448. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedhī: {'def': '【阳】射击者，打击者。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】射击者，打击者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vedi: {'def': '([vidati = 知道] 的【过】)。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Vedī (f.) [Vedic vedi sacrificial bench] ledge, cornice, rail Mhvs 32, 5; 35, 2; 36, 52 (pāsāṇa°); 36, 103; Vv 84¹⁶ (=vedikā VvA.346). -- See on term Dial. II.210; Mhvs. tsrlⁿ 220, 296. Cp. vedikā & velli. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '([vidati = 知道] 的【过】)曾知道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vedikā: {'def': '(f.) (& vediyā) [fr. vedi] cornice, ledge, railing D.II,179; Vin.II,120; J.IV,229, 266; Vv 78⁶ (vediyā= vedikā VvA.304); 84¹⁶ (=vedikā VvA.340); VvA.275. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'vedī, 【阴】月台，栏杆。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'vedī,【阴】月台，栏杆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vedisa: {'def': '[fr. vidisā?] N. of a tree J.V,405; VI,550. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vedita: {'def': '[pp. of vedeti] experienced, felt S.IV,205 (sukha & dukkha)=Sn.738. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(vedeti 的【过分】) 感受，感觉，感知。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vedeti 的【过分】)。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vediyati: {'def': '(vid+i+ya)(pass. caus.), 被感觉，被体验。【现分】vediyamāna, vedayamāna(正在体验、正在感受)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(vid + i + ya), 被感觉，被体验。【现分】 ~yamāna。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vega: {'def': '【阳】力量，速度，速率，推动力。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic vega, fr. vij to tremble] quick motion, impulse, force; speed, velocity S.IV,157; A.III,158 (sara°); Sn.1074; Miln.202, 258, 391; PvA.11, 47 (vāta°), 62 (visa°), 67, 284 (kamma°); Sdhp.295. -- Instr. vegena (adv.) quickly DhA.I,49; another form in same meaning is vegasā, after analogy of thāmasā, balasā etc., e. g. J.III,6; V, 117. -- Cp. saṁ°. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic vega, fr. vij to tremble),【阳】力量，速度，速率，推动力(quick motion, impulse, force; speed, velocity )。vātavega, 风速。visavega, 毒力。kammavega, 业力。Instr. vegasā, vegena(adv.)。Cp. saṁvega.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vegha: {'def': 'at D.II,100 (°missakena, trslⁿ Rh. D. “with the help of thongs”)=S.V,153 (T. reads vedha°), & Th.1, 143 (°missena, trslⁿ “violence”) may with Kern, Toev. s. v. be taken as veggha=viggha (Sk. vighna), i. e. obstacle, hindrance; cp. uparundhati Th.1, 143. It remains obscure & Kern’s explⁿ problematic. Cp. Dial. II.107. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vehapphala: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Bṛhatphala, Vṛhatphala] 広果天.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Vehāsa: {'def': '【阳】天空。vehāsakuṭi,【阴】二楼通风的房间。vehāsagamana,【中】经由空中。vehāsaṭṭha,【形】在空中的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】天空。 ~kuṭi, 【阴】二楼通风的房间。 ~gamana, 【中】在空中经行。 ~ṭṭha, 【形】在空中的。(p306)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[contraction of vehāyasa] the air, sky, heaven; only in the two cases (both used as Loc. “in the air”): Acc. vehāsaṁ D.III,27; S.V,283; Vin.III,105; VvA.78; & Loc. vehāse Vin.I,320.

--kuṭī “air hut” i. e. airy room, “a hut in which a middle-sized man can stand without knocking his head against the ceiling” (explⁿ) Vin.IV,46. --gamana going through the air Vism.382; Dhtm 586. --ṭṭha standing in the air D.I,115; DA.I,284. --ṭṭhita id. D.I,95. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vehāsaya: {'def': '[=vehāyasa with metathesis y›s] occurs only in Acc. (=Loc.) vehāsayaṁ, equal to vihāyasaṁ at J.IV,471. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vehāyasa: {'def': '=vihāyasa, i. e. air, sky; only used in Acc. vehāyasaṁ in function of a Loc. (cp. VvA.182: vehāyasaṁ=vehāyasa-bhūte hatthi-piṭṭhe), comb^d with ṭhita (standing in the air) Vv 41; Mhvs 1, 24; PvA.14. (Page 651)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vejayanta: {'def': '【阳】胜利殿（帝释的宫殿）。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Vaijayanta] 最勝殿, 皮闍延多 [三十三天の宮殿].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】胜利殿(帝释的宫殿)。vejayanta-ratha, 乐声车，又作最胜车。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vejja: {'def': '【阳】医师，医生。vejjakamma,【中】医治。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. vid, *Sk. vaidya, but to Pāli etym. feeling fr. vijjā] a physician, doctor, medical man, surgeon J.I,455; III,142; KhA 21; SnA 274 (in simile); VvA.185, 322; DhA.I,8; PvA.36, 86; Sdhp.279, 351. --hatthi° elephantdoctor J.VI,490; Mhvs 25, 34; visa° a physician who cures poison(ous bites) J.I,310; IV,498.

--kamma medical practice or treatment J.II,421; V,253; Vism.384; DhA.III,257, 351; IV,172. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】医师，医生。 ~kamma, 【中】医治。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vejjikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. vejja?] medicine (?) Vin.III,185. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vekalla: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vikala] deficiency J.V,400; Miln.107; Dhs.223; DhA.II,26 (aṅga° deformity), 79; III,22; VvA.193; Sdhp.5, 17. -- As vekalya at KhA 187 (where contrasted to sākalya). -- jaṇṇū avekallaṁ karoti to keep one’s knees straight Miln.418 (Kern, Toev. s. v. trsl^s “presses tightly together”). See also avekalla. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 Vekallatā, 【阴】残缺，缺乏。(p304)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】vekallatā,【阴】残缺，缺乏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vekallatā: {'def': '& vekalyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. vekalla] deficiency A.III,441 (a°); Vism.350 (indriya°); J.I,45 (v. 254) (°lya°). (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vekantaka: {'def': '(VbhA.63) is a kind of copper: see loha. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vekata: {'def': '(adj.) [=vikata] changed VvA.10. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vekaṇḍa: {'def': '[perhaps connected with vikaṇṇaka] a kind of arrow M.I,429. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vekaṭika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vikaṭa] one addicted to dirt, living on dirty food D.I,167; Miln.259 (doubled). (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vekkhiya: {'def': 'is poetical for avekkhiya (=avekkhitvā: see avekkhati) in appaṭivekkhiya not considering J.IV,4. See the usual paccavekkhati. (Page 646)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Velli: {'def': '[dial.?] is a word peculiar to the Jātaka. At one passage it is expl^d by the Commentary as “vedi” (i. e. rail, cornice), where it is applied to the slender waist of a woman (cp. vilāka & vilaggita): J.VI,456. At most of the other passages it is expl^d as “a heap of gold”: thus at J.V,506 (verse: velli-vilāka-majjhā; C.: “ettha vellī ti rāsi vilākamajjhā ti vilagga-majjhā uttattaghana-suvaṇṇa-rāsi-ppabhā c’eva tanu-dīgha-majjhā ca”), and VI,269 (verse: kañcana-velli-viggaha; C.: “suvaṇṇa-rāsi-sassirīka-sarīrā”). At V,398 in the same passage as VI,269 expl^d in C. as “kañcana-rūpakasadisa-sarīrā”). The idea of “golden” is connected with it throughout. (Page 650)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vellita: {'def': '【形】弯曲的，卷曲的。 ~gga, 【形】有卷曲的顶端。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】弯曲的，卷曲的。vellitagga,【形】有卷曲的顶端。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of vellati, vell to stagger, cp. paṭivellati] crooked, bent; (of hair:) curly PvA.189. It is only used with ref. to hair.

--agga with bending (or crooked) tip (of hair), i. e. curled Th.2, 252 (cp. ThA.209); J.V,203 (=kuñcit’agga C.); VI,86 (sun-agga-vellita); PvA.46, 142. -- Cp. kuñcita-kesa J.I,89. (Page 650)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vellāḷin: {'def': '(adj.) [Is it a corruption fr. *veyyāyin=*vyāyin?] flashing (of swords) J.VI,449. (Page 650)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Velā: {'def': '【阴】时间，海岸，界限，边界。 ~tikkama, 【阳】超越界限。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】时间，海岸，界限，边界。velātikkama,【阳】超越界限。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic velā in meaning 1; Ep. Sk. in meanings 2 & 3] -- 1. time, point of time (often equal to kāla) Pug.13 (uḍḍahana°); J.IV,294; Miln.87; KhA 181; PugA 187; SnA 111 (bhatta° meal-time); DhsA.219; PvA.61, 104, 109 (aruṇ’uggamana°), 129, 155; VvA.165 (paccūsa° in the early morning). -- 2. shore, sea-shore Vin.II,237=A.IV,198; J.I,212; Mhvs 19, 30. -- 3. limit, boundary A.V,250 (between v. & agyāgāra); Th.1, 762; Miln.358; DhsA.219; in spec. sense as “measure,” restriction, control (of character, sīla-velā) at Dhs.299 (“not to trespass” trslⁿ), and in dogmatic exegesis of ativelaṁ at Nd¹ 504; cp. Nd² 462 & DhsA.219. -- 4. heap, multitude (?) DhsA.219 (in Npl. Uruvelā which is however *Uruvilvā). (Page 650)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Velāmika: {'def': '(adj.) [velāma+ika, the word velāma probably a district word] “belonging to Velāma,” at D.II,198 used as a clan-name (f. Velāmikānī), with vv. ll. Vessinī & Vessāyinī (cp. Velāma Np. comb^d with Vessantara at VbhA.414), and at D.II,333 classed with khujjā, vāmanikā & komārikā (trslⁿ “maidens”; Bdhgh: “very young & childish”: see Dial. II.359); v. l. celāvikā. They are some sort of servants, esp. in demand for a noble’s retinue. See also Np. Velāma (the V.‹-› sutta at J.I,228 sq.). (Page 650)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Velāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. velā] to destroy (?) DhsA.219 (cp. Expos. II.297); expl^d by viddhaṁseti. More appropriate would be a meaning like “control,” bound, restrict. (Page 650)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vema: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vāyati², cp. Sk. veman (nt.); Lat. vimen] loom or shuttle DhA.III,175; SnA 268. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. vāyati2, cp. Sk. veman (nt.)),【阳】织布梭，织布机(loom or shuttle)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】织布梭，织布机。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Vemajjha: {'def': '(fr. vi+majjha),【中】中央，中心(middle, centre)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】中央，中心。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+majjha] middle, centre J.IV,250; VI,485; Pug.16, 17; Vism.182 (°bhāga central part); VvA.241, 277. -- Loc. vemajjhe: (a) in the present, or central interval of saṁsāra Sn.849 (cp. Nd¹ 213 and majjha 3 b); (b) in two, asunder Vism.178. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vemaka: {'def': '(nt.)=vema Vin.II,135. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vematika: {'def': '(fr. vimati),【形】可疑的(in doubt, uncertain, doubtful)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可疑的。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vimati] in doubt, uncertain, doubtful Vin.I,126; II,65; IV,220, 259; Vism.14 (°sīla). Opp. nibbematika. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vematta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. vi+matta¹] difference, distinction Miln.410; Vism.195. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 Vemattatā, 【阴】差异，区别。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. vi+matta1),【中】vemattatā,【阴】差异，区别，古译：胜如(difference, distinction)。vemattatā, 种种性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vemattatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. formation fr. vematta] difference, distinction, discrepancy, disproportion(ateness) M.I,453, 494; S.II,21; III,101; V,200; A.III,410 sq.; Sn.p.102 (puggala°); Nett 4, 72 sq., 107 sq.; Miln.284, 285. ‹-› The 8 differences of the var. Buddhas are given at SnA 407 sq. as addhāna°, āyu°, kula°, pamāṇa°, nekkhamma°, padhāna°, bodhi°, raṁsi°. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Vemānika: {'def': '【形】有仙女宫殿的。 ~peta, 参考 Vimānapeta。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. vimāna¹] having a fairy palace (see vimāna 3) J.V,2; DhA.III,192. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有仙女宫殿的。vemānikapeta,【阳】半受罪半享乐的阴精。参考 Vimānapeta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Vemātika: {'def': '(vi+°mātika),【形】同父异母的(having a different mother)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [vi+°mātika] having a different mother J.IV,105 (°bhāginī); VI,134 (°bhātaro); PvA.19. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】同父异母的。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Venateyya: {'def': '[fr. vinata] descended from Vinatā, Ep. of a garuḷa Ps.II,196; J.VI,260; Dāvs.IV,45. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Venayika: {'def': '【阳】 1. 虚无主义者。 2. 律师（戒律的专家）。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. vinaya] versed in the Vinaya Vin.I,235; III,3 (cp. Vin A.I,135); M.I,140; A.IV,175, 182 sq.; V,190; Miln.341. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [fr. vi 3+naya] a nihilist. The Buddha was accused of being a v. M.I,140. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.虚无主义者。2.律师(戒律的专家)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Veneyya: {'def': '(adj.) [=vineyya, grd. of vineti; cp. BSk. vaineya Divy 36, 202 & passim] to be instructed, accessible to instruction, tractable, ready to receive the teaching (of the Buddha). The term is late (Jātaka style & Com.) J.I,182 (Buddha°), 504; SnA 169, 510; DhA.I,26; VbhA.79; VvA.217; ThA.69 (Ap. v. 10). Cp. buddha°. (Page 648)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】易于指导的，易于管教的。(p305)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】易於指导的，易於管教的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Veneyyatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. veneyya] tractableness Nett 99. (Page 649)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Venhu: {'def': '→Veṇhu.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'Veṇhu, Veṇḍu: m. [Sk. Viṣṇu] ヴィシュヌ天', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Vepaciti: {'def': 'Vepacittiya, Vepacitti: m. [Sk. Vipracitti. BSk. Vemacitrin, Vemacitti] 吠波質底, 毘摩質多[阿修羅王の名]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Vepacitti: {'def': 'Vepaciti, Vepacittiya: m. [Sk. Vipracitti. BSk. Vemacitrin, Vemacitti] 吠波質底, 毘摩質多[阿修羅王の名]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Vepacittiya: {'def': 'Vepacitti, Vepaciti: m. [Sk. Vipracitti. BSk. Vemacitrin, Vemacitti] 吠波質底, 毘摩質多[阿修羅王の名]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】